IMPOSEIQ

ImposeIQ Suite Help & User Guide

Professional imposition, variable-data printing, OMR mark generation, embellishment previewing and hot-folder automation for Duplo DC-series finishers — in one desktop suite.

ImposeIQ · N-Up Layout Builder ImposeIQ VDP · Variable Data Designer OMR Generator Embellishment Studio File Name Tagger Metadata Tagger Die Line Reader JDF Bridge Workflow Automation Storefront Book
Getting started

Quick Start

Impose a print-ready PDF in 60 seconds

Drop your artwork on ImposeIQ. Open ImposeIQ and drop a full-bleed PDF onto the Source PDF box (or click it to browse). One page = the same piece repeated across the sheet; a multi-page file gives you duplex backs or a gang layout.
Check the piece size. ImposeIQ reads the TrimBox when the PDF has one and fills in trim and bleed for you. No TrimBox? Type the finished trim size and bleed under Piece, or pick a preset (business card, postcard…).
Pick a press sheet. Choose a sheet size under Press Sheet (12 × 18, 13 × 19, or your own custom sizes from Settings). The lead edge — the edge that feeds into the finisher first — is the top of the preview.
Let it lay out. Tick Auto (best yield) and ImposeIQ fills the sheet with as many pieces as fit, rotating them if that yields more. The live preview shows every cell, crop marks, and the footer confirms N-up, columns × rows and sheet usage.
Generate. Click Generate Imposed PDF. With Open PDF after generating ticked you can page through the result immediately. Add DC Marks first (see below) if the job runs on a DC-618 / 648 / 746, and Export DC Job XML for the cutter.
ImposeIQ with a postcard file loaded, imposed 8-up on a 13 x 19 sheet
ImposeIQ with a 5.5 × 4.25 in postcard loaded. The PDF carried no bleed, so 0.125 in of mirrored bleed was added automatically — the note under the Generate button says so. Auto (best yield) settled on 2 × 4 = 8-up on a 13 × 19 sheet, and the footer confirms the sheet is inside the DC-618/648 slit and cut limits.

Your first VDP merge

Load a template. Open ImposeIQ VDP (button in ImposeIQ's header, or from the suite) and drop your static design PDF into 1 · Template PDF. A 2-page PDF automatically becomes front & back; or add a back later with Load side-2 (back) PDF…
Load your data. Drop a CSV or Excel file into 2 · Data. Every column shows up as a chip — click View data table to sanity-check the records.
Place fields. In 3 · Fields add Text, Image, Barcode or Number fields and drag them into place on the page. In a text field, mix static words with «Column» placeholders — e.g. Hello «First»!
Proof it. Switch the header toggle to Preview and step through records to see real data flowing into the layout. Overflowing fields get flagged.
Set the imposition. In 4 · Imposition pick the sheet, bleed, margins and record order — Cut & Stack keeps piles collated after cutting. The mini preview shows the grid.
Export. In 6 · Merge & Export choose the record range and click Export Imposed PDF. Tick Open the PDF after saving to have the finished file open automatically in your PDF viewer.
ImposeIQ VDP with a wedding invitation template, a 5000-record list and a name field selected on the canvas
ImposeIQ VDP with a 5.25 × 7.25 in wedding invitation as the template and a 5000-record list loaded. The «first_name» «last_name» field is selected on the canvas — the properties panel sets its position, font and content, and the imposition column has already worked the job out at 2 × 2 on a 12 × 18 sheet: 5000 pieces, 1250 sheets.
Tip — Everything you dial in regularly (sheet, gutters, rotation, DC Marks…) can be saved as your personal defaults in Settings, so both apps start the way your shop runs.

Your first embellishment preview

Open the Studio and load artwork. Drop a PDF, JPG or PNG onto 1 · Artwork — or pick one of the ten demo samples from the dropdown, which is the quickest way to show someone the effect when you don't have their file with you. Import a print-ready PDF and you'll be asked which pages, layers and spot inks are artwork and which are the varnish or foil.
Say where the varnish goes. The Spot UV channel is selected by default. Click From light areas and the Studio builds the channel straight off the artwork — for a logo that sits light on a dark ground that is usually the whole job done. Tick Show channel overlay in step 3 to see the coated area picked out in red, and untick it again when it looks right.
Turn the coating on. On the Effects tab tick Apply sensory coating and set Coating height — 80–95 µm reads convincingly. Drag in the preview to orbit the piece: the varnish only exists in movement, so a static view undersells it every time.
Add foil if the job calls for it. Tick Foil over coated area under DFL digital foil and pick a swatch — 24 are stocked, including holographic. Foil transfers where the foil channel is, so use Copy to other in step 2 to foil the same shapes you varnished, or build a separate selection with the wand.
Put it on the real product. On the Sheet tab choose the shape — flat card, carton, book cover, bottle, folded greeting card, beverage can, presentation folder, hang tag, table tent, door hanger, Z-fold brochure or wrapped carton — and set the finished width. Then pick a Lamination: soft-touch under a gloss varnish is the classic contrast, and it is the pairing that sells most jobs.
Show it, then send it. Hit Auto-orbit and hold B to flick back to the plain sheet — that before-and-after is what closes the sale. From the Export tab take a PNG, a looping GIF for an email, an MP4, or the Embellishment plate — the press-ready PDF the coater actually needs.
Embellishment Studio showing a menu cover with gold foil and raised spot UV
The Embellishment Studio with the Casa Verde demo — the crest and wordmark carry bright gold DFL foil over a 95 µm DuSense build on matte laminate. The usage read-out on the right reports 2.6% coverage, 17.3 cm² coated and 6,074 pieces per liter — the figures you cost the job from.
Overview

The Suite at a Glance

The ImposeIQ Suite covers the whole path from customer artwork to a finished, cut, collated product on a Duplo DC-series finisher:

Artwork PDF full-bleed, 1 or many pages Template + Data static PDF + CSV / Excel Hot folder unattended job intake IMPOSEIQ N-up · duplex · gang · DC marks IMPOSEIQ VDP variable data · merge · impose AUTOMATION workflows drive ImposeIQ headless Imposed PDF + DC Job XML for the cutter Imposed VDP PDF or PDF/VT with DPM metadata DUPLO DC-618 / 648 / 746 slit · cut · crease OMR Generator adds OMR marks to existing PDFs and watches folders on its own
How the four applications fit together. ImposeIQ and VDP are the two interactive designers; Workflow Automation runs your real apps unattended from a watch folder, FTP/SFTP or on demand, plus its own steps for copies, numbering, approvals and delivery; the OMR Generator handles OMR-mark jobs and watch folders on its own.
The Suite launcher — every app in one place, with a short description of each.
The Suite launcher — every app in one place, with a short description of each.
The tray menu. Every window is one click away without going back to the launcher, and the watcher’s state — whether it is watching and how many files it has processed — is visible without opening anything.
The tray menu. Every window is one click away without going back to the launcher, and the watcher’s state — whether it is watching and how many files it has processed — is visible without opening anything.

ImposeIQ

The N-up layout builder. Takes finished artwork PDFs and imposes them onto press sheets — repeat, duplex, gang, or signature booklet (saddle-stitch nesting) — with crop marks, fold/perf lines, a full set of DC finisher marks, and DC Job XML export.

ImposeIQ VDP

The variable-data designer. Merges a CSV/Excel list into a static template with text, image, barcode and counter fields, then imposes the result — including PDF/VT export for digital front ends.

OMR Generator

Adds OMR collation marks to PDFs for Duplo bookletmakers and folders. Supports watch folders and an Explorer right-click "Apply OMR" action for drop-and-go jobs.

File Name Tagger

Writes Duplo mark codes and the job ticket — customer, quantity, PO, due date — into the filename itself, so artwork carries its own instructions. One watch folder per profile; a matching applier reads the codes back and draws the marks.

Metadata Tagger

The same codes and the same job ticket, written into the PDF's XMP and Info dictionary instead of its name. The filename stays exactly as the customer sent it; existing metadata from the designer or the press is merged, not replaced.

Workflow Automation

A trigger plus an ordered list of steps — not a node graph. Watch a folder, poll an FTP/SFTP server, or run on demand; preflight, impose and Book steps hand the job to your real apps, and 20-odd more steps handle copies, sequential numbering, approvals, notifications and delivery around them.

Preflight & Repair

Checks a PDF against the rules that decide whether a job runs clean — geometry, fonts, file integrity, declared image colour — then rewrites the file’s own structure to fix what can be fixed safely: missing bleed, page boxes, page rotation, embedded files, the Trapped flag, and a real ICC conversion of RGB and grayscale to CMYK. Saves as a new file, never over the original. See Preflight & Repair.

ImposeIQ Book

ImposeIQ held to book work — the same engine and the same window, with only the two book layouts. Saddle-stitch nesting or gathered perfect-bound signatures, plus the perfect-bound cover: spine width from the body stock, and the crease positions and fold directions that go with it.

ImposeIQ Storefront

White-label print catalogs your customers order from. Build a branded storefront per account, price each product with quantity breaks and configurator options, take artwork and a PO, and work the orders and quote requests in a queue — then publish the customer-facing site to GitHub Pages or Netlify and hand new orders straight to a workflow.

Application guide

ImposeIQ — Imposition

The window

The job setup sits in two collapsible columns down the left, and the right side is a live sheet preview that redraws with every change. The first column is the file and the piece — Source PDF, Templates, Piece, Press Sheet. The second is what happens to it on the sheet — Shift All, Gutters, Perforation & Crease, OMR Marks & Barcodes, Output Options — and ends with the Generate buttons. Either column folds away to a strip with the Collapse button at its head when you want the preview bigger. The header carries the unit switch (inches / mm), which re-labels every field in the app rather than just one panel, a jump to the VDP Designer, the AI Workflow hot-folder assistant, and Settings.

The whole window: file and piece on the left, sheet behaviour and output in the middle, live preview on the right, and the footer strip reading 8-up, 2 × 4, 76% sheet usage and a clean bill against the DC-618/648 limits.
The whole window: file and piece on the left, sheet behaviour and output in the middle, live preview on the right, and the footer strip reading 8-up, 2 × 4, 76% sheet usage and a clean bill against the DC-618/648 limits.

Above the preview, Use TrimBox decides whether the PDF’s own trim box or your typed Piece figures set the trim, Show pages draws the artwork rather than empty cells, and Reset clears the layout and the loaded file back to your saved defaults. The preview toolbar pages through sheets, flips to the back of a duplex job with Show Back, zooms with − / + / Fit, and Cut Data opens the slit and cut positions as text you can copy.

The footer strip is the live check, and it is worth reading on every job. It reports pieces per sheet, the columns × rows the layout settled on, sheet usage as the percentage of the press sheet covered by finished pieces, the fold-line count, and then either a green Within … slit/cut limits (naming the DC chosen) or an amber list naming exactly what is out of range and by how much. Nothing is blocked — you can generate a sheet a DC will refuse — but you will not do it without being told. The full set of limits it applies is in What the footer checks.

Cut Data on the footer: slit positions measured X from the left edge, cut positions Y from the lead edge, the same figures repeated in millimetres, and the verdict against the DC-618/648 limits.
Cut Data on the footer: slit positions measured X from the left edge, cut positions Y from the lead edge, the same figures repeated in millimetres, and the verdict against the DC-618/648 limits.

Source PDF, lock scale & zoom

Drop a full-bleed PDF on the Source box. ImposeIQ inspects it:

  • 1 page → the piece repeats across the sheet.
  • Multi-page → pages pair up as duplex fronts/backs, or fill a gang layout.
  • If the PDF carries a TrimBox, trim & bleed are read automatically (toggle Use TrimBox above the preview). Otherwise the manual Piece fields apply.

Lock scale (no shrink/enlarge) draws each page at its own native size, centered in its cell, instead of stretching it to fit the cell exactly — the safe choice when the file is already the correct physical size and you don't want even a hairline of scaling.

Zoom (%) scales the placed artwork in 1 % steps (default 100). It multiplies whatever the base size is — the fitted size normally, or the native size when Lock scale is on — so 97 pulls the art slightly inside each cell and 103 pushes bleed outward. Applies to the preview and the generated PDF alike.

Source PDF panel showing the file, its MediaBox, the bleed that was added, Lock scale and Zoom
Source PDF: the file, what ImposeIQ found in it, and what it did about the missing bleed — here 0.125 in was mirrored outward and the page grown to 5.750 × 4.500 in.

Piece, grid & rotation

  • Auto (best yield) — ImposeIQ computes the columns/rows that fit the most pieces, trying both orientations. This is the everyday mode.
  • Manual columns / rows — type an exact grid (setting either to 0 returns to auto). Useful to force a smaller count for step-and-repeat proofs.
  • Presets — common trim sizes (business card, postcards…) fill Trim W/H for you; bleed defaults to 0.125 in per side.
  • Rotation on sheet — Auto (best yield), As designed (never rotate) or Rotated 90° (always).
Piece section with manual columns and rows set to zero and Auto best yield ticked
Piece: leave the grid at 0 × 0 and Auto (best yield) works out the columns and rows, trying both orientations.

Press sheet, margins & gutters

Pick a sheet under Press Sheet (built-ins plus any custom sizes you add in Settings). Feed: the lead edge is the top of the preview — that matters for every DC mark. Margins are set per edge under Shift All (lead, tail, left, right) and gutters separate the finished pieces trim-to-trim:

FEED DIRECTION LEAD EDGE — enters the finisher first, and it is the top of the preview lead margin tail margin left right FINISHED PIECE trim size — what the customer gets trim size trim size trim size bleed artwork carries on past the trim, so the cut can never leave a white edge gutter X gutter Y thank-you-card.pdf · 5.5x4.25 trim, 0.125 bleed · 4-up on 12x18 · FRONT · ImposeIQ ◀ slug line (optional) Gutter 0 = butt cut — one cut serves both pieces. A DC allows more columns butt-cut than it does gutter-cut, so dropping the gutter to zero is often what brings a busy sheet back inside its slit limit. crop marks at every trim corner
Anatomy of an imposed sheet. Margins are set per edge; bleed is measured outward from every trim box; gutters are measured trim-to-trim, not bleed-to-bleed. The lead edge is always the top of the preview.
Note — Gutters are trim-to-trim. With 0.125 in bleed per side, a 0.25 in gutter gives butt-to-butt bleed; wider gutters give the slitter a waste chip between pieces.

Duplex backs & gang layout

  • Duplex — with a multi-page file, pages pair as front/back (alternating pages, or split — first half fronts, second half backs). Backs are automatically mirrored for the flip edge (long-edge left/right mirror, or short-edge top/bottom). Check them with Show Back above the preview.
  • Gang — every page of a multi-page file is placed once, filling the sheet with different pieces. The preview labels which page lands in which cell; fill repeat tops up leftover cells with copies.

Booklet & signature imposition

Page layout, in Output Options, decides what goes in the cells. Repeat puts the same page in every cell. Gang walks a multi-page file through the cells in order. Booklet and Booklet ×2 impose saddle-stitch signatures — the page order folds into a book rather than reading across the sheet.

Gang adds a Fill order: Across rows (left to right), Down columns (lead to tail), HC Cut & Stack, which orders the pages so that after the stack is slit apart each pile is already in sequence — the right choice when the finished pieces are collated afterwards rather than handled one sheet at a time — or DC Series Cut & Stack, the same order the VDP Imposer uses: each column runs down through every sheet, so after the DC cuts the sheets you stack column 1’s pile under column 2’s, then column 3’s, and the whole run reads in order. The Automation app’s Imposition node follows whichever order the production profile was saved with. Neither cut & stack order repeats the set into empty cells. Repeat set to fill empty cells tops up the leftover cells on the last sheet with copies instead of leaving them blank.

Booklet mode on a 76-page catalogue: 2 × 1 spread on an 18 × 24 landscape sheet, sheets per signature and creep both at 0, and the footer listing every margin that is still at zero.
Booklet mode on a 76-page catalogue: 2 × 1 spread on an 18 × 24 landscape sheet, sheets per signature and creep both at 0, and the footer listing every margin that is still at zero.

Booklet needs a 2 × 1 grid — one spread per sheet — and Booklet ×2 needs 2 × 2, two identical spreads stacked so the top and bottom rows carry the same content; slit the Gutter Y gap apart after printing and one run has produced two signature stacks. Picking either mode sets the manual grid for you. Duplex and long-edge flip are locked on, and the page count is padded with blanks to a multiple of four per signature, because that is what folding actually requires.

The two modes treat the sheet differently, on purpose. Booklet turns the delivered sheet 90° clockwise — Landscape, artwork and OMR marks together — and leaves Width and Height exactly as you typed them. Booklet ×2 leaves both the orientation and the Width/Height as the grid naturally needs, so its sheet often ends up taller than it is wide. That is not a mistake: the DBM-700 always short-edge feeds 2-up signature work, up to 14 in wide and up to 24 in long with the SDF-2200 and the long sheet kit. Booklet ×2 also clears every DC and OMR mark and forces the piece to portrait, once, as you enter the mode — there is no cutter pass on a saddle-stitch job — and you can change any of it back by hand afterwards.

Booklet ×2: a 2 × 2 sheet where the top and bottom rows are the same spread, ready to be slit down the Gutter Y gap into two signature stacks.
Booklet ×2: a 2 × 2 sheet where the top and bottom rows are the same spread, ready to be slit down the Gutter Y gap into two signature stacks.
ControlWhat it does
Sheets per signature 0 — the default — nests the whole document as one saddle-stitched signature. A number above 0 splits it into gathered signatures of that many sheets each, four pages to a sheet, which is what perfect-bound and case-bound work needs.
Creep per sheet (mm) 0 to 3 in 0.05 mm steps, 0 = off. Shifts each sheet’s live art toward the spine as you work from the outermost sheet inward, to take out the fore-edge push that paper thickness causes. The outermost sheet of each signature is always 0 and the creep resets there for every signature. Trim marks and fold lines do not move — only the art nudges. Roughly 0.1–0.3 mm per sheet is a normal starting point depending on stock.
Calculate creep from paper weight Takes a Paper weight in gsm (30–300, uncoated offset roughly), estimates caliper as gsm / 800 and sets creep per sheet to caliper × 2. It is an estimate, not a measurement — fold a real dummy at this signature length and fine-tune the number by hand if the fore-edge does not line up.
Shrink PDF to fit Scales the piece’s Trim W/H down just enough that two pieces of the spread fit inside the Duplo DBM-700i’s 14 in width. This is a real resize of the piece — the same as typing smaller trim figures yourself — not the cosmetic Zoom (%). It does not touch your press sheet, and unticking it restores the exact Trim W/H you had before.
Wider than 14 in and the panel says so outright: the job will not run on a DBM-700i as configured. Either tick Shrink PDF to fit or move to a narrower sheet — if that is the machine it is headed for.

Perforation & crease

DC-F100 fold type adds the fold to the DC Job XML, so a DC-618, DC-648 or DC-746 with the DC-F100 folder gets it with the job: V1, V2, Gate, C-Gate, C, Z or D-Parallel. Picking a type sets up its creases if the count is different; a job that already has the right number keeps its positions, so move them to where you need them. Each piece must have 1 crease for V1 or V2, 2 for Gate, C or Z, and 3 for C-Gate or D-Parallel, otherwise the fold is left out and a warning says so. C and Z use the same lines, so the type you pick is what tells the folder which to do. DC Impose has the same choice under Crease and perforate. The JDF Bridge keeps the fold when it translates between XML and JDF, but the fold travels in a private Duplo attribute there, so a DC console reading the JDF directly will not see it: send XML when the job has a fold.

Add fold lines per piece: creases draw as an orange dash-dot line and perforations as a fine green dash, both in the preview and (optionally) in the generated PDF. The positions feed the DC Job XML so the finisher creases exactly where the layout says. Offset is measured from the piece’s trim-top for a horizontal line and its trim-left for a vertical one, and each line repeats once per piece across the whole grid rather than being drawn per cell.

Four perforation lines on a 2 × 3 layout — three horizontal, one vertical — with the tool, orientation and offset on each row, and the footer counting 0 creases and 24 perforations per sheet.
Four perforation lines on a 2 × 3 layout — three horizontal, one vertical — with the tool, orientation and offset on each row, and the footer counting 0 creases and 24 perforations per sheet.

A crease is one full-width pass and needs only its offset; Position… drops it on a half, third or quarter of the piece. A perforation — Perf, Micro, Slice-Score or Score — can also run only part of the way across, which is what Runs sets: pick First half, Middle third and so on and both ends are filled in from the piece's real placed size, or Part of it… to type them, with the length shown beside the boxes as you go. The order you type the two numbers in doesn't matter — a range that reads backwards is simply turned around, and one that runs past the edge is trimmed to it, so the line stays on screen while you work rather than blinking out mid-keystroke. If a line genuinely can't be cut — an offset outside the piece — the row says so instead of quietly showing nothing.

RUNS — HOW FAR THE LINE CROSSES THE PIECE Full length edge to edge — the default First half both ends set for you Middle half a tear-off strip in from both edges Vertical, part of it… type the two ends yourself The order you type them in does not matter. A range that reads backwards is turned around and one that runs past the edge is trimmed to it, so the line keeps drawing while you type instead of blinking out mid-keystroke. A line that genuinely cannot be cut — an offset outside the piece — says so on its own row rather than quietly showing nothing.
Runs sets both ends of a partial perforation from the piece's real placed size, so a tear-off strip is one choice rather than two numbers.

Standard Pattern lays down a whole set at once: pick the tool — Perf, Micro, Slice-Score or Score — the orientation, how many divisions, and (if you want) how far each line runs. Divisions run from 2 to 7, so one to six evenly spaced lines, and the note under the controls tells you in words what Apply is about to do before you press it. Applying again with the same tool replaces that tool’s lines rather than stacking more on top, so you can step the division count up and down freely. Score only exists on the RTM module, so choosing it locks the orientation to vertical.

Standard Pattern set to Perf and 3 divisions, spelling out what it will add: two evenly spaced horizontal lines, dividing the piece into three rows.
Standard Pattern set to Perf and 3 divisions, spelling out what it will add: two evenly spaced horizontal lines, dividing the piece into three rows.

Draw thin guide lines on the generated PDF puts the creases and perforations on the imposed sheet as an orange dash-dot and a fine green dash — and always as its own PDF layer, named ImposeIQ Fold & Perf Guides. Switch that layer off in Acrobat (or delete it) and the artwork underneath is untouched, so the same file can go to the finisher with the guides showing and to the customer without them. The OMR marks have their own separate layer when Apply as a layer is ticked in DC Marks, so the two can be turned on and off independently.

OMR Marks & Barcodes — what the finisher reads

Everything the DC-618 / 648 / 746 needs to recognize and process the sheet, all in millimeters, drawn on the front of every sheet:

MarkWhat it does
Barcode (Code 39)Job number 1–250 in the 20–50 mm zone; optional human-readable text under it.
QR codeFree-form payload assembled from User code · BC number · Page · Total pages · Filename (pick the parts in Settings).
REG markCorner registration mark; position set by Marks Top / Marks Right.
Skew markBar that lets the machine measure sheet skew.
Shrink markSecond registration lower on the sheet (Shrink Top, default 370 mm) so stock shrinkage can be compensated; clamped automatically on short sheets.
DDC circlesCircular registration marks (3 or 4 mm) down both side edges for the DDC-8000 / DDC-810 PRO.
U/D + DSMUp/Down orientation marks and side marks (lead/trail distances) for sheet-order verification.
UD-320 register marksThe lead-edge marks the UD-320 rotary die cutter reads, per its own manual — see UD-320 register marks below. Unlocks the sheet turn.
End markExtra bar on the last sheet of the job.
BoldThickens all bars to 2 mm for hard-to-read stocks.
Marks on artwork — the DC reads these off bare paper, so a mark printed over inked area won't scan and shows on the finished piece. If any enabled mark lands on the artwork (its bleed box counts, since bleed is printed too) the mark is ringed in red on the preview and the cut summary says which ones and how far each would have to move to reach clear paper. Widen that edge's margin, change Marks Top / Marks Right, or put the cluster in a different corner.
DC Marks section
The DC Marks section — geometry identical to the OMR Generator, so the finisher sees exactly what it expects.
LEAD EDGE (top of sheet) REG mark skew mark Code 39 barcode QR code shrink mark DDC circles (both edges) Marks Top (mm) Marks Right (mm) BC Top (mm) Shrink Top (mm) DC Marks · Shrink Top 370 mm · Marks Top 9 mm · Right 9 mm · BC 007 DC Marks slug line (optional, position set in Settings)
DC mark geometry, measured in mm from the lead (top) and right edges. The optional DC Marks slug line prints the key numbers on the sheet for the operator.
Tip — Turn on the DC Marks slug line in Settings and the sheet itself tells the operator the Shrink Top, Marks Top/Right and barcode number — no need to open the job file at the finisher. Six positions available; see Settings & defaults.

Two things about this panel are easy to miss. Auto-assign this number when a template is saved, on by default, takes the next free barcode number from the job range in Settings → Job numbers, so two live jobs can never end up sharing a barcode; untick it to keep whatever you typed. And Apply as a layer puts every OMR mark on a switchable PDF layer named ImposeIQ OMR Marks, so a prepress operator can hide or delete the marks without touching the artwork — the layer prints by default, and it is separate from the fold and perf guide layer, so the two can be turned on and off independently.

Which machines you own lives in the suite’s own Settings, on the Home screen — one list the Imposer, the OMR Generator and the workflow steps all read. Untick a machine there and its marks disappear from every app at once, which is why a mark you expected can be missing from this panel entirely.

Booklet-maker and collator barcodes

The booklet maker’s OMR and barcode marks and the DSC-10/60 collator barcode have their own section, Booklet Maker OMR & Barcode, collapsed until you open it and hidden when no machine in Settings uses them.

The Code 39 barcode above is the DC cutter’s job number. Three further marks exist for the feeding and collating side of the line, each belonging to a different kit and carrying different data. All of them can print on the same sheet.

MarkWhat reads it, and what it is for
Booklet maker barcode The DSF-2200 / DSF-6000 barcode kit. The feeder reads it off the lead edge of every sheet and the DBM-700 uses it for Barcode Feed Check and Barcode Random set separation. Build the string from the same fields as the PC CONTROLLER’s DSF-2200 [Details] → [Barcode] screen and set the same numbers there.
Booklet maker end mark A solid black bar on the last sheet of each set, watched by the DSF feeder’s optical sensor to close the set — the [End Mark Count] and [End Mark Random] modes. This is the alternative to the barcode kit, not a companion to it: a shop without the barcode kit separates sets this way.
Collator barcode The LU barcode a DSC-10/60 tower reads off every sheet to check set order — [Barcode Check Mode] on the PC CONTROLLER’s [Function] → [LUL/LUR] tab. Match its length to [Total Barcode Digit] on that tab.

The two barcodes are built the same way: a symbology (Code 39 by default; the booklet barcode also offers Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 128 and Codabar, and the collator barcode adds Code 93 and EAN-128), a total digit count — 4 to 120 on the booklet barcode, up to 120 on the collator — and a reading order, ascending or descending. An optional Function ID takes the first two digits, a Set ID takes up to 32 more, and a check digit (mod 10, weighted 3–1) can close the string. The sheet number fills what is left. Position is set as a distance from the lead edge plus an offset from the left edge, the sheet center or the right edge, with the bar dimensions typed in millimetres. The barcode prints on fronts only, in the same mark frame as the OMR marks, so a Booklet layout turns it along with them.

The position defaults are a starting point, not a verified reading zone. Confirm the lead-edge window and the sensor position against your DSF-2200 / DSF-6000 or DSC barcode kit manual and run a test sheet before a live job.

The end mark is simpler and fussier. Choose whether it falls on the last sheet of the document or the last sheet of every set (with Sheets per set), which edge it sits on, how far in, and where across. Length must be 15–20 mm and thickness 2–5 mm — that is the window the DSF sensor needs to track the bar as the sheet goes past, and ImposeIQ warns when you leave it. The bar prints 100% K; a tint or a screen will not trigger the sensor. It needs 5–10 mm of clear paper all round, so the quiet zone is knocked out white by default, and the app also catches the specific clash of a tail-edge slug line sitting inside a trail-edge end mark’s quiet zone.

UD-320 register marks

The UD-320 reads a register mark off whichever face of the sheet is up, so both sides carry marks — and the machine tells the two faces apart by how far the X mark sits from the center of the sheet. ImposeIQ places them for you from the geometry in the UD-310 Operation Manual (p.30):

MarkPageWhere it goes
Y axis registration markFront and back A 3 × 100 mm bar on the center of the paper width, 5 mm from the lead edge (10 mm in Y-only mode).
X axis registration mark — face upFront 3 mm wide × 25 mm along the feed, 5 mm from the lead edge, 100 mm from the sheet center.
X axis registration mark — face downBack Same bar, 76 mm from the sheet center, on the opposite side of the sheet from the face-up mark.

X mark side picks which edge of the sheet the front's 100 mm mark sits toward. The back's 76 mm mark goes on the opposite side of the sheet, the way the manual's figure draws the pair. The back page is imposed mirrored, so ImposeIQ works that out from the duplex turn — and on a short-edge turn it also moves the back marks to the tail end of the page, since that edge feeds first.

UD reading mode is either X + Y — the usual choice, both marks on both faces — or Y only, which prints the center bar alone, 10 mm from the lead edge.

Get the distance wrong and the machine stops. The manual allows the print position to wander no more than ±2 mm from the paper center; outside that the UD-320 halts with a registration error. Nothing else in the DC mark set is repeated on the back — the barcode, REG, skew, shrink, DDC and DSM marks are all read off the front face only.

Source PDF already alternates front and back pages matters only for a marks-only pass over a file that is already imposed duplex — a File Name Tagger job, or the F flag in a tagged filename. With it ticked, even pages take the 100 mm X mark and odd pages the 76 mm one. Leave it off for a file of fronts. Imposing here marks both faces correctly on its own and ignores it.

ImposeIQ VDP places the same marks the same way on its merged records.

Turning the sheet for the UD-320

Tick UD-320 register marks and a further option appears: Turn the imposed artwork on the sheet, by 1° or 2°, clockwise or counter-clockwise. It is offered only with UD-320 marks on, because it is the rotary die that wants the work presented slightly off-square — a straight die edge lying exactly parallel to the cylinder strikes along its whole length at once instead of rolling into the stock.

What turnsWhat does not
The imposed pieces, as one block about the sheet center — spacing between pieces is unchanged, so the die geometry stays valid, just presented at an angle. The UD-320 register marks, and every other DC mark. They stay square to the sheet so the machine still reads a mark square to the feed edge.
The crop marks and any crease or perforation guides, since they belong to the artwork and have to keep pointing at the same places on it. The slug line, which is a human-readable label rather than anything the machine registers to.

The sheet size does not change, so the turn eats into the margins: the block sweeps its corners outward. A 2° turn on a 10 × 15.5 in block needs about 10.53 × 15.84 in of room. ImposeIQ measures that and warns if it will not fit or if the clearance drops below 0.02 in, rather than letting a piece run off the edge. The preview shows the turn exactly as the output has it, marks square and artwork angled.

Not for a DC-series cut. The DC job XML describes square cut blocks, and a DC cannot cut at an angle. If you turn the sheet with Embed DC job XML switched on, ImposeIQ says so — that XML will not match a turned sheet. Turn the sheet for UD-320 die work; leave it off for anything going to a DC-618 / 648 / 746.

ImposeIQ VDP has the same option in its own DC marks panel, working the same way on the merged records.

Choosing the DC machine

DC machine in the XML and JDF, at the top of OMR Marks & Barcodes, says which DC runs this job: DC-618, DC-648, DC-746 or DC-746 B2. Leave it on From Settings and every DC ticked in Settings → Machines counts.

  • Warnings in the footer are only for the DC you picked, and the “within limits” line names it.
  • The press sheet list says what each size means for it, such as 14 × 20 — fits DC-648 or 18 × 24 — exceeds DC-746. On From Settings it names only the sizes the ticked machines disagree about.
  • The XML and JDF carry the machine name. DC-746 B2 writes DC-746, the machine the ticket drives.
  • The choice is saved with the template, and an imported JDF sets it.

For a job run from the DC-746 JDF Console and a BCR-02, three marks settings go together:

  • QR code and QR holds only the JDF job ID: the Console matches the scan against the ticket’s JobID, so the QR holds that and nothing else. Ticking the second turns on the first.
  • White space around the REG mark and QR keeps 3 mm of paper clear around both. On a tight layout that can cut into the nearest piece, so check the corner on an 8-up.
  • JDF: DC has the DC-ST100 stacker names the stacker in the ticket. With it ticked the footer also checks the DC-ST100’s limits.

The DC-746 B2: DC-20000 cut sheets

Pick DC-746 B2 as the DC machine and a press sheet over 370 mm each way, such as ISO B2, and a DC-20000 cut sheets panel opens under Press Sheet. The DSF-20K feeds the B2 sheet, the DC-20000 cuts it across its feed into 2 or 3 cut sheets, and each turns 90° onto the DC-746. A sheet up to 370 mm wide skips all of that and feeds straight into the DC-746.

SettingWhat it does
Cut sheets a B22, 3, or whichever fits the most pieces.
LengthsEqual; Equal or unequal, whichever fits most (tries every length in 5 mm steps, and keeps equal lengths on a tie); or Set them: type the lengths in mm, JOB A first, such as 300, 357. One length sets JOB A and JOB B takes the rest.
JOB A, B, CChoose which cut sheet the preview shows. The picture under them shows the whole B2.

The sheet is laid out as a 20 mm lead strip, the cut sheets with 10 mm gutters between them, and at least a 10 mm trail. A 500 × 707 mm sheet gives 2 cut sheets of about 333.5 mm or 3 of about 219 mm. Each must be 210–370 mm long. The panel lists the cut positions from the B2 lead: set them on the DC-20000, whose own job files ImposeIQ does not write.

  • The preview, grid and footer show the chosen cut sheet as the DC-746 sees it, with its lead edge at the top. The form’s margins and gutters apply to each cut sheet, and the width and height stay the B2 sheet.
  • Each cut sheet has its own REG mark, 12 mm in from the cut and the B2’s left edge, its own barcode and its own QR. The B2 also prints the DC-20000’s REG line across its lead, 1.5 mm wide and 13 mm in, when REG is on.
  • Equal lengths are one DC-746 JOB, with one XML or JDF. A multi-page file runs through the cut sheets in order, and a single sheet fills them all.
  • Unequal lengths are one JOB each: the barcode number goes up by one per cut sheet, the job name gains JOB A, JOB B, and the QR, XML and JDF follow, so an export saves one file each. A multi-page file stays on equal lengths.
  • Double-sided B2 sheets line the backs up for the flip you pick. Landscape is ignored. PDF layers don’t carry onto the B2 page as layers you can switch.

Photo Layout does the same for photo orders, dealing several sizes onto one B2: see B2 sheets on the DC-746 B2. In a workflow, see DC-746 and DC-746 B2 JDF workflows.

What the footer checks

These are the numbers the footer strip measures every layout against, taken from the Duplo spec pages. They are warnings, not locks — the app will still generate the sheet, and there are jobs where you know better than the check — but every amber line is something the machine is likely to argue about.

WhatLimit
Lead margin3 mm minimum
Tail margin5 mm minimum
Left / right margin3.2–55 mm — the edge slitter’s range, at both ends
Gutter X0 (butt cut) or 5–15 mm; nothing in between, and nothing above 15
Gutter Y0 or 3 mm and up
Finished piece, as placed48 mm wide and 50 mm long, minimum
Slits6 maximum — which is 3 columns with gutters, or 5 columns butt-cut
Cuts30 maximum per document
Creases20 maximum per document
DC-618 sheet210–330.5 mm wide (13 in); 210–750 mm long as standard, 1,000 mm with banner setup
DC-648 sheet210–370 mm wide (14.56 in); 210–787 mm long as standard, 1,000 mm with banner setup
Any DC, over 1,000 mm longDisable the length limits in the DC Series settings
DC-746 sheet, fed directly 210–370 mm wide, 210–787 mm long as standard, 1,000 mm with banner setup
DC-746 B2 sheet (DSF-20K feeder) 370–750 mm each way, short or long edge first
DC-20000 B2 cutterCut sheets 190–370 mm long (at least 210 mm for the DC-746); lead cut at least 15 mm, gutter and trail cuts at least 10 mm; 6 cuts a sheet; 110–400 gsm
DC-618 / DC-648 / DC-746 slits6 / 8 with the optional module / 10 with two optional modules; 30 cuts and 20 creases on all three; smallest piece 48 × 50 mm
DC paper weightDC-618 and DC-648 110–400 gsm; DC-746 110–350 gsm
DC-ST100 stackerDC-648, DC-746, DC-746 B2; cards from 48 × 80 or 80 × 50 mm to 370 × 216 mm (width × length); 230–400 gsm; 1–5 stacks across with gutter slits (over 3 needs the side guides); stacks up to 40 mm
DC-F100 in-line folderDC-618, DC-648; 110–400 gsm (double parallel 110–230 gsm); input length no fold 50, one fold 127.5, two folds 170, double parallel 212.5, up to 1,000 mm; folded length 85–500 mm; width from 48 mm
DC-746 B2 in the ImposerSee The DC-746 B2: DC-20000 cut sheets.
The slit count is why dropping Gutter X to zero so often rescues a busy sheet. With gutters each internal division costs two slits; butt-cut it costs one. That is the difference between 3 columns and 5 on the same machine.

Two further checks are about marks rather than geometry. Every enabled OMR mark is measured against every piece, and any that lands on inked area — bleed counts, since bleed is printed — is ringed in red on the preview and named in the footer with how far it would have to move to reach clear paper. The machine reads these marks off bare paper, so one printed over artwork will not scan and will show on the finished piece. The end mark gets its own set of checks for length, thickness and quiet zone.

Generating output

  • Generate Imposed PDF — builds the press-ready file. Open PDF after generating, on by default, opens it as soon as it is written.
  • Export DC Job XML — the slit/cut/crease program the DC cutter imports directly. Embed DC job XML in the generated PDF attaches it inside the PDF so one file carries both.
  • Slug line — an audit line (file, trim, N-up, sheet, date) drawn in the margin at your chosen position, or off.
  • Secure Transfer — encrypt the PDF/XML pair for sharing outside the shop (see below).

Trim marks at each piece is on by default and is kept out of the lead zone where the machine reads its marks. Its four numbers are worth setting once to your house standard: Length (3 mm default, 1–20), Offset from the trim corner (0.5 mm default, 0–5), Thickness in points (0.5 pt default, 0.1–3) and Color, which is a full colour picker rather than a black-or-nothing switch — useful when the marks have to survive on a dark stock.

Cut Data, on the preview toolbar, opens the slit and cut positions for the current layout as plain text you can select or copy to the clipboard, in inches and millimetres. The same panel exports a Duplo HC-series guillotine program: a sequential .csv for an HC-550i or HC-680i that you copy straight to a USB stick, slits first, with a Job Number and Job Name. Auto-assign the job number on export takes the next number from the HC job range in Settings → Job numbers, the same way the barcode number does.

Secure Transfer

Wraps a PDF, a DC job XML, or both, into a single .iqenc package encrypted with a passphrase — AES-256-GCM with a PBKDF2-derived key, all of it the browser's own cryptography rather than anything home-made. It protects the files in transit: email, a USB stick, a shared drive. It is not a substitute for keeping either computer secure, and it is only ever as strong as the passphrase you pick.

Create Package — choose a PDF and/or an XML (or tick Use the current layout's DC job XML instead to include what is on screen), type the passphrase twice, and save. Open Package — choose the .iqenc, type the passphrase, and each file inside is saved one at a time. The status line names the full path every file was written to; if you cancel a save it says which file was skipped rather than leaving it looking like the passphrase failed.

Authenticated, not just encrypted. GCM verifies the package as it decrypts, so a wrong passphrase and a file that was altered or truncated in transit both fail outright with a message. You never get a silently corrupted PDF out the other end.

Templates

Save the entire layout — piece, sheet, margins, gutters, rotation, fold lines, every mark and its numbers, lock scale and zoom — under a name and an optional description, and recall it with two clicks. Templates are numbered in the order you create them and live on this machine; Settings → Templates lists every one with its number, name and description and is where you delete the ones you have finished with. Saving a template is also what draws the next barcode number, if auto-assign is on.

Clicking Save confirms it right there: a green line under the name says the template was saved, or updated if the name already existed, and the button reads Saved ✓ for a few seconds. An orange line says what went wrong if it could not be saved. A saved template appears in the workflow step’s list the next time that window comes to the front.

The Templates panel: name and description, the saved-layout picker, and the three ways a layout can cross to another machine.
The Templates panel: name and description, the saved-layout picker, and the three ways a layout can cross to another machine.

Three buttons move a layout off this machine. Export file writes the template out and Import file reads one back, which is how a layout reaches a second workstation or a colleague. Import DC Job XML / PDF… goes the other way: hand it a DC job XML, or a PDF with one embedded, and ImposeIQ reads the slit, cut and crease program back out into a live layout — the quickest way to pick up a job that already exists at the finisher.

Settings & defaults

The Settings panel holds machine-level configuration:

  • Custom press sheets — add your house sizes to the Sheet dropdown.
  • QR code contents — which parts build the QR payload.
  • DC Marks slug line — position (off, tail left/center/right, or either side vertical) and which values print: Shrink Top, Marks Top, Right, Barcode number. Saved immediately.
  • Defaults — how the app starts and what Reset returns to: Show pages, Trim marks, Lock scale, Auto (best yield), rotation, slug position, gutters, and the full set of DC mark defaults. Set them once, click Save, and every session starts your way.
ImposeIQ settings with DC slug line and defaults
Settings: the DC Marks slug line block and the Defaults that apply on startup and on Reset.
Application guide

Preflight & Repair

ImposeIQ Preflight PRO

ImposeIQ Preflight PRO (it was called Preflight Repair) is the one preflight tool on the Home screen - the older ImposeIQ Preflight no longer has a tile. It is also what the MIS uses to check artwork as it arrives on a job. It reads every object on every page, the way callas pdfToolbox and Enfocus PitStop do: each path, text run, image and gradient, with its real position, colour, overprint and transparency. The older structural checks only looked at the file’s framework. Choose a PDF, pick a profile and press Check.

What it checks. About forty checks in eight groups:

  • Pages and bleed. Bleed measured side by side from the artwork that reaches the trim (“short on the left, 0.03 in”). Also: text within the safety margin, a missing trim box, blank pages, mixed page sizes, the finished size against the job size, and page counts.
  • Colour. RGB and Lab in vector art, text and images. Also: spot colours (with a keep list for spot UV and foil plates), the same spot under two spellings, registration colour on the artwork, and total ink for vector art and inside CMYK images. White objects set to overprint, which vanish on press, are caught too.
  • Text and fonts. Fonts not embedded, Type 3 fonts, text below a minimum size, small reversed text, small rich-black text, small text in more than one ink, and black text not set to overprint.
  • Lines. Hairlines and zero-width lines, measured at their printed width.
  • Images. Effective resolution at the size each image is placed (with a separate floor for 1-bit line art), resolution far above what is needed, JPEG 2000 / JBIG2 compression, and 16-bit images.
  • Transparency, layers and interactive content. Transparency, layers, content on hidden layers, printing comments and stamps, form fields, JavaScript and attached files.
  • PDF/X through the existing structural checks.

Profiles. Profiles are built in for a digital press with Duplo finishing, offset coated (320% ink), offset uncoated (280%), newsprint (240%), wide format, Duplo DDC embellishment, PDF/X-1a and PDF/X-4. Adjust the checks lets you change the severity (error, warning, note or off) and the limits of each check. Save the result under your own name; your profiles appear in the workflow step and the MIS as well.

Fixes. Each fix changes only the objects it is about. The fixed file is always saved as a copy. The fixes:

  • Colour: overprint off on white objects; small black text set to overprint; small rich-black text to 100% K; spot colours to CMYK through each spot’s own CMYK recipe, keeping any spots you list (SpotUV, Foil); merging a spot named two ways; registration colour to black.
  • Lines: hairlines thickened to a minimum.
  • Document: hidden-layer content deleted and the layers removed; printing comments and form fields flattened into the page; JavaScript and application private data removed; an ICC output intent set.
  • Already available before: mirrored bleed, page-box clean-up, rotation, attached files, the Trapped flag and ICC colour conversion.

Seeing the problems. Click a finding to open its page with every problem outlined: red for errors, orange for warnings, blue for notes. The trim and bleed boxes are shown dashed. Two more tabs are useful: Inks, fonts & images lists every ink, font, image (with its ppi) and colour space, and What changed lists what the fixes did.

Reports. Save report writes a self-contained HTML report. Save marked-up PDF writes a copy of the PDF with each problem outlined and commented, which is handy to send to a customer.

callas pdfToolbox, Enfocus PitStop and other engines

Shops that already own a preflight engine can use it through ImposeIQ. Open Engines… and add one. Find installed engines looks in Program Files for pdfToolbox and PitStopServerCLI.

  • callas pdfToolbox (command line). Runs your .kfpx profile and reads pdfToolbox’s XML report. Exit codes 0–8 are the result (3 and 8 mean errors); 100 and above mean pdfToolbox could not run (licence, a damaged or encrypted file, a timeout). When the profile has fixups, the corrected PDF is kept.
  • Enfocus PitStop Server (command line). Runs PitStopServerCLI with a Preflight Profile (.ppp) or Action List (.eal) and reads the task report and the XML report.
  • Any other engine with a command line. Write its arguments with {input}, {output}, {report}, {profile}, {outdir} and {name}, and say which exit codes mean a pass or warnings only.
  • Hot folders. For PitStop Server, Enfocus Switch or pdfToolbox Server hot folders. ImposeIQ drops the PDF into the input folder and waits for it to reappear in the success, warning or error folder, reading any report left in the report folder.

Whichever engine runs, the results come back in the same form: pass or fail, errors, warnings, pages and reports. No password is stored for any engine.

In workflows and the MIS

Workflows: the Preflight PRO (ImposeIQ app) step, first in the ImposeIQ apps list, checks every PDF on a job with the built-in engine or any engine above. The older Preflight and Preflight Repair steps are no longer offered for new workflows; workflows that already use them keep running, and their step name says to use Preflight PRO. The example workflows use Preflight PRO.

  • With the built-in engine it can also apply fixes and carry the fixed file forward.
  • It can check the finished size against the MIS job and save an HTML report and a marked-up PDF to a folder.
  • It sets [var.preflightPassed], [var.preflightErrorCount], [var.preflightErrors] and [var.preflightReport] so a Route step can send failed files for approval.

MIS: each PDF on a job’s Artwork card has a Preflight button. The result shows as a Passed or Failed badge and is written into the job’s history. Setup → Artwork preflight chooses the engine and profile, whether to check against the job’s trim size, and whether to check incoming artwork automatically. That is on unless you turn it off: every PDF that arrives on a job — attached by hand, on a Storefront order, from a JDF ticket or from a workflow — is checked with Preflight PRO in the background, and the badge appears when it is done. Reports go in a Preflight folder beside the artwork (a Storefront upload’s go in the job’s own folder). A fixed copy never replaces the customer’s file.

Not tested yet on a real callas or PitStop install The connections follow callas’s and Enfocus’s published command-line documentation. Try one file through each engine before relying on it unattended.

What it is for

The rest of this section describes the earlier Preflight Repair layout (now Preflight PRO). Its repairs are all still available as fixes above.

A customer file arrives and you need two questions answered before it costs you a press run: what is wrong with it, and how much of that can be fixed without opening the artwork. Preflight Repair answers both. It checks a PDF against the same rule set ImposeIQ Preflight uses, then rewrites the file’s own structure to fix what can be fixed safely, and writes a new PDF beside the original.

The distinction worth holding on to: Preflight reports, Repair rewrites. Running diagnostics never touches the file. Repair never silently overwrites it either — it always asks where to save, and the name it offers is the original with _repaired on the end.

Not a certified validator The PDF/X checks here compose this tool’s own rules — output intent, embedded fonts, page boxes, and for X-1a no RGB or transparency. That is enough to catch the things that actually stop a job, but it is not a substitute for a certified PDF/X validator, and the tool says so in the window.

The window

The Preflight Repair window. The left column is the whole job — file, preset, the two actions, the diagnostics settings and the list of repairs. The right column stays empty until you run something, then fills with the issue table or the list of what changed.
The Preflight Repair window. The left column is the whole job — file, preset, the two actions, the diagnostics settings and the list of repairs. The right column stays empty until you run something, then fills with the issue table or the list of what changed.

Pick a file with Choose PDF… and the header shows its name and size. Nothing else in the window does anything until a file is loaded — both action buttons tell you to choose a PDF first.

The two actions sit together above the settings because they are the whole tool. Run Diagnostics reads the file and lists what it finds. Repair & Save As… applies whatever is ticked under Repairs to apply and asks where to write the result. They are independent: the diagnostics settings below do not influence a repair, and the repair options do not influence a diagnostic run.

Presets

The Preset card saves the whole set of repair options under a name, so the combinations you reach for repeatedly are one click away — a “leave the colour alone” set for customers who supply RGB on purpose, a “no bleed added” set for files that must not grow, a full clean-up set for the worst of the incoming work. Choose a saved preset and every option below changes to match. Type a name and press Save to store the options as they currently stand; the ✕ beside the list deletes the selected one after a confirmation.

Presets store the repair options only. The PDF/X standard and minimum DPI under Diagnostics are not part of a preset.

Run Diagnostics

Diagnostics has two settings of its own, and both apply to this run only.

PDF/X standard starts at None — skip and offers three targets. Each one turns on a specific bundle of rules and a maximum PDF version:

StandardWhat it means hereMax version
PDF/X-1aCMYK and spot only — no transparency, no ICC RGB. The strictest of the three, and the one that adds the RGB and grayscale image checks.1.4
PDF/X-3ICC colour-managed, so RGB through an ICC profile is allowed, but still no transparency.1.4
PDF/X-4ICC colour-managed with live transparency allowed. The realistic target for most digital work.1.6

All three require exactly one OutputIntent with subtype GTS_PDFX and the keys that go with it, an unencrypted file with a document ID in the trailer, a Trapped value of True or False in the Info dictionary, every font embedded, no referenced or attached files, and page boxes that are present, correctly nested and sitting at the origin.

Min. image DPI checks each image at the size it is actually placed on the page, not at its stored pixel dimensions. The same picture used twice at two different sizes is checked twice, once at each size — which is precisely the case worth catching, because it is the small placement that passes and the large one that goes soft on press.

What the standing rules check

Even with PDF/X set to skip, a diagnostic run always applies the default rule set, grouped four ways:

GroupRules
GeometryPage not rotated; MediaBox begins at 0,0; CropBox matches MediaBox; each box consistent across every page; TrimBox and ArtBox no larger than BleedBox and MediaBox; every page has a MediaBox and either an ArtBox or a TrimBox — and not both, since TrimBox is preferred.
FontsNo partially subsetted fonts; every font embedded. An unembedded font is the one failure that reliably changes what prints.
File integrityNot encrypted or password-protected; document ID present in the trailer; no embedded or externally referenced files; Trapped declared as True or False; no private application (PieceInfo) data; no transparency groups.
ColourRGB images, grayscale images and spot-colour (Separation/DeviceN) images are each reported where found.
A compliance report from the companion ImposeIQ Preflight tool: category tiles across the top, then every finding with its severity. Repair’s own report is a plainer table — rule, message, page — but the findings come from the same rules.
A compliance report from the companion ImposeIQ Preflight tool: category tiles across the top, then every finding with its severity. Repair’s own report is a plainer table — rule, message, page — but the findings come from the same rules.

The result is a count and a table of rule, message and page number. “No issues found against the checked rules” means exactly that — against the rules that were checked, not against every rule that exists.

Repairs to apply

Each repair is independent and each one is off by default except page-box normalization. Nothing is applied until you press Repair & Save As….

Add missing bleed

Mirrors the artwork outward on any page that does not already have enough bleed, at the size in the box beside it — 0.125″ by default, adjustable in sixteenths from 0.03125″ to 0.5″. Pages that already qualify are left untouched.

This is the control behind the “no bleed added when the file has none” case: leave it off and the tool is guaranteed never to add bleed, which is what you want when the customer’s file is deliberately trimmed flush or when a mirrored edge would look wrong. The report afterwards says how many pages were processed and how many already had enough.

Normalize page boxes

On by default, because it fixes the most common geometry complaints without changing a pixel. MediaBox is moved to 0,0, CropBox is reset to match MediaBox, and a TrimBox equal to the MediaBox is added — but only on a page that has neither TrimBox nor ArtBox, so an existing trim definition is never overwritten. Any other box that was correctly placed relative to the old origin moves by the same amount, so nothing drifts out of register.

Page boxes drawn over the artwork. MediaBox is the sheet the PDF claims, TrimBox is the finished cut, and the gap between TrimBox and BleedBox is the bleed you have to play with.
Page boxes drawn over the artwork. MediaBox is the sheet the PDF claims, TrimBox is the finished cut, and the gap between TrimBox and BleedBox is the bleed you have to play with.

Clear page rotation

Sets /Rotate to 0 on every page. Worth doing when a file looks right on screen but imposes sideways, which is the usual symptom of rotation carried in the page dictionary rather than in the artwork.

Remove embedded / attached files

Strips the document’s embedded-files name tree and any file-attachment annotation. Both PDF/X and most RIPs object to them, and they are almost never something the customer meant to send.

Set document Trapped flag

A dropdown rather than a checkbox: Leave as-is, True or False. PDF/X requires the Info dictionary to say one or the other; plenty of files say neither. Set it to False unless the file really has been trapped.

Convert RGB/Gray to CMYK

This is a real ICC conversion, not a formula. Every plain RGB or grayscale fill, stroke and image is converted against the target profile you pick. What is deliberately left alone: spot colours (Separation and DeviceN), Indexed-palette images, JPEG2000 and fax-compressed images, and anything already CMYK. The report lists what was left so you can see what is still there.

Target profileSuits
GRACoL2006 (Coated1 v2)Sheet-fed offset on coated stock — the default
SWOP2013 (CRPC5)Web offset, publication printing
FOGRA39European coated offset
FOGRA47European uncoated offset
PSO Coated v3European sheet-fed offset
PSO Uncoated v3 (FOGRA52)European uncoated sheet-fed
Japan Color 2011 CoatedJapanese coated offset

Intent offers relative colorimetric (the default and the right answer for most print work), perceptual, saturation and absolute colorimetric. Absolute simulates the source paper white and is rarely what you want on a job going to press.

Declare the target profile as a PDF OutputIntent writes the profile into the file so a RIP knows what the CMYK numbers mean. On its own it does not certify PDF/X-1a conformance — run the PDF/X checks as well.

Files get bigger JPEG images are decoded, converted and re-saved uncompressed (Flate) rather than re-encoded as CMYK JPEG, because CMYK JPEGs have genuine interoperability bugs and a larger file that opens correctly everywhere beats a smaller one that might not. A photo-heavy job can grow noticeably; the report says by how much.

Saving the result

Repair & Save As… opens a save dialog in the original file’s folder with the name already filled in as original_repaired.pdf. Cancel and nothing is written — the window says so rather than pretending it saved. Afterwards the right column lists What changed, one line per repair that actually did something, including the repairs that ran and found nothing to do.

Unlicensed copies If the suite is running in demo mode, the saved PDF carries the DEMO watermark and “Demo” in the file name, and the window says so above the change list. See License keys and Demo.

In a workflow

Repair is also available as an Automation Workflow step, which is where it earns its keep: a hot folder that repairs every arriving file to a saved preset before anything else touches it turns the worst part of customer intake into something that happens without you. The workflow step uses the same engine and the same presets as this window. See Preflight templates under Workflow Automation.

Application guide

ImposeIQ VDP — Variable Data

The window

The VDP Designer. Steps 1–3 down the left with the selected field’s properties underneath, imposition in the middle column, and the template with its live fields on the right — here a text field carrying «first_name» «last_name».
The VDP Designer. Steps 1–3 down the left with the selected field’s properties underneath, imposition in the middle column, and the template with its live fields on the right — here a text field carrying «first_name» «last_name».

The console walks top-to-bottom through a job: 1 Template → 2 Data → 3 Fields → 4 Imposition → 5 DC Marks → 6 Merge & Export, plus PDF/VT fields and the sheet slug. The big canvas is your design surface; the header toggles Design / Preview, saves and opens projects, and opens Settings.

1 · Template PDF

The template is the static artwork every record prints on. Drop it in — 1 page = front only, 2 pages = front & back (page 2 is adopted as the back automatically). Load side-2 (back) PDF… attaches a separate back file; Back flips on picks the mirroring edge (long = left/right, short = top/bottom).

Bleed in this PDF decides what happens to a file that does not declare a TrimBox. Use the page exactly as supplied (the default) treats the page as the finished trim size: nothing is resized and the cut marks go on the page edge — right for a 3.5 × 2 card supplied at final size. Add 1/8 in mirrored bleed grows the page by an eighth of an inch on all sides, mirroring the edge pixels outward, for artwork that runs to the edge and arrived without bleed; the piece then imposes 3.75 × 2.25 and the cut marks sit an eighth of an inch inside the artwork, which is where they belong on a bled job. A PDF that does carry a TrimBox is read from the file either way, and the line under the picker always says what was done. Changing the setting re-reads the original file, so it is safe to flip after loading.

Lock scale and Zoom (%) work exactly like ImposeIQ: when imposing, each merged piece is normally stretched to fit its cell; lock draws it at native size instead, and zoom scales the result in 1 % steps.

VDP template and data headers showing the template size and the record count
The first two steps collapse to a summary once they are set — the template size and the record count stay visible while you work further down.

2 · Data

Drop a CSV or Excel file. Columns appear as chips, and View data table opens the whole list for checking. Records drive everything downstream: previews, merge range, counters and PDF/VT metadata.

3 · Fields

A barcode field’s properties: symbology, a value mixing static text with column placeholders, the insert-column helper, and the Condition checkbox that decides whether the field prints on a given record at all.
A barcode field’s properties: symbology, a value mixing static text with column placeholders, the insert-column helper, and the Condition checkbox that decides whether the field prints on a given record at all.

Four kinds of field go on the template. Each is dragged to move, resized from the corners, rotated by the yellow dot, nudged with the arrow keys and removed with Del. Shift-click selects several at once, and the align buttons snap them to the first-selected field — or to the page when only one is selected. Every field can also carry a Condition, so it prints only on the records that match.

Text

Mix static text with «Column» placeholders; one line per row keeps address blocks tidy. Fonts are the four built-ins — Helvetica/Arial, Times Roman, Courier and Symbol — plus any TTF or OTF you add with Add font file, which saves into the project so the job opens the same way on another machine. Size, bold and italic, alignment, colour and rotation are all per field. Rotation has coarse and fine controls: the usual 90° steps, plus 1° and 2° clockwise and counter-clockwise nudges for artwork that was designed slightly off square.

Image

Build an image library with Add images (JPEG · PNG · TIFF), then drive the field one of three ways:

SourceWhat it does
Static (same on all)One picture on every record — a logo, a signature.
Variable (from data column)A column of filenames picks the image per record.
Conditional (if / then rules)A list of rules, first match wins. This is how you put a different badge on gold, silver and standard tiers without adding a filename column to the data.

Fit decides what happens when the picture and the box disagree: Fit keeps proportions inside the box, Fill crops to cover it, Stretch distorts to match. Opacity is per field.

Barcode

Generated with bwip-js, so the preview and the export are the same code. Eleven symbologies:

KindSymbologies
LinearCode 39 (3 of 9), Code 128, Interleaved 2 of 5, EAN-13, UPC-A, GS1-128
2DQR Code, Data Matrix, PDF417, Aztec
PostalUSPS Intelligent Mail

The value mixes static text with «Column» placeholders the same way a text field does, and the Insert data column helper drops a placeholder in at the cursor. Human-readable text prints the digits under a linear code; Bar color and Transparent bg handle codes that sit on coloured artwork. A barcode is never stretched to fit its box — the whole point is that it still scans.

Number

A counter, and more flexible than it first looks. Three presets get you started — Sequential «{n}», Pagination «Page {n} of {p}», and Bates stamp «BATES{n}» at six digits — or write your own format mixing static text, column placeholders and tokens:

TokenWhat it counts
{n}The sequence or Bates number, governed by the start, step and zero-padding below it.
{p}The total matching {n}’s scope.
{record} / {records}Position and count within the merge range.
{page} / {pages}Output page position and count — front and back each advance it.
{date} / {time}Filled in at export time.

Counts up sets the scope, and it is the setting that catches people out. Once per record means copies of the same record share a number — right for a raffle ticket per person. Once per output page advances on every side, front and back — right for sequential numbering that has to be unique on every printed face.

Copies do not advance the counter The Copies each setting in Merge & Export duplicates a page that has already been numbered. If you need every copy to carry its own number, that is more records, not more copies.

Switch to Preview to page through real records; fields that overflow their box are flagged there rather than discovered in the merged PDF.

4 · Imposition

The same engine as ImposeIQ, tuned for VDP runs: sheet size (default from Settings), piece size from the template, bleed, margin, gutters, manual or auto grid, rotation, crop marks — and the crucial record order:

  • Across rows — 1, 2, 3 left→right.
  • Down columns — 1, 2, 3 top→bottom.
  • Cut & Stack — records are distributed so that after the finisher cuts the pile, the stacks collate straight into mailing order. No hand-collating.
VDP imposition panel with sheet, piece, bleed, margins, gutters, grid and record order
Imposition: sheet and piece size, bleed, the four margins, both gutters, the grid (0 = auto) and the record order across the sheet.

5 · OMR & Barcode

Identical marks and geometry to ImposeIQ's DC Marks — barcode, QR, REG, skew, shrink, DDC, U/D, DSM, end mark — drawn on the front of every imposed sheet. The DC Marks slug line from Settings prints here too.

6 · Merge & Export

Choose the record range (From / To) and Copies each, then:

  • Export Imposed PDF — merged records laid out N-up with marks. The everyday output.
  • Open the PDF after saving — tick it and every exported PDF opens in your default viewer the moment it's saved.
  • Export 1-Up Merged PDF — one record per page (front/back interleaved for duplex), for digital presses that impose downstream.
  • Export PDF/VT and Export Imposed PDF/VT — see below.
VDP merge and export section
Merge & Export with the open-after-save checkbox.

Embellishment — spot UV & foil on variable data

A record can carry coating as well as ink: the same name in varnish, a foiled logo on the premium rows only, or both together. Tick Produce coating plates with every export and every export writes its coating files beside the print file, as …_SpotUV.pdf and …_Foil.pdf.

Marking the variable fields

Select a field and use Spot UV and Foil in its properties. Either or both. Height sets how thick that field's varnish is in microns; leave it blank for the panel default.

To vary it per record, point Let a column decide at a data column. The value in that row wins:

  • uv (or varnish, gloss) — varnish only
  • foil (or DFL, sleeking) — foil only
  • both — varnish and foil
  • none — nothing, however the field is set
  • empty, yes, or anything that names no channel — the field's own switches stand

Coated fields are outlined in purple on the canvas with a UV / FOIL tag, and tagged in the field list. In Preview the tags follow the record you are looking at.

The template's own coating

Two ways, and they can be mixed:

  • Mask PDF — choose a varnish and/or foil mask, black where the coating goes. This is exactly what Maskwork exports.
  • Spot ink already in the template — if the template carries a named separation (DuSense, Varnish, Foil, a PANTONE), VDP finds it on load and offers it in the two dropdowns. Map it and that ink becomes the template's contribution to that plate.

How the build works

  • Grey on the plate is a thickness: black is 80 µm, white is bare, and anything inked at all reaches the coater’s floor (10 µm on a DDC-8000, 15 µm on a DDC-810 PRO). Coating height sets what solid means (default 40 µm).
  • Foil is 100% or nothing, never a tint.
  • Apply varnish under foil lifts anything foiled to a varnish base (25 µm by default), so the foil has something to key into. Change the amount, and pick your coater, under Settings → General → Spot UV (DuSense) on the Home screen. Switch it off if your DFL workflow does this itself.
  • Foil trap spreads (or, negative, chokes) the foil shape by a fraction of a millimetre.
  • Pictures can act as their own build ramp — dark areas thicker — or be coated evenly over the whole shape.
Why the plates register — they are not drawn separately. Each plate is the same merge and the same imposition run again with only the coated marks in it, so the cells, rotation, record order and page size are the print file's, by construction. Cut and OMR marks and the slug lines stay off the plate unless you tick Carry the cut marks onto the plates.
Check the first sheet — coating thickness is a press and stock conversation as much as a file one. Run a proof before a long job, and confirm the µm values with whoever runs the DuSense or DFL.

7 · PDF/VT record fields

PDF/VT wraps the merged output in an ISO 16612-2 structure — a DPart page hierarchy with per-record Document Part Metadata built from the data columns you tick — plus an output intent from your ICC profile. Set the destination ICC profile and Output Condition Identifier (e.g. GRACoL2013, FOGRA39) once in Settings.

Heads up — the PDF/VT writer is a best-effort structure built from the public spec, not a certified implementation. Run it through your DFE's preflight before a live job.

8 · Imposed sheet slug

A "Sheet N of M · Records …" audit line on the front of every imposed sheet, with position, font size, color and edge distance controls. Record numbers are absolute rows from your data file, so a reprint range is easy to identify.

Projects (.viq)

Save Project bundles everything — template PDF, back side, data, images, custom fonts, every field, and the full imposition/DC setup — into a single .viq file. Open restores it identically on any machine running the suite. Save one per repeating job and reruns become a two-click operation.

Settings

  • Units (inches/mm) and Theme — shared across the whole suite.
  • Default sheet size and Default rotate piece (Auto — best yield, Never, Always 90°) for new projects.
  • Lock scale on by default — new sessions start with the template lock enabled.
  • Imposition & DC Marks defaults — dial in sections 4 & 5 the way your shop runs, hit Save current as default, and every new project starts there.
  • DC Marks slug line — same options as ImposeIQ: position plus Shrink Top / Marks Top / Right / Barcode number.
  • PDF/VT defaults — ICC profile and output condition.
VDP settings modal
VDP Settings: suite-wide units/theme, per-app defaults, and the DC Marks slug line block.
Application guide

OMR Generator

Marks for a PDF that is already imposed. Where the Imposer draws marks as part of building a sheet, this puts them on a file somebody else built — and it does it in volume, without anyone opening the app.

What it is for

A finished, imposed PDF arrives from a customer or another prepress system and it needs Duplo collation marks before it can run on a bookletmaker or a folder. Nothing about the layout needs changing — only the marks are missing. The OMR Generator adds them to the file as it stands.

Which tool draws the marks If you are imposing the job yourself, use the Imposer’s own OMR Marks & Barcodes panel — the marks are placed as the sheet is built and land in the DC job XML with everything else. The OMR Generator is for files you did not impose.

The marks it adds

MarkWhat reads it
Booklet Maker BarcodeThe barcode kit on a DSF-2200 or DSF-6000 booklet-maker feeder. A number printed on every sheet of the set.
Booklet Maker End MarkThe plain optical alternative — a solid bar on the last page of every set, which is what separates one book from the next. A feeder has the barcode kit or the sensor, not both.
Collator Barcode (DSC-10/60)The collator tower’s own number, which is built differently and read by different hardware.
L Mark (Reg)The L-corner registration mark.
Skew Mark · Shrinkage MarkRegistration correction on machines that have the hardware to read them.
DDC MarksThe circular marks down both side edges for a DDC-8000 or DDC-810 PRO, with their own margin-from-edge and spacing.
DSM-1000 MarksRegistration marks for the B2 platen die cutter.
DPC Series MarksCamera marks for the DPC-400 / DPC-600 digital die cutters, and an optional QR that tells DPC Connect which cut file to open; four corner marks for the DPC-2024. See DPC-400 / DPC-600 marks and DPC-2024 corner marks.

Bold Marks increases the registration, skew, end and shrink marks to 2 mm thickness. Turn it on when marks are being missed on dark or heavily inked stock — a thin mark on a dark ground is the usual reason a set does not split where it should.

Positions are set the way the machines are specified: Width Marks from Lead Edge, Conveyance Mark from Trail Edge, DDC Marks from Edge, mark length, and registration mark diameter — all in millimetres, because that is how the finishers are documented.

The QR / secondary code

The QR / secondary code builder. Tick the parts you want in the code and reorder them with the arrows — the pieces are joined with hyphens in the order shown, so the code reads the same way every time.
The QR / secondary code builder. Tick the parts you want in the code and reorder them with the arrows — the pieces are joined with hyphens in the order shown, so the code reads the same way every time.

As well as the collation barcode, a sheet can carry a second code built from the job’s own facts. Tick the parts you want — user code, the barcode number, page number, total pages, a static text string, the file name — and put them in the order you want with the arrows. They are joined with hyphens in the order shown, so a code scanned at the machine reads the same way every time and can be matched against a job ticket without anyone interpreting it.

Size and margin for the secondary code, set in millimetres from the edges the way the feeder is specified.
Size and margin for the secondary code, set in millimetres from the edges the way the feeder is specified.

Size and the right and bottom margins are set in millimetres. Show barcode text prints the number in human-readable form under a linear barcode, which is worth having whenever an operator may need to read it aloud or type it into a controller.

Watch folder workflow

The app is built to be left running rather than opened per job. Three folders drive it:

FolderWhat it is
Watch Folder (Input)Drop a PDF in — by hand, from another application’s save dialog, or by printing straight into it — and it is picked up and marked.
Output FolderWhere the marked file lands.
Completed FolderWhere the original is moved once it has been processed, so the watch folder only ever holds work that has not been done yet. Alternatively, tick Delete files from Watch Folder after processing.

The folder paths are saved, so the arrangement survives a restart and the app can sit in the tray watching. The tray menu shows whether the watcher is active and how many files it has processed.

Explorer integration

Apply OMR (Explorer) adds a right-click Apply OMR item to PDFs in Windows Explorer, so a one-off file can be marked without opening the app at all. Toggling the same switch off removes the registry entry again — nothing is left behind.

Statistics and troubleshooting

A running count of processed jobs sits on the main screen and can be reset per shift, which is the simplest way to confirm the watcher is actually doing something.

SymptomUsual cause
Apply OMR runs but nothing happensThe right-click handler fired but the job produced no output — check the output folder path is still valid and writable.
Output PDFs are missing a mark you expectedThe mark is switched off, or its position puts it outside the sheet. DDC marks in particular can collide with the shrink mark; the app warns when they overlap.
The wrong barcode number was usedThe number is built from the settings above — check the total digits and the zero-padding match what the controller expects.
QR code is empty, or the encoder errorsEvery part of the code was left unticked, or the combined value is too long for the symbol size chosen.
Runs in the desktop suite The OMR Generator needs file-system services — watch folders, Explorer integration, moving originals — so it runs as part of the desktop application rather than in a browser.
Application guide

File Name Tagger — marks and job tickets in the filename

The File Name Tagger writes machine settings and job information into the filename, so a PDF carries its own instructions wherever it goes. Nothing is stored in a database, nothing is embedded in the file, and nothing has to travel alongside it — the name is the ticket:

Flyer (J123 L7 RBQC) [CU-Acme_Printing CN-4471 QY-2500 DW-20260901 PR-rush].pdf JOB NAME whatever you called it — untouched MARK CODES barcode 123 · 7 mm marks · registration, bold, QR, caption JOB TICKET Acme Printing · #4471 · 2,500 pieces · due 1 Sep · rush
Two groups, read independently. Either can be present without the other, either can use ( ), [ ] or { }, and they can appear in either order — they are told apart by what is inside them, never by where they sit.

What it is for

A tagged file solves two different problems at once.

  • The machine settings travel with the artwork. A file named Booklet (J12 L7 RE).pdf tells the Imposer to draw barcode 12, 7 mm marks, a registration mark and an end mark — no template to pick, no operator to brief. Drop it in the Apply marks folder and the marks get drawn.
  • The commercial information travels with it too. Customer, quantity, PO, due date and priority sit in the second group, where the shop can read them straight off a folder listing and a workflow can route, name, email and bill by them.
Why the filename and not metadata — a filename survives every hop a job takes: a Windows share, an FTP push, a RIP that rewrites the PDF, an operator who opens it in Acrobat and saves. XMP does not always. It is also the one place a person can see the whole ticket without opening anything.

How the two groups are told apart

Both delimiters are yours to choose, and hot folders fill up with names written by older builds, so position is never trusted. The rule is the shape of the token:

GroupToken shapeExample
Mark codesKEY immediately followed by VALUE, plus one uppercase-only bundle for the on/off marksJ123 · BH10 · UMx · RBQC
Job ticketKEY, a hyphen, then VALUECU-Acme_Printing · QY-2500

Because a ticket token always has a hyphen after its key and a mark token never does, a group can be identified by reading it. A group that parses as neither is left alone — a title like Menu (Spring).pdf keeps its parenthetical and is not mistaken for a tag.

Re-tagging never stacks — tagging an already-tagged file strips the old groups first, so Flyer (J1 R).pdf re-tagged becomes Flyer (J2 RE).pdf, not Flyer (J1 R) (J2 RE).pdf.

Profiles and watch folders

A profile is a named set of codes, and each one owns a real subfolder under the watch root. The folder is the instruction: drop a PDF into Watch\Booklet and it comes out carrying the Booklet profile's codes. There is no UI step for the operator to forget. Open this profile’s folder jumps straight to the watch folder that profile is bound to — quicker than retracing the path, and it is how you check that files are actually landing where the profile expects.

  • Folders are created on demand, so a new profile is droppable immediately.
  • Renaming a profile moves its folder — unless files are still sitting in it, in which case the old one is left alone and both exist, which you can see and sort out.
  • A file is only touched once it has stopped growing. A PDF copied across a network share appears the moment the copy starts; renaming it mid-write would corrupt it.
  • Keep the original copies instead of moving, leaving the dropped file in place.

Everything in the window edits a draft. Nothing reaches disk — no renamed profile, no new watch folder — until Apply is pressed, so a half-typed name never creates a stray folder. Profiles that Apply is about to act on are flagged with a dot.

Marks — the on/off codes

These are the boolean marks. They collect into a single uppercase-only token at the end of the mark group, in this order, so RBQC means registration + bold + QR + caption.

CodeMarkWhat it draws
RRegistration markL-shaped corner mark, lead-right.
BBold marks2.0 mm strokes instead of 0.75 mm.
EEnd markMarks the last sheet of the run.
KSkew markSkew detection mark, 50-60 mm from the right edge.
SShrink markPaper shrinkage compensation mark.
DDDC marksCircles down both side edges for the DDC-810 / DDC-8000.
QQR codeQR code in the bottom right corner.
CBarcode captionHuman-readable digits printed under the barcode.
FDuplex source (UD-320)The file already alternates front, back, front, back -- the UD-320 marks alternate with it.

Values — the numbers and choices

Tick a value to write it into the filename. Anything left unticked is left out of the name entirely, and an omitted code means "leave the machine on whatever it is already set to" — which is not the same instruction as "set it to 0". That is why each value is opt-in rather than dumping all nineteen into every name.

CodeValueRangeImposer control
Barcode
JBarcode number1–250bcNum
BHBarcode height3–40 mmbcH
BTBarcode from top0–60 mmbcTop
QR code
UUser codefree textqrUser
QSQR size5–40 mmqrSize
QRQR from right0–60 mmqrRight
QBQR from bottom0–60 mmqrBottom
Mark geometry
LMark length3–30 mmmkLen
MTMarks from top0–60 mmmkTop
MRMarks from right0–60 mmmkRight
SHShrink mark from top10–900 mmshrinkTop
DDC-810 / 8000
DMDDC margin4–16 mmddcMargin
DSDDC spacing50–90 mmddcSpacing
DDDDC diameter3, 4ddcDia
UD-320
UMUD reading modey = Y only, x = X + Y (100 mm front, 76 mm back)udMode
UXUD X mark side (both faces)l = Left of center, r = Right of centerudXSide
DSM-1000
SLDSM fixed sidel = Left, r = RightdsmSide
SDWidth marks from lead198–900 mmdsmLead
STConveyance from trail10–200 mmdsmTrail
DPC-400 / DPC-600
PSCamera mark size3–20 mmdpcSize
PPMost space between marks43–400 mmdpcPitch
PQQR job recall size5–30 mm (DPC Connect reads 7–10)dpcQrSize
PCQR cornertl, tr, bl, brdpcQrCorner
UD-320 and DSM-1000 — these two switch on through their settings rather than through a flag: the presence of a UM or SL/SD/ST code is what arms the machine. DPC works the same way: any PS/PP code arms the camera marks, and a PQ or PC code arms the marks and QR job recall together. The old UMxu and UMxd codes still read — both now mean "print the X mark", since both faces are marked (100 mm on the front, 76 mm on the back).

The job ticket

The second group carries who the job is for and what is being made. It is written by the Job ticket section in the main pane, and every field is optional — a blank one is simply left out of the name.

CodeFieldFormatNotesWorkflow token
CUCustomer nametext, max 40Who the job is for. Spaces become underscores in the name.[var.ticket_customerName]
CNCustomer numbertext, max 20Your MIS or accounting number for the account.[var.ticket_customerNumber]
CTContacttext, max 30Who to call when the job needs a decision on the floor.[var.ticket_contact]
JBJob numbertext, max 24The shop job or work order number.[var.ticket_jobNumber]
POPO numbertext, max 24The customer’s purchase order.[var.ticket_poNumber]
QYQuantitynumberFinished pieces ordered — books, cards, sets. Not sheets.[var.ticket_quantity]
SESets / kitsnumberHow many finished bundles the quantity is split into, when it is.[var.ticket_sets]
DWDue dateYYYYMMDDWritten as YYYYMMDD so the name sorts by date on its own.[var.ticket_dueDate]
PRPrioritystd / rush / hotShows up in the name so the operator sees it in the folder listing.[var.ticket_priority]
SKStocktext, max 30Paper the job runs on — what the press operator needs to pull.[var.ticket_stock]
FSFinished sizetext, max 20Trimmed size of the finished piece.[var.ticket_finishedSize]
FNFinishingtext, max 30Bindery operations after the cutter — stitch, fold, drill, score.[var.ticket_finishing]
RPSales reptext, max 24Whose order it is, for the shop and for commission reconciliation.[var.ticket_salesRep]
CCCost centertext, max 20Department or cost center the run is charged to.[var.ticket_costCenter]
NTNotetext, max 48One short instruction. Anything longer belongs on the job ticket itself.[var.ticket_note]

Text is squeezed into something a filename can carry everywhere: spaces become underscores and anything outside A–Z a–z 0–9 . _ - is dropped, so Acme Printing & Litho, Inc. becomes Acme_Printing_Litho_Inc. That is lossy on purpose — the filename is the traveling copy of the ticket, not the system of record. If the shop needs the name spelled exactly, that lives in your MIS.

Due dates sort themselves — the date is written YYYYMMDD, so sorting a folder by name puts the jobs in the order they are due. You can type it as 2026-09-01, 9/1/2026 or 20260901; it is always stored the one way.

Job ticket for this drop

Customer, sales rep and cost center belong to the profile — retyping them on every drop is how they end up inconsistent. Job number, PO, quantity and due date change job to job, so those four also appear in a Job ticket for this drop panel beside the drop zone.

  • It layers on top of the profile: a box left blank keeps whatever the profile already says.
  • It is never saved with the profile and never written to disk. A stale job number silently stamped onto tomorrow's files would be worse than typing it again.
  • The job number clears itself after each drop — it belongs to one job. The PO stays, because a batch usually shares one.

The preview at the top of the window shows the finished name with the two groups colored separately, and it tracks the drop panel as well as the profile, so what you see is exactly what the next drop will produce.

Applying the marks back

Apply marks closes the loop. Point it at a folder of tagged PDFs and it reads the codes back off each name and hands them to the Imposer engine to draw — the same engine, the same marks, not a copy. Nothing in the applier draws a mark itself.

Codes it does not recognize are logged and ignored rather than failing the file, so a name that picked up an extra parenthetical somewhere still gets its marks.

Machines you have turned off

Marks for a machine unticked in Settings → Machines on the Home screen are hidden across the whole suite. A code for a machine you do not own can still sit in a filename harmlessly — it simply has nothing to drive.

Application guide

Metadata Tagger — the same tag, inside the PDF

The File Name Tagger writes the mark codes and the job ticket into the filename. The Metadata Tagger writes exactly the same thing into the file, and leaves the name alone. Two tools rather than one switch, because a shop normally standardises on one or the other, and one folder tree per tool means a drop is never ambiguous about which it was meant to be.

File Name TaggerMetadata Tagger
Where the tag goes Flyer (J123 L7 RBQC) [CU-Acme_Printing QY-2500].pdf XMP packet and Info dictionary; the name stays Flyer.pdf
Visible in Explorer, any folder listing, an email attachment name Acrobat's Document Properties and Additional Metadata, pdfinfo, a RIP, an MIS
Survives Anything that copies the file, including a RIP that rewrites the PDF Renaming, re-filing, being pulled into a job folder under a new name
Lost by Anyone who renames it — and customers do A processor that strips or rebuilds metadata
They read each other — the token strings are identical, so a file tagged either way decodes in the mark applier, in a workflow, and in the other tool's Inspect panel. Nothing about the vocabulary is duplicated: both tools call the same encoder.

What it writes

Two carriers, on purpose. Belt and braces, because prepress is full of tools that only read one of them:

CarrierWhat lands there
XMP packet An rdf:Description under the ImposeIQ namespace http://duplo.com/ns/imposeiq/1.0/, prefix iq. Holds iq:marks, iq:ticket, iq:version, a readable iq:marksReadable, and one element per ticket field. Written uncompressed, which is how several RIPs find a packet.
Info dictionary IQMarks, IQTicket, IQTagVersion, IQMarksReadable, plus a readable key per ticket field. This is the dictionary Acrobat's Document Properties actually shows.

The iq:marks and iq:ticket strings are the authoritative pair — the same tokens the filename version writes between its brackets. The per-field keys are there so an MIS can map one value without implementing the grammar:

Info keyXMP elementField
IQCustomerNameiq:customerNameCustomer name
IQCustomerNumberiq:customerNumberCustomer number
IQContactiq:contactContact
IQJobNumberiq:jobNumberJob number
IQPoNumberiq:poNumberPO number
IQQuantityiq:quantityQuantity
IQSetsiq:setsSets / kits
IQDueDateiq:dueDateDue date
IQPriorityiq:priorityPriority
IQStockiq:stockStock
IQFinishedSizeiq:finishedSizeFinished size
IQFinishingiq:finishingFinishing
IQSalesRepiq:salesRepSales rep
IQCostCenteriq:costCenterCost center
IQNoteiq:noteNote

Title, Subject, Keywords and Author

Those four are the fields a person actually sees, so the ticket can fill them in. The setting lives beside the folder pickers and has three positions:

SettingWhat happens
Fill where blank
the default
Title gets the file's own name, Subject the ticket summary, Keywords the codes, Author the sales rep — but only where the artwork left them empty. Whatever the designer put in Title is theirs and stays.
Always overwrite Stamped every pass, so Explorer's Details pane and Acrobat always show the current ticket. Whatever those four fields carried is lost.
Leave them alone Only the IQ keys and the XMP block are touched.
Producer and ModDate are never touched. A prepress operator who sees the Producer change notices, and rightly distrusts it. The tag is added; nothing else about the document's identity moves.

Metadata another tool already put there

Artwork usually arrives with an XMP packet already in it — Dublin Core from InDesign, the press's own fields, a color policy. That packet is merged, not replaced. Only the ImposeIQ rdf:Description is removed and rewritten; everything else is left byte for byte as it was, and re-tagging the same file over and over leaves exactly one copy of our block rather than stacking them.

One case where it cannot merge — a packet with no readable <rdf:RDF> container cannot be edited safely by hand. The tag is written into a fresh packet and a warning goes in the log saying what was lost. It is rare, and it is said out loud rather than done quietly.

Profiles, folders and the drop panel

Identical to the File Name Tagger, deliberately — an operator who knows one knows the other. One profile per watch subfolder, the folder is the instruction, a file is only touched once it has stopped growing, nothing reaches disk until Apply, and the Job ticket for this drop panel layers job number, PO, quantity and due date on top of the profile for the files you drop by hand. Choose a PDF… loads a single file to tag by hand, and Open this profile’s folder jumps straight to the watch folder that profile is bound to — the quickest way to confirm files are landing where the profile expects.

The one visible difference is the preview. The filename version can show the finished name in a line; here the honest answer to "what does this do to my file" is a list, so the preview shows the two token strings, how many Info keys they become, and the marks and ticket in plain words.

Inspect a PDF

Reads what a file is already carrying and changes nothing. The badge says which carrier answered, which is the useful part:

BadgeMeaning
XMP packetFully tagged. This is what a file this tool wrote looks like.
Info dictionaryThe XMP was stripped somewhere upstream but the Info keys survived. The tag still reads; something in the chain is rewriting metadata.
Filename onlyNothing inside the file — the codes are in the name, from the File Name Tagger or an MIS. Dropping it on a profile writes the tag inside, but from the profile's settings, not from the name.
Not taggedNothing of ours anywhere.

It also shows Title, Subject, Author and the page count, so it doubles as a quick check on what a customer actually sent.

In a workflow

Tag PDF metadata (Files) is the same encoder driven by step settings, for jobs that arrived by email and went through preflight rather than being dropped in a folder. It has three modes:

ModeWhat it does
WriteWrites the tag into every PDF in the job. Takes the ticket from the Job ticket step by default, or from its own fields.
ReadChanges nothing; sets [var.ticket_*], [var.pdfTagMarks] and [var.pdfTagSource] from what the file already carries. For a workflow receiving files another shop tagged.
StripRemoves our block from both carriers and leaves the rest of the metadata alone — for a file going out to a customer.
Both at once — nothing stops a workflow running Tag PDF metadata and Tag filename back to back. Belt and braces for a job crossing a system you do not control: whichever survives, the instructions arrive.
Application

Die Line Reader

A customer sends a die-line PDF: the finished shape drawn as colored rules over the artwork. Someone then has to work out what the machine is being asked to do and build the job by hand, measuring positions off the page. The Die Line Reader does that reading for you — drop the PDF in, check what it found, and export the DC job XML.

The two color conventions

There are two conventions in circulation and they contradict each other, so the reader has to know which one a file follows. It works this out on its own; the Color convention box shows what it decided and lets you overrule it.

Customer die line — what a print buyer's designer draws:

Drawn asRead asOn the machine
■ Red or magentaCut / slit The boundaries of the finished pieces. Lines down the sheet are slits, lines across it are cuts.
■ Blue or cyan, dashedPerforation A perforation across or down a piece, with the tool you choose.
■ Green, dashedCrease A crease across the sheet.

Duplo DC template — the templates Duplo supplies, named like 648-B2-604/TableTent_12x18_2up:

Drawn asRead asOn the machine
■ Cyan, solidCut / slit Drawn as a closed rectangle around each finished block.
■ Cyan, dashedPerforation / score / slice Pick the tool per line — Perf, Micro, Slice-Score or Score.
■ Magenta, dash-dotCrease A crease across the sheet, at the depth you set.
Red means opposite things in the two. A customer's red line is the cut; Duplo's magenta dash-dot line is the crease. Color alone cannot tell them apart, so the reader looks at which family carries the solid lines: a designer draws the cut solid in red, whereas a Duplo template draws the block solid in cyan and its crease dashed. If a file is unusual, set the convention by hand.
The colors do not have to be exact — and that matters more than it sounds. A designer drawing "red" cut lines in Illustrator normally ends up with CMYK 0/100/0/0, which is really magenta, and Duplo's own template draws its crease as CMYK 0/90/85/0, which is a vermilion. Both get called magenta by the people using them. "Blue" perforations come out as CMYK 100/0/0/0, which is cyan. Matching on exact color values would reject nearly every real file, so the reader works on hue family: scarlet through magenta is one family, cyan through blue another, green a third. Black, gray and pale tints in the artwork are ignored.

Reading a die

The Die Line Reader with a 4-up table-tent die loaded. The die lines are drawn back over the artwork on the left — red for cut/slit, dashed cyan for perforation — while the right column tallies what was found, holds the job details, and lists every rule with its direction, length, position and type.
The Die Line Reader with a 4-up table-tent die loaded. The die lines are drawn back over the artwork on the left — red for cut/slit, dashed cyan for perforation — while the right column tallies what was found, holds the job details, and lists every rule with its direction, length, position and type.
Drop the PDF on the window. Page 1 is read. The die lines are drawn back over the artwork in the panel so you can see at a glance that what was found matches what was drawn.
Check the tally. Cut, perf and crease counts, the sheet size, and how many finished pieces came out of it — for example 12 × 18 in · 4-up (2 × 2) at 5.000 × 7.750 in.
Look down the line list. Every die line is listed with its color swatch, direction, position and length. A dashed rule drawn as dozens of separate strokes is rejoined first, so one perforation appears as one line and not as thirty.
Correct anything that is wrong. Change a line's type if the customer used a color loosely, pick a different tool for a perforation, or untick a rule that is really part of the artwork. The preview, the piece grid and the XML all update as you do.
Set the job details. Job name and number, the machine, and the lead edge — the edge that feeds in first. If the die was drawn for the press rather than the cutter, turn it here instead of redrawing the file. Default perf tool sets the tool any perforation gets unless you change that line individually, and Crease depth sets the depth written into the XML — 1 — normal by default.
Export. Save DC job XML… writes the file, defaulting to the same export folder the Imposer uses. Drop it in the PC Controller's Import XML folder.

Setting your own colors

The two conventions above cover most files, but plenty of shops draw their dies their own way. The ⚙ Settings button sets the rules: one row each for Cut / slit, Perforation and Crease, and for each a color family and whether it counts when drawn solid, dashed, or either.

Open a file first. The dialog lists the colors actually drawn in it — Cyan / blue solid · 12, Red / magenta dashed · 6 and so on. Click one to assign it. That is far quicker, and far harder to get wrong, than picking from the lists blind.
Or set the rows by hand. Color families are Red / magenta, Cyan / blue, Green and Yellow / orange, plus Any color and Not used. Line style is solid only, dashed only, or either.
Name it and save. It joins the convention list at the top of the panel and is there next time. Saved set-ups live on this machine, and the suite’s scheduled backup carries them.
The dialog warns when two rows clash. If a cut and a perforation are both set to cyan solid there is no way to tell them apart, and if one row takes a color “solid or dashed” while another takes the same color “dashed only”, the more specific rule wins. Both are flagged as you edit rather than left to surprise you at the machine.

Faint lines at the bottom of the dialog sets how washed out a color may be before it is treated as artwork instead of a die line. The default keeps pale tint boxes out of the way. Lower it only if a die drawn in a tint is coming up empty.

How the finished pieces are worked out

A DC controller does not think in cut lines, it thinks in blocks. Where the cut lines close into rectangles the reader uses those directly — which is exactly what a Duplo template gives you, since it draws each finished block as a rectangle. That is the accurate answer and it is tried first.

When the cuts do not close — a die of bare slits and cuts running off the sheet — it falls back to reading the bands they divide the sheet into, and decides which are product by width: an outer band with the sheet edge on one side and a cut on the other is trim, and trim is always narrower than the pieces it is trimmed from. A sheet with a single cut down the middle and pieces running to the edges gives two equal bands, neither narrow, so both are kept — the right answer for that layout.

The panel says which method was used, and the block outlines are drawn on the preview, so you can see what it decided before you export rather than at the machine.

The XML it writes

The same DuploDCJobTemplate the Imposer exports, so a file from here imports into the PC Controller — and back into ImposeIQ — exactly like one produced by the rest of the suite. One CutBlock per finished piece, in points, origin bottom-left.

Perforations are written relative to the piece they cross rather than to the sheet, which is how the controller addresses them: it repeats a single entry onto every matching block. Four identical perforations across a 2 × 2 layout therefore collapse to two entries, not eight — one per position on the piece.

Creases down the sheet — the Crease element carries a Y position and nothing else, so it can only describe a crease running across the sheet. A crease drawn down the sheet is the slitter module's score wheel on the machine, and the schema expresses that as a perforation with the Score tool, so that is what it is exported as.

What a DC cannot cut

Only straight lines square to the sheet. Any die line that is diagonal or curved is counted and reported in the panel rather than quietly left out of the export — if a shape needs a rotary die, you want to find that out while you are still looking at the file.

Perforations and creases that fall outside every finished piece are reported the same way. They are usually in the trim, but occasionally they mean the piece grid came out wrong, which is worth a second look.

Utility

Digital Die Cut

Give it one die shape and a sheet up to B2, and it finds the layout that cuts the most pieces. It nests by the real outline rather than the bounding box, so a tag, a carton blank or a triangle can drop into the notch of the row next to it. Then it writes the imposed artwork, the cut file and a DXF for the die maker or the cutter.

Drop the die-line PDF on the window — or switch to Simple shape and type a rectangle, rounded rectangle or circle / oval, or open one of the built-in Samples.
Pick the cutter and the sheet. The margins, gap and bleed fill in from the cutter; change any of them.
Choose a layout. The best one is picked for you; the others are listed with their up count and yield.
Export the imposed art PDF, the cut file PDF, the DXF, or print the report.

The die shape

Page 1 is read (pick another page if the PDF has more). Lines are sorted by color family, the same way the Die Line Reader does it, so the CMYK magenta Illustrator gives you for "red" still counts as red.

LineAuto reads it as
■ CutSolid lines in the color with the most solid line on the page (red / magenta wins a close call). If nothing on the page is colored, plain black solid lines are the cut.
■ CreaseGreen lines, or dashed lines in the cut color.
■ PerfDashed cyan / blue lines.

If Auto picks the wrong thing, set each color by hand. The note under the counts says the piece size, its area, and how much cut, crease and perf one piece needs.

Loose segments are fine. A carton die is often drawn as dozens of separate straight lines rather than one closed path. The outside of the piece is found by flooding in from the edge of the drawing, so anything the lines enclose counts as the piece, joined or not. If the cut line truly does not close, you are told, pieces are spaced by their outline only, and art is clipped to the box.

Cutter, sheet & margins

Width is the edge across the feed; length is the edge that feeds. The lead edge is the top of the drawing.

CutterWhat it sets
DSM-1000 B2
platen, steel rule
From the DSM-1000 Instruction Manual (2023). Sheets 279–530 × 279–750 mm, with one side at least 420 mm. The sheet runs with its reference edge on the conveyance belt: the press area starts 25 mm in from that edge and the blade must sit 3 mm inside the press area (10 mm on older machines), so nothing is cut within 28 mm (1.10") of the reference edge, and the blade reaches no further than 515 mm from it (the 480 mm cutting width). 10 mm is recommended at the lead, the trail and the operator's side. Each punch cuts at most 710 mm down the sheet. Choose which edge of the drawing is the reference edge — Left edge of the drawing or Right edge of the drawing — and it is hatched in the preview. (The press area is 500 × 730 mm and the die board 820 × 520 mm in 18 mm plywood.) With the Registration Mark Kit on, the Imposer's DSM-1000 marks are added and the operator's side is kept 18 mm clear for the moving-side mark. Default gap 3 mm.
Digital knife / laser
dieless
Sheets up to B2 (500 × 707 mm), 12 mm margins, and locator marks for the cutter's camera. Default gap 2 mm.
Duplo DPC-400
digital die cutter (DocuCutter)
From the DPC-400 Service and Parts Manual. Sheets 8.26 × 11.6 in up to 14.5 × 22.4 in with the CCD, 200–400 gsm; 12 mm margins; 6 mm locator circles (the CCD reads 5–10 mm circles or dots); QR job recall. Default gap 2 mm.
Duplo DPC-600
digital die cutter
From the DPC Connect guide. 800 × 600 mm working area; 3 mm locator dots, as DPC Connect recommends; QR job recall. Default gap 2 mm.
Duplo DPC-2024
digital die cutter (sheet-fed plotter)
From the DPC-2024 Product Guide and manuals. Letter (8.5 × 11 in) up to B2+ 530 × 750 mm, 200–350 gsm; margins 10 mm lead, 25 mm trail, 15 mm sides (off the pinch-roller tracks); four L-shaped AAS corner marks; no QR recall. Cuts with a drag knife and bridge cuts, so pieces stay in the sheet to be popped out. Default gap 2 mm.
CustomOnly the margins you type. No marks.

DPC-400 / DPC-600 marks and QR job recall

The DPC cutters find the sheet by camera. The marks are the same everywhere in the Suite — the Digital Die Cut app, the OMR Generator, the Imposer, Book, the VDP Imposer and the workflow Die cutter marks step: black circles (or crosses) 5 mm in from every edge, no more than Most apart and never less than 43 mm apart, plus one extra mark near the lead corner so a sheet fed the wrong way round is caught. Use 5–10 mm marks on a DPC-400 and 3 mm dots on a DPC-600.

QR job recall. DPC Connect reads a QR on the sheet and opens the cut file whose name matches it (QR “monkey” opens the file “monkey”). Turn it on and the QR is printed in the corner you choose, in the 5 mm edge band beside the corner mark, 7–10 mm square. Left blank, it carries the file’s own name without .pdf — in the Digital Die Cut app that is the cut file it saves, so keep that name and keep the cut files together in the folder DPC Connect’s QR profile points at. Keep the QR in the same corner on every job.

Layers. DPC Connect assigns a tool to each PDF layer. For a DPC the Digital Die Cut cut file comes out with cut, crease, perf and reg marks layers, and the Imposer and Book put the DPC marks on a reg marks layer when marks are put on their own layer. Add “reg marks” in DPC Connect under Settings → Standard settings → Import so it is recognised.

DPC-2024 corner marks

The DPC-2024 is a plotter, not a camera table: its AAS II sensor reads four L-shaped marks, one in each corner of the job (the “4-Point Positioning” marks its Illustrator plug-in draws). Every app that prints DPC marks — Digital Die Cut, Index/Bleed Tabs, the Imposer, Book, the VDP Imposer and the workflow Die cutter marks step — draws them for you when the machine is set to DPC-2024: 1 mm thick, 15 mm from the sides, 10 mm from the lead and 25 mm from the trail (the manual asks for at least 25 mm there so the sheet does not drop while it is measured), with the artwork kept 5 mm inside them. Their length follows Duplo’s table: 11 mm on A4, 16 mm on A3/SRA3, 23 mm up to B2 (adjustable 5–50 mm in Digital Die Cut). Keep the marks off the pinch-roller tracks and light the cutter evenly. There is no QR recall, so with more than one cut file the sheets come out grouped by cut file.

Locator marks (digital cutters)

The cutter's locator camera finds black circles or black crosses, from 3 to 20 mm across; 6 mm and 10 mm circles are recommended. The marks go round the sheet edge, 5 mm in, outside the pieces, spaced no more than 40 cm and no less than 4.3 cm apart — set Most apart lower for more marks on a long sheet. The cutting area is kept 3 mm clear of them (14 mm from the edge with 6 mm marks). The pattern does not have to be symmetrical: One extra mark near the lead corner adds one beside the lead / left corner so a sheet fed the wrong way round is caught. The marks print in 100% black on the art PDF and the cut file, and the DXF carries them on the MARKS layer — circles as true circles.

A DSM-1000 die carries at most 5,000 mm of rule — cut, crease and perf together. The way round it is to punch the sheet more than once: the DSM-1000 can punch the same die up to 3 times per sheet, so the die only has to carry a third (or half) of the sheet.
SettingWhat it does
Punches per sheet Best of 1, 2 or 3 (the default) tries all three and lists each one that gets more pieces. With 2 or 3 punches, the cutting area is split into equal bands down the feed; the die is laid out for one band, and the same die is punched again further down, a gap apart. Pieces do not interlock across punches. The manual's progressive-pressing limits are kept: 2 punches need a sheet at least 396 mm long and a punch interval of 120–370 mm; 3 punches need 516 mm and 120–237 mm. When two layouts cut the same number of pieces, the one with fewer punches wins, because it runs faster.
Waste separation (DSM-SP) Tick it when the DSM-SP will strip the scrap. Its rollers run down the sheet in the lanes between columns of pieces, so the layout becomes a straight grid with the manual's minimums: a scrap frame of 35 mm at both sides and 50 mm at the lead and trail, at least 20 mm between columns, 50 mm between pieces down the sheet and between punches. Lanes are widened when needed so separation units and margin guides stay 61 mm apart, and the grid is held to 8 columns because one unit rides each lane and the DSM-SP takes 7 (3 standard plus up to 4 ADDITIONAL SEPARATION UNITs). The preview draws each margin guide (G) and separation unit (SP); Production shows how many units the die needs and the run time at 2,250 sheets/hr (3,100 without separation). Nick guidance from the manual is shown with it: 0.3 mm nicks up to 209.7 g/m², 0.5 mm heavier, kept out of the first 130 mm and last 20 mm of each piece.
Keep each die within the rule limit On by default. A die that would need more than 5,000 mm is cut back row by row from the lead edge, and the list shows it as, for example, 12 of 30. Untick it to see the full layout with a warning.

A T-shaped 90 × 100 mm tag on B2 shows why it matters: one punch is held to 12 pieces by the rule limit, three punches of an 11-piece die give 33. Production shows Punches per sheet, Pieces per punch, the Rule on the die, and the punches needed for the quantity. The preview draws a dashed box around each punch. The cut file PDF shows every punch on the sheet; the DXF is the die itself, with the other punches on a REPEAT layer for reference.

How the layout is found

The shape is looked at from above, below and both sides — its silhouette. That says how close two copies can sit side by side, and for every sideways offset of the next row, how close that row can come. The gap is added the way a disc would roll around the outline, so the gap is kept in every direction, not only straight down.

LayoutWhat it is
GridRows and columns. Best for rectangles, and the easiest die to build.
StaggeredEach row shifted sideways — circles pack like a honeycomb this way.
InterlockedAlternate rows (or columns) turned 180° so shapes nest into each other — triangles, T-shaped tags, carton tabs.

Each is tried upright and turned 90°, running across the sheet and down it, then laid on the real cutting area and counted exactly. A staggered or interlocked layout is only listed if it gets more pieces than a plain grid.

Place the layout decides where the finished block of pieces sits inside the cutting area — Centred in the cutting area, or Tight to the lead edge. Centred is the safer default because it leaves equal slack at both ends; tight to the lead edge is what you want when the sheet is close to the cutter’s length limit and every millimetre at the trail matters.

Untick Pieces may be turned when grain or print direction matters, and Alternate rows may be turned 180° when every piece has to face the same way.

Gap 0 means shared cut lines. Touching pieces share an edge, and each shared straight rule is cut once — the report shows how much rule that saved. On a steel-rule die that is also the only way the die can be built.

True-shape nesting

The row layouts above repeat one pattern across the sheet. True-shape nesting does not: it places each piece wherever its real outline fits — into the notch of a neighbour, into the strip left at the end of a row, at whatever turn you allow — one piece after another, each as close to the lead edge and the reference edge as it will go. It is what a shape with a hook, a corner cut-out, a tab or a slant needs, because those leave room that no repeating row can use.

SettingWhat it does
Nesting method Best of both (the default) works out the row layouts and the true-shape ones, and offers a true-shape layout only when it fits more pieces than any row layout — so a plain card or a circle still gets its plain grid or honeycomb, and an L-shape, a slanted bar or a crescent gets the free layout. Rows & interlock only is the quickest and is how earlier versions worked. True-shape nesting only lists only the free layouts.
True-shape turning Quarter turns tries 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°. Any angle in 45°, 30°, 15°, 10° or 5° steps also tries every angle in between — a bar drawn at 30° is turned back to square, and pieces can lean into each other's slopes. Smaller steps try more angles and take longer. Turning follows your tick boxes: untick Pieces may be turned and every piece stays upright (or turned 180° if that is ticked).

Two ways of building the layout are tried and the one that fits more pieces is offered. From scratch: pieces are placed one by one, scanning across the sheet and down it, with all the turns, with quarter turns only, and with a pair of opposite turns. Around a row layout: the best row layouts are kept exactly as they are and every gap, notch and leftover strip around them is filled with more pieces — the layout's name then says how many were fitted into the gaps. A true-shape layout is therefore never worse than the row layout it grew from.

  • The gap is always kept. Every piece is at least the gap away from every other piece in every direction, measured on the real outlines. The sheet is worked out on a fine grid (a fraction of a millimetre) and always rounds toward more room, so a finished layout can be a fraction of a millimetre looser than perfect, never tighter.
  • Zero gap. Pieces in a true-shape layout end up about one grid cell apart rather than sharing a cut line. When you need shared cut lines, use the row layouts — they are still listed.
  • Art turns with the piece. The imposed art, the bleed clip and the cut file all follow the turn, at any angle. If print or grain direction matters, keep the turning on quarter turns or switch turning off.
  • Machine limits still apply. The margins, the reference edge, the marks, the rule limit and the punches per sheet work the same way. Waste separation (DSM-SP) needs straight columns, so when it is ticked the nesting method is hidden and the row grid is used.
  • Time. Expect a second or two, longer with a small turning step. Compare sheet sizes uses a quicker setting so it stays responsive.

Samples

Seven sample die lines are built in, each with its artwork on the same page: jigsaw pieces, hang tags with a punched hole, lightning bolts, star badges, plus badges, pine tree tags and gingerbread people. Pick one from Samples… at the top of the window, or from the tiles on the start screen. Each opens on the cutter, sheet and nesting settings where true-shape nesting beats the best row layout — 2 to 6 more pieces per sheet — and the Die shape card says by how much. Opening a sample changes the cutter, sheet, gap and nesting settings to the sample's; change them back, or open your own die line, when you are done. They make good demos for a customer: export the imposed art and cut file just as you would for a real job.

A quick way to see what it buys you. Load an L-shaped or slanted piece, leave the method on Best of both, and compare the top true-shape layout with the best Interlocked one in the list: the up count and the yield are side by side.
Safety check. Before anything is shown, every layout is painted into a separate grid and checked for pieces that overlap. If one ever does, the pieces are outlined in red and export asks before it goes ahead.

Artwork & bleed

Art can be the die-line PDF itself (art and die on the same page), a separate artwork PDF, or nothing at all when you only need the cut file. A separate art page is placed centred on the die page — right when the art file simply has more bleed than the die file — or top-left corners together. With a simple shape, separate art is centred on the piece.

Each piece's art is clipped to its cut line pushed out by the bleed. The bleed is held to half the gap, so one piece's bleed can never print on the next one. At a zero gap there is no room for bleed, and art stops at the cut.

Numbers, compare & export

Production shows pieces per sheet, yield (finished piece area against the whole sheet), sheets for the quantity with and without overs, rule per sheet and waste — and a production time estimate: make-ready plus run time, with the time per sheet. The DSM-1000 runs at its rated 3,100 sheets/hr (2,250 with waste separation), one press cycle per punch. A digital cutter has no sheets-per-hour figure, so its time follows what each sheet cuts: the cut, crease and perf length at the knife speeds, a lift and move per piece, and the feed and mark reading per sheet. Open Time settings to put in your own figures — each cutter keeps its own, and the note there shows what Duplo publishes for it (DPC-400: 56–150 sheets/hr on Duplo’s samples; DPC-600: 12–45 s per 13 × 19 in sheet). The starting figures are estimates: time a real sheet and replace them.

Compare sheet sizes lays the same die on every standard sheet from SRA3 to B2 (plus 20 × 28 in, flagged when the cutter cannot take it), shows the sheets and the production time for each, and highlights the best use of stock — and the quickest to run, when that is a different sheet. Click a row to switch to it.

ExportWhat you get
Imposed art PDFThe press sheet with the art stepped out, the marks, and a slug line in the trail. Tick Also print the die line to add it as a CutContour spot for proofing.
Cut file PDFEvery rule as a named spot color: CutContour, Crease (dashed), Perf (dotted), with the sheet edge and cutting area in DieInfo and the marks in black. Same size as the press sheet, so it registers to the art.
DXFR12, millimetres, one layer each for CUT, CREASE, PERF, SHEET and MARKS, plus CUTAREA (the DSM-1000's 480 × 710 mm cutting area) — for a die maker or a cutter that imports CAD.
Die maker file (UD-320)With the UD-320 chosen as the cutter, a card below Export saves the drawing Kocher & Beck make the flexible die from, as DXF (the format they prefer) or PDF. It is 100%, in millimetres, with the lead edge at the right and the running direction marked. Through cuts, 3-knife creases, kiss cuts, perforations and the sheet size each have their own colour and layer. It has no artwork or register marks. Name the exact material, and say whether the file shows the die (mirrored) or the product. The UD-320’s register marks have the same reading mode and X mark side as the Imposer. In X + Y mode the 100 mm front X mark runs 30 mm in from the lead edge, so pieces start at 33 mm; the manual wants the first blade within 20 mm, so the file asks the die maker about a dummy blade. A two-sided job also needs the 76 mm mark on its back, which the Imposer adds. Tilt each piece 1° to the right, under Spacing & turning, is Duplo’s advice for straight cuts that run across the feed, so the knives last longer. Each piece turns about its own centre, not the layout as a group, and the 10 mm gap is measured past its corners. The artwork PDF, cut file and die maker file all follow it, and any-angle nesting is ignored while it is on. Add recommended nicks / ties marks an X on its own layer at reference positions: on straight edges away from corners, spread round each piece, one per 100 mm of outline (4 to 8), and evenly round a circle or oval. The cut line stays whole and the die maker makes the nicks and sets their size. A die with nicks can no longer be used with the waste separator, and a kiss cut gets none. The positions follow the picture in the UD-310 manual (p.48), which gives no rule or size, so check them with the die maker. The card warns about corners under 0.8 mm and edges or gutters under 10 mm. The PDF adds a page showing one finished piece. It saves the file and sends nothing: order from service@kocher-beck.com or 913-426-4336. DWG isn’t offered. All the cut lines in one file are either through cuts or kiss cuts.
Print reportA one-page drawing of the sheet with every number above, for the job bag or the die order. Choose Microsoft Print to PDF to keep it as a file.

The last cutter, sheet, margins, gap and bleed are remembered on this machine and carried by the Suite backup.

Templates

The Templates card at the top of the settings saves everything on screen under a name you choose: the cutter (for example DSM-1000 B2), the sheet, margins and reference edge, registration or locator marks, punches per sheet, rule limit, waste separation, gap, turning and nesting method, artwork placement and bleed, line colours, the simple shape and the quantity and overs. Type a name and click Save as template; pick it from Saved templates to put all of it back and lay the sheet out again. Update with current settings replaces the chosen template, and Delete removes it. The die line and artwork files are not part of a template, so one template serves every job of that kind.

Export… saves the chosen template as a small .iqdiecut file and Import… loads one, so a template moves between computers, and between the Suite and the online edition. In the Suite, templates are kept on this computer and carried by the Suite backup; online, they are kept in your browser.

Utility

Cover Builder

A page-layout editor for one job: the cover of a perfect-bound book. It works like a small InDesign laid out for covers — the flat cover is drawn as back cover, spine and front cover with the folds, bleed, safe areas and hinge creases shown — and the spine width comes from the book itself rather than from a number someone typed in. ImposeIQ Book's cover panel still does quick covers; use Cover Builder when the cover needs real design work.

Opened from ImposeIQ Book. Book's Open in Cover Builder button starts Cover Builder with the book's body PDF, trim, bleed (when the book has one), stocks, creasing and binder filled in, and a banner at the top of the Book tab says it is linked. Stock, glue, creasing and binder changes made here go back to Book; the body PDF, trim and bleed stay Book's. The spine, flat size and the saved cover PDF's location are reported to Book as you work. Back to Book in the banner brings the Book window forward.

Load the body PDF on the Book tab. Its page count and trim size are read, and the spine is worked out.
Pick the paper — grade and basis weight, or type the mill's PPI or a measured caliper.
Design the cover — place the body's first and last pages, or draw text, image and shape frames yourself. Add spine text and the ISBN barcode from the tool bar.
Check the Preflight tab, then Export cover PDF. More has the proof PDF, the DC crease XML and a PNG preview.

Body PDF & spine width

The spine is pages ÷ PPI, plus a glue allowance if your binder needs one, plus twice the cover caliper if Add cover wrap is on. The pages come from the body PDF, less any pages that are really the cover (Pages in the PDF that are the cover) and plus any blanks you will add to finish a signature. An odd count is rounded up — a leaf is two pages.

Body paper byUse it when
Grade and weightEstimating. Groundwood, uncoated offset, coated matte and coated gloss, with typical PPI for each basis weight — the same table ImposeIQ Book uses.
PPIYou have the mill's spec sheet. This is the number to trust.
Measured caliperYou have miked a sheet. One sheet is two pages, so PPI = 2 ÷ caliper.
gsmNothing else is known. It is a rule of thumb for uncoated stock only.

Enter it switches to a spine width typed by hand. The spine is shown at the top of the canvas and on the Book tab, with exactly how it was worked out. Everything on the front cover is anchored to the front cover, so when the page count changes and the spine grows, the front art moves with the front panel instead of sliding into the spine.

Use the body's trim size sets the cover to the book's page size. The four Place body pages buttons put page 1 on the front, the last page on the back, page 2 inside the front and the second-to-last page inside the back, each with its trim box exactly on the panel's trim and its own bleed hanging off the outside edges.

Editing the cover

Tool (key)What it does
Select (V)Click to select, Shift-click to add, drag on empty space to marquee. Drag to move, the square handles to resize (Shift keeps proportions), the round handle to rotate (Shift snaps to 15°). Alt-drag duplicates.
Text (T)Drag a frame, then type in the Properties tab. Any installed font, style, size, leading, tracking, left / centre / right / justified, top / middle / bottom, and Shrink the type to fit. A red box on the frame means the text does not fit.
Image (F)Drag a frame and choose a PDF, JPG, PNG, TIFF, WebP or GIF. PDFs stay vector. Fill, fit, stretch, 100% or manual scale and offset; the effective ppi is shown and preflighted.
Rectangle (M), Ellipse (L), Line (\)Fill and stroke in CMYK or RGB, stroke weight, dashes, rounded corners.
Hand (H or Space), Zoom (Z)Ctrl + wheel zooms at the pointer, Ctrl+0 fits the cover, W switches to a trimmed preview.
Spine textAdds a title frame sized to the spine's safe area that shrinks to fit. It reads top to bottom (US / UK) — switch to bottom to top for European books in Properties.
BarcodeAdds an ISBN barcode at nominal size in the bottom corner of the back cover's safe area.

Dropping files on the canvas places them — onto an image frame if you drop on one, otherwise as a new frame fitted to the panel under the pointer. Snap catches trim, bleed, folds, hinges, safe areas, panel centres and other objects. The Layers list shows / hides and locks each item; Ctrl+] and Ctrl+[ move it up and down. Undo (Ctrl+Z) and Redo (Ctrl+Y) cover every change. With nothing selected, Properties sets a background colour for the whole spread or for one panel; panel colours stop at the folds and run into the bleed on the outside edges.

Colours are written to the PDF as CMYK when the CMYK box is ticked (the default for the swatches: 100K, rich black 60/40/40/100, process colours) and as RGB otherwise. Preflight warns above 320% total ink.

Inside covers, flaps & glue

+ Page adds another outside or inside spread, or duplicates the current one — handy for a second version or a dust jacket. The inside spread is the outside turned over, so it runs inside front · spine · inside back. Untick a page to leave it out of the PDF; an inside page with nothing on it is left out automatically if Output says so.

French flaps add a flap panel at each end with its own fold. Right binding edge swaps the front and back for books that read right to left.

On the inside cover the spine and a strip past each spine fold are kept white — ink there stops the binder's glue taking. The strip is hatched on screen; set its width under Cover stock & creasing, or turn it off. The strain-relief (hinge) creases are shown as green dotted lines, and Export DC crease XML writes the same DC jobs ImposeIQ Book does — one per pass, fed with the spine square to the feed.

DC / OMR marks

Under Output, DC / OMR marks prints the Duplo DC registration marks and job barcode on the cover sheet — REG mark, skew and shrink marks (DC-648 only), the Code 39 barcode with optional text, and a QR code — with the same sizes and positions as Book's OMR Marks. Only the marks a machine ticked in Settings → Machines can read are offered.

  • Needs a press sheet. Set PDF page size to Centred on a press sheet. The DC finds the marks from the real sheet edge, so the PDF page has to be the sheet that is fed.
  • Top-left of the page. A cover goes into the DC spine-first, square to the feed, so the page's left edge leads. The marks sit on the lead corner: the top-left of the PDF page.
  • Two-pass covers. With no up-crease module, fold + strain relief runs twice. The second run is the sheet flipped over, inside face up, so the inside page carries the pass-2 marks with the next barcode number. That page prints even if it has nothing else on it.
  • The DC job matches. With marks on, Export DC crease XML describes the press sheet, where the cover sits on it, and the same mark and barcode positions. The crease positions do not change.
  • Checks. Preflight flags marks that would print over the cover's bleed or fall off the sheet. Use a bigger sheet or change Marks top / Right. The marks go on their own switchable PDF layer, “ImposeIQ OMR Marks”, unless you untick it.

DDC and UD-320. The same card also prints DDC marks (DDC-8000 / DDC-810 PRO) and UD-320 register marks, placed as in Book, in the same spine-first feed as the DC marks:

  • DDC: circles down both side edges of the outside face. You set the margin, spacing and diameter. The first row starts 25 mm from the lead edge when the DC corner marks are on. Rows move off the shrink mark and anything else in the way.
  • UD-320: the 100 mm Y bar at the lead edge, plus in X + Y mode the X mark. It goes 100 mm from centre on the outside and 76 mm on the inside, on the other side of the sheet, so both faces carry marks and the inside page always prints.

Preflight warns if the UD-320 X mark lands on a DC mark. When that happens, move the X mark to the other side of centre.

Folding the panels. Click the heading of any card in the right-hand panels — or a small heading inside one, or Pages or Layers on the left — to fold it away, and again to open it. Collapse all and Expand all are at the top of the right-hand panel. What you fold is remembered, including the cards in Properties, which are folded again each time you select something.

Templates

Templates… in the top bar keeps a cover for next time. A template holds the cover’s trim size, bleed and safe areas, binding, stocks, creasing, flaps, output and marks, and every frame on every page — text, shapes, barcodes, pictures and the fonts they use. It does not hold the body PDF. Open a template after loading the body, and the body stays: the spine is worked out for that book, not the one the template was made from.

  • Save as template — give it a name. Tick Include the pictures and fonts to carry them; up to about 2.5 MB goes with the template, and a picture that does not fit is left out while its frame stays, empty, ready for the next picture. You are told what was left out.
  • Open replaces the cover on screen (it asks first if there is anything on it). Update replaces a template with the cover now on screen. Delete removes it.
  • Export… writes an .iqcovertemplate file to move a template to another PC; Import it there, or drop the file on the window. A template is kept on the PC it was saved on, so export the ones you cannot lose.
  • Ready-made covers — four starting points built from the same panel geometry as the editor, so they sit right at any trim: a navy trade paperback, a cream digest novel, a full-bleed picture front, and plain white. Each has the title, subtitle, author, spine text, back-cover copy and an ISBN barcode in place, to type over.

A template is not the same as Save defaults, which keeps only the settings (never the artwork) for every new cover, nor the same as Save…, which keeps one finished cover, body PDF and all.

Settings and defaults

More → Settings… shows what new covers start from. Save defaults keeps this cover's:

  • trim size, bleed and safe areas, and binding
  • stocks, creasing and binder, and flaps
  • output and press sheet
  • OMR / DC / DDC / UD-320 marks
  • units, guides, snap and press sheet view

Artwork and text are never part of the defaults. After saving, New starts every cover from the defaults. Apply defaults to this cover puts them onto the open cover without touching its artwork. Reset to factory defaults forgets them. With no saved defaults, a new cover starts from the last one you worked on.

See it on the sheet. Tick Press sheet in the bar under the canvas, or press S. The view zooms out to the whole press sheet with the cover where it prints, and draws the crop and fold marks, the slug and the DC / OMR marks for the side you are on (outside = pass 1, inside = pass 2 on a two-pass cover). A caption shows the sheet size, the pass and the barcode number, and the lead edge is labelled. Pick the sheet size from the list next to it. Turning the view on also sets Output to Centred on a press sheet, so the sheet you see is the sheet that prints. You can keep designing in this view. A red outline means the cover does not fit the sheet.

Confirm the reading positions on the machine with a test sheet before a live job, as with any new mark layout.

ISBN barcodes

Type the ISBN-13 with the hyphens your ISBN agency issued, e.g. 978-1-4028-9462-6 — the check digit is verified and the line above the bars is printed exactly as typed. An old 10-digit ISBN is converted. The five-digit add-on is the price: 51995 is $19.95 US, 90000 means no price. EAN-13, UPC-A, QR and Code 128 are there too. Keep the bars 100% black on white; the size is shown as a percentage of nominal, and retail scanners want 80–200%.

Preflight & export

The Preflight tab lists, per page: text or barcodes outside the safe area or crossing a fold, text that does not fit its frame or is under 5 pt, images under 250 ppi (warning) or 150 ppi (problem), spine text on a spine under 0.25 in, barcodes under 80%, heavy ink, an empty front cover, and a cover that does not fit the chosen press sheet. Click an item to jump to it.

ExportWhat you get
Cover PDFOne page per spread, TrimBox and BleedBox set, crop marks, fold marks at the spine and flap folds and a slug line with the job, sizes, spine, paper and date. Page size is the cover + bleed + marks, or the cover centred on a press sheet.
Proof PDFThe same with bleed, trim, folds, hinges and safe areas drawn on it, for the customer to sign off.
DC crease XMLSpine and hinge creases for the DC-series (covers without flaps). With DC / OMR marks on, it also carries the press sheet size, the cover's position on it and the mark and barcode positions.
PNG previewThe current spread at 150 ppi.
Save (.iqcover)The whole cover — artwork, the body PDF and the fonts used — in one file, so it opens the same on another PC.
Application

Embellishment Studio

A 3D preview of what a job looks like after finishing. Drop in the artwork, mark where the varnish and foil go, and the Studio renders the finished piece — raised spot UV catching the light, foil throwing a highlight as it turns, a textured stock catching a rake of light — on a card, a carton, a bottle, a can or a folder. It exists to answer the question a printed proof cannot: what will this actually look like on the customer's desk?

What it is for

Selling the upgrade. Show a customer their own artwork with raised gloss, foil or metallized stock before they commit to the run — and export the plates that produce it.

What it is not

A color proof. The render is a visual simulation, not a contract proof and not a substitute for a press or coater sample on the actual stock.

The window

Artwork and the two embellishment channels on the left, the live 3D preview in the middle, and the settings tabs on the right. Product / substrate under the Sheet tab is what turns a flat card into a carton, a book cover, or a bottle.
Artwork and the two embellishment channels on the left, the live 3D preview in the middle, and the settings tabs on the right. Product / substrate under the Sheet tab is what turns a flat card into a carton, a book cover, or a bottle.

Three columns. Artwork and channels on the left, the live 3D preview in the middle, and the settings tabs on the right — Effects · Camera · Light · Sheet · Export. Both side panels collapse with the arrow tabs, or with [ and ], when you want the preview to fill the window for a customer.

The preview is live: drag to orbit, right-drag to pan, wheel to zoom. The round buttons under it are save PNG, auto-orbit, front view, hero ¾ view, macro close-up, rotate 90°, and compare-to-plain.

1 · Artwork

Drop in a PDF, JPG or PNG, or start from one of the ten built-in demo samples (business card, wedding invitation, menu cover, cosmetics carton, annual report, wine label, poster, book jacket, gift card, trading card). The demos are the fastest way to show someone the effect when you don't have their file to hand.

Note — Import a print-ready PDF and the Studio asks which pages, optional-content layers and separation (spot) inks are artwork and which are the spot UV or foil. A file that already carries a named spot plate for the varnish comes in correctly separated with no masking work at all — which is how a properly prepared job should arrive.

A plain two-page PDF is the common case of a piece with real front and back art — a bottle's rear label, a table tent's other panel, a hang tag's reverse. Page 2 of a two-page file defaults to Back side / other side in that same picker rather than Spot UV, so the obvious case needs no manual re-picking; any role row (a page, a layer, or a spot separation) can be set to it. This is distinct content, not a mirrored copy — it renders on whichever face is the reverse of the current shape (back cover, rear panel, back label, the far panel of a tent) and, once set, takes over automatically from the Repeat the artwork on the back checkbox below. Because it has no channel data of its own, it renders as a clean print with no spot UV or foil showing through from the front.

The piece takes its proportions from the artwork's aspect ratio, so a portrait file gives a portrait piece. If a file comes in the wrong way round, Rotate piece 90° (the ⟳ button, or R) turns the artwork and both channels together, so the varnish and foil stay in register.

Working side

Side 1 and Side 2 under the artwork panel are a place to stand, not a second document. Clicking one turns the piece round so you are looking at the face you are setting up; orbit past the edge yourself and the chips follow the camera, so the panel never claims you are on a side you cannot see. The note underneath tells you what side 2 is currently carrying — its own imported artwork, the mirrored repeat of side 1, or plain stock.

Each side has its own spot UV and foil channel. The channel buttons, the wand, the auto-masks, the alignment nudge, Undo and Reset channel all act on the side you are standing on — the side is shown next to the headings of steps 2 and 3 so a wand click never lands on the face you are not looking at. Side 1 might carry a spot UV build while side 2 carries foil, or nothing at all, exactly the way the two sides of a sheet are two jobs to a finisher.

Side 2 does not need artwork to carry channel work: wand a shape onto it with nothing else on the back and it renders as a build standing on bare stock. If side 2 does have artwork — its own imported page, or the mirrored repeat of side 1 — the wand reads its colors from that.

Separately, the Apply to selectors decide which sides an effect is switched on for at all. Spot UV and foil default to Auto, which means "wherever the channel is actually drawn" — wand something onto side 2 and it appears there, with nothing else to set. The fixed Side 1 / Side 2 / Both sides settings are for switching a side off without erasing its channel. The surface pattern's Apply to has no Auto, since a stock texture is not drawn anywhere — it defaults to side 1.

ONE PIECE · TWO SIDES · TWO SETS OF PLATES Side 1 — front artwork side 1 spot UV channel foil channel Wand, auto-masks, nudge, Undo and Reset act here while side 1 is the working side. Side 2 — back its own art, the mirrored repeat, or bare stock spot UV channel foil channel Separate from side 1 — nothing you draw on one appears on the other. "Apply to" — does the job run it on that side? The channels are what is drawn. Apply to is whether the job runs spot UV, foil or the surface pattern on a given side. Auto — wherever the channel is drawn the default: draw on side 2 and it simply shows up there Side 1 · Side 2 · Both sides fixed overrides Use a fixed setting to switch a side off without erasing its channel — the work stays, it just does not run. The surface pattern has no Auto — nothing is "drawn" for it.
Side 1 and side 2 each own a spot UV and a foil channel. The channels are what is drawn; Apply to decides whether the job runs that process on a side at all.

2 · Embellishment channels

Two independent channels decide where the finish lands: Spot UV and Foil. White means coated, black means bare. Pick the channel you want to work on, then build it up:

ControlWhat it does
Upload channel artBring in the separation you already have as a PDF or PNG.
From light areas / From dark areas Generate a channel automatically from the artwork, split at the Auto-generate threshold. The quickest way to varnish a logo that sits light on a dark ground, or the reverse.
Flood all / Invert / ClearCoat everything, flip the selection, or start again.
Pick colorClick a color in the preview to read it off the artwork.
Copy to otherDuplicate this channel into the other one — the usual starting point for foil sitting on top of a varnish build.
Show channel overlayDisplays the channels over the artwork — spot UV in red, foil in gold — so you can check coverage before you commit.

Channel alignment nudges a channel across, up and down, or scales it slightly, for when a supplied separation is a hair out of register with the artwork.

3 · The wand

Turn the wand on and click a color on the piece: everything within the Color range joins the selection, across the whole artwork rather than just the patch you clicked — design colors repeat, and selecting all of a spot color at once is the point. Each click adds to what is already there, so a selection builds up from several colors. Widen the range to take in more of a gradient.

Set whether the wand writes to Spot UV, Foil, or Both. Undo steps back through every change; Reset channel returns it to how it arrived. Press Esc or click Wand again to put it away.

4 · Surface pattern (whole side)

Surface pattern textures the whole side, not only where the coating falls — here a stock texture under a raking light, with the Quick looks presets down the left.
Surface pattern textures the whole side, not only where the coating falls — here a stock texture under a raking light, with the Quick looks presets down the left.

A stock texture across the entire side — every bit of it, not just where the artwork carries ink or the DuSense coating covers. Pick Pattern (sand, linen, leather/croc, ripple, braille dots, brushed line, basketweave, dot screen, water droplets or wood grain), then dial in Depth for how strongly it reads and Scale for how large the features are — scale is physical, in centimeters of sheet, so the same setting reads the same on a business card and on a poster.

This is a separate layer from the DuSense coating texture on the right-hand Effects panel: that one only textures the raised varnish itself and only where it's applied, while this one textures the stock the whole piece is printed on — an embossed cover paper, a textured hang tag board, the ripple on a table tent panel. The two can be combined — say, a linen stock under a smooth gloss DuSense build.

Water droplets and wood grain are the two scene textures in the list rather than stock finishes: droplets for a chilled bottle or a beverage can, wood grain for a hang tag, a table tent or packaging meant to read as timber.

Apply to chooses Side 1, Side 2 or Both sides — side 2 is whichever face is the reverse of the current shape, whether it is carrying real back/other-side art or the mirrored repeat. A stock texture usually belongs on the whole sheet the piece is cut from, so Both sides is closest to how the physical stock behaves; the single-side settings are there for a case like a laminated cover over an uncoated back.

DuSense® digital spot UV

The DuSense panel on a foiled-and-varnished invitation, with Advanced controls off — the reduced set a customer sees. The usage read-out underneath is the costing figure: coated area, mean tone, build ramp, and varnish volume and weight per piece.
The DuSense panel on a foiled-and-varnished invitation, with Advanced controls off — the reduced set a customer sees. The usage read-out underneath is the costing figure: coated area, mean tone, build ramp, and varnish volume and weight per piece.

The raised clear coat a DuSense DDC-810 Pro or DDC-8000 lays down. The Coating height slider runs from the coater’s minimum (10 µm on a DDC-8000, 15 µm on a DDC-810 PRO — pick yours under Settings → General) to 80 µm and defaults to 80 — the machine’s real range, not an illustration. A preset or an imported .json asking for anything outside it is held to it.

The channel is a build ramp, not a stencil The coater cannot lay a film thinner than it can lay. So a 1% pixel does not get 1% of the build — any inked pixel lands on the 10 µm floor, 100% black lands on whatever the slider says, and a plate value of 255 always means 80 µm however the slider is set. That is why the usage read-out quotes a mean tone as well as a coverage percentage: the floor is paid on every inked pixel, and the tone buys the rest.
Foil needs something to key into DFL transfers onto the varnish, and a film thinner than 25 µm does not give it enough to grip. Anything under the foil channel is lifted to that minimum on the exported plate, whatever the spot UV channel asked for. The usage read-out says what fraction of the piece had to be lifted.
ControlWhat it does
Coating heightHow far the varnish stands off the sheet, in microns. This is the number that sells the effect — quote it. It drives both halves of how a build reads: the raised shoulder around the coated shape, and how hard the clear layer reflects and how tight it holds a highlight. 80 µm is the reference point, so a preset dialled in at 80 looks exactly as it always did.
Edge build / domingHow rounded the coating’s shoulder is — nothing else. Low is a crisp edge, high a soft dome. No edge build — hard edge, no doming beside it pins the shoulder to the crispest setting.
Edge rim highlight0–150%, default 100%. The bright line that outlines a raised coating or foil shape at a glancing angle. A real optical effect, and a separate control from doming — turn it down when a build reads too jewelled, up when a subtle varnish is disappearing on screen.
Gloss levelHow hard the varnish reflects.
TextureSmooth gloss, sand/grit, linen weave, leather/croc, ripple, braille dots, brushed line — the tactile patterns the coater can build.
Texture depth / scaleHow pronounced the pattern is, and how large. Scale is physical, so a texture reads the same on a business card as on a poster.
Glitter additiveSparkle suspended in the coating.
Apply toWhich side the coating runs on. Auto (the default) follows the channel — the coating appears on whichever sides have spot UV drawn on them. Side 1 / Side 2 / Both override that.

The usage read-out under these controls is the practical one: coverage as a percentage and in cm², varnish volume and weight per piece, and pieces per liter — the figure you need to cost the job.

DFL digital foil

Toner-reactive foil from a DFL-500 or DFL-700, transferred over the coated area. Twenty-four foils are stocked in the swatch strip — golds, silvers, chrome, gunmetal, black chrome, colored foils, plus holographic rainbow, linear prism and oil slick.

Foil coverage / intensity is two controls in one: below 50% the foil fades in, above 50% it drives harder — more mirror, more contrast against the stock. Apply to works like the coating's: Auto follows wherever the foil channel is drawn, and Side 1 / Side 2 / Both override it.

Foil spread / choke — trap over Spot UV exists because spot UV and foil are separate press passes and the two drift out of register. A positive spread grows the foil slightly past the varnish edge so a hairline of bare varnish never shows; a negative choke pulls it inside. Set it to what your own press actually holds rather than leaving it at zero and hoping.

Unifoil® metallized stock

Prints the job onto a metallized sheet rather than adding metal on top. This is a different thing from foil and worth understanding, because it is what makes the effect sell: the sheet itself is metal and the ink prints over it, so the metal reads through wherever the artwork is open and is buried where the ink is dense. Leave the highlights open and they come back as chrome.

ProductWhat it is
Unilustre®Recyclable, plastic-free, repulpable metallized paper and board.
Unilustre® Digital (DI)The coating approved for HP Indigo and most dry-toner presses — specify this one for short-run digital.
Holo Unilustre®Board with a holographic emboss — stock patterns including Fireworks #2060 and Honey Comb #3007.
Ultralustre®Metallized synthetic substrate for cards, tubes, in-mold labelling and decoration.
Holo Ultralustre®The synthetic with a holographic emboss under the ink.
Custom Finishes®Bespoke metallization, color and pattern.

Choosing a product sets the holographic pattern and caliper it actually ships with; both stay editable. Metal show-through controls how far the metal reads through the ink, Metal brightness how hard it reflects, and the holographic patterns shift hue as you orbit the piece — which is exactly the thing a flat PDF proof can never show a customer.

Before you quote — These are a visual simulation of the Unifoil range, not a color proof and not a specification. Confirm the product, color, caliper, sheet size and press compatibility with Unifoil or your paper merchant before quoting or ordering. See About → Trademarks.

Lamination & stock

Uncoated, gloss, matte, soft-touch or satin film, plus a Stock texture slider for the tooth of the paper. Soft-touch under a raised gloss varnish is the classic luxury contrast and it reads convincingly here — the coating is glossy against a stock that is deliberately not.

Caliper / thickness and Reverse-side stock set the sheet's edge thickness and the shade of its back, both of which matter when the piece is seen at an angle.

The product shapes

The same artwork and channels render on any of eight products, under Sheet → Product / substrate:

ShapeNotes
Flat sheet / cardCards, covers, posters, shells. Lean back stands it up.
Folding carton / boxArtwork on the face, wrapping the sides. Depth sets the box.
Book cover — 1″ spineTick dust jacket and the artwork wraps back · spine · front continuously, so the varnish crosses the hinge exactly as it will on press.
Wine bottleArtwork becomes the label, wrapped on the glass. Glass color and closure are selectable.
Cosmetic bottleArtwork becomes the flat front label panel.
Greeting card — foldedFront cover printed, back panel hinged behind it on the fold.
Beverage canArtwork wraps the body; bare aluminum above and below. Label wrap goes to a full 360°.
Presentation folderStands slightly open with the inside pocket showing. Orbit toward the open edge to see into it.
Hang tagRadiused corners and a punched hanging hole, both genuinely cut — foil or spot UV running under the hole is shown clipped exactly as the die will clip it, rather than printed over a drawn circle. Lean back works here too, so the tag can hang or lie flat.
Table tentTwo panels standing on the crease. The artwork prints on the front panel, tipped back the way a tent actually sits on a table — which is the angle that decides whether the foil catches the room light or goes dead. Tick Repeat the artwork on the back for a double-sided tent.
Door hangerCut to its own size rather than to the artwork's shape, so it takes Hanger width and Hanger length from the Door hanger card instead of from the Width slider — 4¼ × 11″ is the stock size it starts on. Knob hole sets the hole as a percentage of the width, and the slit runs out of the hole at eleven o'clock, the way the stock dies cut it, which keeps it off the center line where the type usually sits. Hole and slit are both really cut, so what the die removes from the artwork is what you see — cheaper to find here than on press. Lean back works here too.
Brochure — Z-fold / accordionA sales mock-up of the folded piece. The artwork is the whole flat sheet, so Width is the open width across every panel and each panel carries its slice of the artwork. The panels stand in a zigzag on the floor and the spot UV and foil run across the folds as they will after scoring. Choose 3, 4 or 6 panels and how far it is opened on the Brochure card. Tick Repeat the artwork on the back, or load a page 2, to see the reverse of the sheet from behind.
Folding carton — wrapped on all four sidesOne flat artwork wrapped round a carton: front, right side, back and left side, with the top left as bare board. The width is the front/back panel, the Depth in Box / book is the side panel, and the height follows the artwork, so supply the full wrap (2 × width + 2 × depth across). It opens at an angle so two faces show; orbit round for the rest. The wand and color picker work on every printed face.

Repeat the artwork on the back puts the same art on the reverse — back cover, rear panel or back label, mirrored so it reads correctly rather than backwards. If a PDF's Back side / other side role (see 1 · Artwork) has real back art loaded, that takes over automatically and this checkbox is ignored.

The whole front repeats, not just the ink. Side 1's DuSense spot UV and DFL foil are copied to side 2 as well, so the back shows the same coating and foil in the preview, the coverage figures count it, and Export plate writes a side 2 spot UV / foil plate. Work you draw on side 2 itself is added on top. Untick the box and side 2 goes back to exactly what was drawn there. An Apply to set to Side 1 — front is switched to Both sides when you tick the box, so the copy is not hidden. Auto already follows the channels.

Camera, light & environment

Five environments — blurred showroom, studio softbox, warm gallery, dark room with a spotlight, and a daylight window — each with rotation, intensity and background blur. The key light has azimuth, elevation, intensity, warmth and shadow softness; hold L and drag in the preview to move it by hand.

Tip — Auto-orbit is the fastest way to show a customer how varnish and foil catch the light, because the effect only exists in movement. A dark room with a hard raking light is the most dramatic setting for a raised coating; a soft studio box is the most honest.

Hold B at any time for a plain sheet — the same artwork with no embellishment — which is the comparison that closes the sale. The ◐ button does the same thing.

Exporting — plates, GIF & video

ExportWhat you get
Still imageA PNG of the preview at the current view.
Embellishment plateThe production file: the spot UV channel, the foil channel, or both, as a press-ready PDF sized in points or a flat PNG. This is what goes to the coater. Both sides are written whenever side 2 carries channel work of its own.
Animated GIFA seamless loop — light sweep, turntable, tilt rock, or a full orbit-and-light show. Drops straight into an email or a LinkedIn post.
Video (MP4)A motion clip, or a live recording of whatever you do in the preview. F10 records a clip, F9 starts and stops a live take, Esc stops and saves.

The two plates are written differently, because the two processes want different things:

PlateHow it is written
Spot UV — DuSenseContinuous 8-bit grayscale. The coater builds varnish in proportion to the value, and the anti-aliased edge of a letterform is what keeps a coated shape from looking cut out with scissors — so the edge detail is kept rather than thresholded away.
Foil — DFLHard-thresholded and written as a Separation at 100% K (tint transform to pure black, no C, M or Y). Toner-reactive foil transfers onto black toner, and a screened or anti-aliased edge lays down a tint that grabs the foil unevenly — speckle along every edge. Solid or nothing is the only safe plate.

Sides. Each side's channels are exported separately — a multi-page PDF, or one PNG per plate, named …-spot-uv-side1-plate, …-foil-side2-plate and so on. A channel that is empty on a side is skipped and named in the note under the button. Note that unlike the preview — where an untouched foil channel simply follows the varnish — an empty foil channel does not export a copy of the spot UV plate. Sending a printer a foil plate that is quietly the varnish artwork is the kind of thing that gets found on press.

TWO PLATES · TWO PROCESSES · TWO WAYS OF WRITING THEM Spot UV — DuSense continuous 8-bit grayscale the coater builds varnish in proportion to the value, so the soft edge of a letterform survives instead of being thresholded into a hard step 253 levels on a real plate Foil — DFL hard threshold, written as a Separation at 100% K toner-reactive foil transfers onto black toner, and a screened or anti-aliased edge lays down a tint that grabs unevenly — speckle along every edge 2 values solid or nothing Both sides go out, when side 2 carries work …-spot-uv-side1-plate …-foil-side1-plate …-spot-uv-side2-plate side 2 foil — empty A multi-page PDF, or one PNG per plate. A channel that is empty on a side is skipped and named in the note under the button — an empty foil channel does not quietly export a copy of the varnish artwork.
The two plates are written differently because the two processes want different things — and each side that carries work gets its own pair.
Note — Coated area solid black on white sets the polarity, which is what a coater normally expects. Send the plates with the artwork file so the finisher can confirm register.

Save any look you like under My presets, optionally including the camera and lighting, and export presets as .json to share with a colleague. Fifteen quick looks are built in, from Raised gloss spot UV and Deep 3D sculpt through to Unilustre® + spot UV and Ultralustre® card.

Shortcuts

KeyAction
Drag / Right-drag / WheelOrbit · pan · zoom.
B (hold)Plain sheet — artwork with no embellishment, for comparison.
L (hold) + dragMove the key light.
RRotate the piece 90°.
[ / ]Collapse the left / right panel.
F9 / F10 / EscRecord live · record a clip · stop and save.
EscAlso puts the wand or color picker away.
Application

Package Studio

Package Studio takes a flat packaging PDF (the artwork with its cut and crease lines) and folds it into the finished box in 3D. It shows the spot UV, foil and metallic board the way they will look once the carton is cut, folded and glued. The customer sees the assembled package before anything goes to the die cutter. Open it from Home and drop in a PDF, or start from one of the built-in samples.

The built-in samples are on the start screen and in the Built-in samples menu. Each one opens on the board and finish it was designed for:

  • Lone Star Coffee is a tuck-and-tab box on white board with matte lamination, striped spot UV and gold foil.
  • Aurora Serum is a tall reverse-tuck cosmetic carton with a die-cut window. It is on silver metallized board with a white plate, so the bare silver shows only in the band and badge, and it has rose-gold foil.
  • Hill Country Tea is a straight-tuck box on kraft, with copper foil leaves and a gloss spot UV label.
  • Cacao 72 is an open-ended chocolate sleeve on gold metallized board with soft-touch lamination. Gold shows through the medallion and band, and it has a spot UV dot pattern.

What the PDF needs

One page laid out flat: artwork, dieline and plates together, as a converter would supply it. The studio reads the PDF's own content, not a picture of it, so it can separate these:

  • Dieline. Stroked lines in a cut ink and a crease ink. These can be spot inks named like CutContour, Die, Crease or Score, or layers named Cut and Crease. Failing that, the usual colour convention is used: red solid lines are cuts, and blue or green lines (or dashed red) are creases.
  • Spot UV, foil and white ink. A spot ink or a layer whose name says what it is: Spot UV, Varnish, Gold Foil, White. These normally overprint the art. The studio lifts them out of the artwork, so the art underneath shows. It then lights them as the finish.
  • Other pages. Page 2 of a two-page file is taken as the inside print. It can also be set to a spot UV, foil or white plate. Use + Spot UV file or + Foil file for a plate supplied as a separate PDF or image the same size as the dieline.

Every guess is shown in the Dieline and Plates & layers cards, and each one can be changed from its drop-down.

How the box is folded

The panels are the spaces between the cut and crease lines. Every crease with a panel on each side is a fold. A crease broken by a lock slit still counts as one fold. A window cut inside a panel is treated as a hole you can see through. The largest panel stays still, and the others fold 90° away from the printed side, so the art ends up on the outside. That is how almost every folding carton, tray and sleeve goes together.

Where two flaps end up in the same place, the smaller one goes inside by one board thickness. This covers a glue flap under a side wall, dust flaps under the lids, and a tuck behind the back wall. Step by step folds the body first, then closes the flaps from the inside out. All at once folds everything together.

To changeDo this
One foldClick the panel, then move Fold angle. Fold other way reverses it, for a reverse tuck or a crash-lock that folds toward the print.
Which flap is on topClick it and press Put outside or Put inside.
The panel that stays stillClick it and press Make base. The front of the box is usually best.
Board thicknessBoard caliper, in points (thousandths of an inch). 18 pt is a typical folding carton.

Board, spot UV and foil

  • White SBS prints the art as it is. Kraft darkens the transparent process inks with the brown board, and white in the art shows as bare kraft.
  • Metallized board (silver, gold or holographic) reflects through the CMYK. Choose where white ink goes underneath: from the white plate, under all printed areas (metal only where the art is left blank), or none at all.
  • Spot UV is drawn as a raised clear gloss. DuSense spot UV height sets how tall it reads. Pair it with Matte or Soft-touch lamination for the strongest contrast.
  • Foil takes its shape from the foil plate. Choose the foil from the swatches. Holographic shows a rainbow that moves as the box turns.

Saving

Save PNG saves the view as it is. Save video records the flat sheet folding up step by step, then a slow turn so the foil and varnish catch the light, as a WebM file ready to email. Without a licence, both carry the DEMO mark. Package Studio shares the Embellishment Studio licence.

ControlAction
DragTurn the box
Right-drag or Shift-dragMove the view
WheelZoom
Double-clickReframe
SpaceFold up / flatten
Application

3D Viewer

The 3D Viewer keeps a gallery of print projects and shows each one the way the customer will hold it. Folding cartons and presentation folders fold up from their dieline, cards stand with their edges, and every foil, hologram, spot UV, varnish and emboss catches the light of a studio room. Open it from Home, drop a PDF on it, or open one of the samples: a presentation folder, a business card and Package Studio's four cartons.

The Presentation Folder, Business Card and Envelope Creators and Gilder each have a View in 3D button. It sends the job as it is on screen, with its dieline and finishes, and it opens here as a new project.

  • + Add project opens a PDF; dropping one anywhere on the window does the same. A new project is saved to the gallery straight away, with a picture of the view.
  • Click a project to open it. The ⋮ button shows its details: rename it, describe it, open it or delete it.
  • Samples open without being saved. Press Save to keep one, with whatever you changed.
  • Changes to a saved project are saved when you go back to Projects, or at once with Save (Ctrl+S).

The side panels

The icons down the right edge open the panels; click the open one again to hide it. The letter keys do the same.

  • Layers & Design (L). The print, then one layer for each finish found in the file. Spot inks and PDF layers are read by name, the way Gilder reads them: Gold Foil, Silver, HoloPrism, Spot UV, Emboss, Deboss and so on. Each layer has a Material (print, 15 foils, 4 holograms, spot UV, raised UV, matte varnish, soft-touch, white ink, blind), a Micro/Nano texture (brushed, linen, diamond plate, carbon, hammered, sparkle dots, pinstripe) and Embossing (emboss or deboss, with its height). Under them are the board, the laminate, and which lines are the cut and the creases.
  • Shape (S). Automatic folds a file with creases and shows anything else as a card. Fold, Card and Flat sheet choose for you. Board caliper sets the card's thickness and how far stacked flaps sit apart.
  • Folds (D). Every fold edge, lettered A, B, C… on the model too, with its angle. All folds every edge together, the same as the bar at the bottom left. Click a panel on the model to pick its edge, then use Fold other way, Put outside or Make base.
  • Camera (C). Front, ¾, side, back and top views, yaw, pitch, distance and lens. Set to current view makes this the view the project opens on.
  • Lighting Environment (E). Studio softboxes, shop shelf, gallery strips, dimmed warm light and a daylight window, with rotation, exposure, the key light and the floor shadow.

Moving round and saving

  • Drag to turn, right-drag to move, use the wheel to zoom and double-click to reframe. Space folds or unfolds.
  • The buttons at the bottom right are, in order: save a PNG, full screen (F), turntable (T) and hide the panel (H).
  • Save video records the job folding up and then turning slowly in the light (WebM). Without a licence for the Embellishment Studio, saved pictures and video are marked DEMO.
Application

Envelope Creator

Envelope Creator builds any standard envelope as the flat blank that gets printed and converted, and folds it up in 3D with the seal flap open or closed. Put the customer's artwork on the front and the flap, choose a security pattern for the inside, and save the print PDF and the dieline. Open it from Home and pick an envelope type on the start screen; Envelopes… in the top bar brings the start screen back.

Sizes and types

95 standard sizes in thirteen families. The width is always the edge along the opening and the depth runs away from it, so a #10 is 9 1/2 × 4 1/8 and a 9 × 12 catalog is 9 × 12 with the opening on the 9" end.

TypeSizes
Commercial / business#6 1/4, #6 3/4, #7, #7 3/4 Monarch, #8 5/8 check, #9, #10, #11, #12, #14, #16 — diagonal seam, commercial (pointed) flap
Window#6 3/4, #9, #10 and #11 single window; #8 5/8 check, #9 and #10 double window
Remittance#6 1/4, #6 3/4 and #9, with the deep flap that becomes the reply form
Wallet flap#9, #10, 6 × 9 and 9 × 12
Announcement (A-style)A-1 (4 Bar), A-2, A-6, A-7, A-8, A-9, A-10, A-Long — side seam, square flap
Baronial4 Bar, 5 Bar, 5 1/2 Bar, 6 Bar, Lee — side seam, deep pointed flap
Square5" to 9" in half-inch steps
Booklet (open side)6 × 9 to 10 × 13
Catalog (open end)#1 (6 × 9) to #15 1/2 (12 × 15 1/2) — centre seam
Policy and coin#9–#14 policy; #1–#7 coin — open end, centre seam
ISO metricC7, C6, DL, C6/5, C5, C4, B6, B5 with a Euro flap, and DL / C5 window; C5, C4, C3, B4 and E4 pockets

Any size can be typed in, and the Seam and Flap shape can be changed on any envelope: diagonal, side or centre seam; commercial, square, wallet, baronial, Euro, round, booklet, catalog or remittance flap. The seal-flap, bottom-flap and side-flap sizes are worked out from the envelope and can each be changed; Standard flaps puts them back.

Flat and assembled

Three views across the top of the picture:

  • Flat — outside: the printed face of the blank, with the cut line in red and the folds dashed in green.
  • Flat — inside: the reverse of the blank as it prints — mirrored, because it backs up the outside — with the security pattern, the glue areas, the gum line and the window film patch.
  • Assembled 3D: drag to turn, wheel to zoom, double-click to reframe. The first slider folds the blank up (side flaps, then the bottom flap); the second opens and closes the seal flap. Flat, Flap open and Flap closed jump straight there, Turn over shows the other side, and Turntable spins it.

A window envelope shows a letter inside with the recipient's address through the window (untick Show a letter inside to hide it).

Artwork

Every artwork slot takes a PDF (page 1, kept as vector in the print PDF) or a PNG / JPEG image.

  • Front: fitted inside the front, or filling it with bleed to the folds.
  • Logo and return address: top left of the front. The type size drops on small envelopes so the block still fits. Tick White background to knock a white box out of the artwork behind them.
  • Postage: a stamp area (shown on screen only) or a printed permit indicia with your class line and permit number. A white background can go behind either, so the stamp or indicia sits on clean paper.
  • Recipient: shown on screen only until you tick Print the recipient on the envelope. Printed, it takes a size, colour, position and angle, and can carry «Column» merge fields.
  • Variable data: choose a .csv or Excel file whose first row names the columns, then click a column to drop its merge field into the recipient or a text box. Use the arrows to preview each record. Print PDF then writes one envelope per record (the outside, then the inside, for duplex), and the press sheet fills each blank with the next record, sheet after sheet. Pick the range of records to print.
  • Text boxes: any number of extra lines of text on the front. On Flat — outside, click a box to select it: drag it to move, the side squares to change its width, the corner squares to scale the type, and the yellow dot to turn it (hold Shift to snap to 15°; arrow keys nudge, Delete removes it). The same settings are in the form, including the exact angle. Each box has its own font — Helvetica, Times or Courier, or one of fifteen bundled families such as Roboto, Montserrat or Playfair Display, which are embedded in the PDF — with Bold and Italic. Each box can be set to print only when a column equals, contains, starts with, is empty or is not empty, or is greater or less than a value — for example a line that prints only for records where VIP is yes.
  • Reset: the button in the top bar puts every setting back to its default — the #10 envelope, the sample addresses, no artwork, text boxes or data file — after asking you to confirm. Saved templates are not touched.
  • Folding the panel: click the heading of any card, or a small heading inside one (Recipient, Variable data…), to fold it away; Collapse all and Expand all are at the top. What you fold is remembered.
  • Press sheet view: roll the mouse wheel to zoom in and out about the pointer (50% to 800%), drag to pan, and Fit to see the whole sheet again. With variable data, ◀ ▶ (or Page Up / Page Down) step through the sheets and show which records are on each.
  • Spot UV & foil: two plates for the front. Give each a mask file (a PDF or image: dark areas are coated, white and transparent areas are not) and/or set any text box or the recipient to Prints as Spot UV or Foil — Ink + Spot UV puts varnish over the ink, Spot UV only and Foil leave the text out of the ink. They show in purple and gold in the preview. Spot UV plate… and Foil plate… write black-on-white plates (one page per record with variable data); on the press sheet, Spot UV sheet… and Foil sheet… lay the same plates out blank for blank with the DDC circles, ready for the DDC-810 and the DFL-700. Tick Also put them in the print PDF to add overprinting spot colours named Spot_UV and Foil for a printer who wants a single file.
  • Gilder: the button in the top bar opens this envelope in Gilder — the print PDF of the outside and inside, with the Spot UV and foil plates written in as the spot colours Spot_UV and Foil, which Gilder reads as Spot UV gloss and gold foil. Gilder shows the gloss and the foil catch the light on the finished envelope, to check it or show a customer, and writes the embellisher's CMYK file and plates. With a data file open it takes the record on screen. An envelope with no plates opens with Gilder's own suggestions.
  • Back: artwork and a line of text on the seal flap, turned so they read on the closed envelope.
  • Whole outside: a file that covers the whole flat blank plus bleed, for jobs laid out as a flat blank already.

Security patterns

The pattern prints on the inside of the whole blank so a letter cannot be read through the paper: wavy lines, guilloche, crosshatch, diamond lattice, basket weave, honeycomb, confetti, fish scales, repeating text (your own words, e.g. CONFIDENTIAL or the company name), microtext lines, blockout (crosshatch and confetti together) or a solid tint. Pick the ink colour and set the tint, scale and angle. Patterns go into the PDF as fine vector lines, one ink. Inside artwork, if any, is laid out as the reverse side prints and goes over the pattern.

Press sheet — multiple up

The Press sheet card lays the flat blank out many-up on a press sheet, the same way Digital Die Cut does it: rows, turned rows or true-shape nesting, whichever fits the most blanks inside the cutter's margins. The Press sheet view above the picture shows the result; Front and Back switch between the two sides of the sheet.

CutterMarks on the sheet
DSM-1000 B2
platen die cutter
The Registration Mark Kit bars — the fixed and moving side marks 198 mm from the lead and the conveyance bar at the trail — with the 28 mm reference-edge margin, the 480 × 710 mm cutting area and up to three punches per sheet.
UD-320
rotary die cutter
The Y bar centred at the lead edge and, in X + Y mode, the X mark — 100 mm from centre on the front and 76 mm on the back, on opposite sides of the sheet, so the machine can tell the faces apart. The sheet must be 210–390 × 297–520 mm, and the paper 106–400 gsm.
Digital knife / laserLocator circles or crosses round the sheet for the cutter's camera.
DPC-400 / DPC-600
digital die cutters
The same camera marks, sized for each machine, and an optional QR naming the cut file for DPC Connect — see DPC-400 / DPC-600 marks.
DPC-2024
digital die cutter (plotter)
Four L-shaped AAS corner marks, no QR — see DPC-2024 corner marks.
DDC circlesTick DDC circles for spot UV when the sheet also goes through a DDC-8000 or DDC-810 PRO: circles down both side edges of the front, moved in to 16 mm when locator marks use the outer band.

Imposed sheet PDF writes page 1, the front (the outside of every blank plus the cutter's marks), and page 2, the back (the inside print — the security pattern — lined up behind every blank, for a sheet turned over left to right). Artwork is clipped to each blank's cut line plus up to half the gap, so one blank's bleed never prints on the next. Cut file PDF writes the same layout as CutContour and Crease spot lines with the cutter's marks, for the die maker or the cutter. The card also shows the blanks per sheet, the paper used and the sheets for the quantity. Checks warns when the blank will not fit, the sheet is outside what the cutter takes, or a mark lands on a blank.

UD-320 — turn the artwork 1°. With the UD-320 chosen, tick Turn the artwork 1° clockwise (to the right) to print the artwork turned one degree clockwise about the centre of the sheet, to match a die that cuts a touch out of square. Only the artwork and its proof die lines turn — the X and Y marks and the slug line stay square, and so does the cut file. The turn is made on the front and copied to the back, so the two sides stay in register. Checks confirms every turned blank still sits on the sheet and clear of the marks.

Saving

OutputWhat you get
Print PDFPage 1 the outside, page 2 the inside (mirrored so it backs up), each the flat blank plus bleed with crop marks and a slug line. Trim and bleed boxes are set. Tick Also put the dieline in the print PDF to add it in its own spot colours.
Dieline PDFCutContour for the outline and the window cut-outs, Crease (dashed) for the folds and Glue (dotted) for the glue areas on the inside — the same page size as the print PDF, so it registers.
PNGThe view on screen, at its current angle, for a proof or an email.

The Output card also shows the flat blank size, which side it opens on, the USPS mail class (machinable letter, non-machinable, flat or parcel) and how many blanks fit on the chosen press sheet. Checks warns when the seal flap will not close the back, side flaps meet, a window is too near an edge or the blank will not fit the sheet.

The last envelope and its settings are remembered on this computer and carried by the Suite backup. Artwork files are not kept — add them again when you reopen, or save a template with the artwork in it.

Templates and showcase samples

The Templates card at the top keeps a whole envelope so a reorder opens exactly as it ran: size, flaps, window, paper and closure, return address and postage, the security pattern, the output settings and the press sheet. Type a name and choose Save as template; tick Keep the artwork in the template to keep the artwork too (pieces over 2.5 MB are left out, and the card says which).

ButtonWhat it does
OpenLoads the chosen template — every setting and its artwork.
UpdateReplaces the chosen template with what is on screen now.
Export… / Import…Saves the template as an .iqenvelope file to move it to another PC or send it to a customer, and reads one back.

Showcase samples are finished envelopes with their own artwork — a wedding baronial with a gold monogram flap and floral liner, a #10 double-window bank statement with permit indicia and a blockout tint, a red 6 × 6 holiday square with a tartan liner, a 9 × 12 kraft real-estate catalog, a black-and-gold #3 coin gift-card envelope, a #6 3/4 remittance with a donation form on the flap, a DL window corporate envelope, and a navy A-7 wedding invitation envelope with gloss Spot UV botanicals and a gold foil frame and monogram — it opens with both plates already loaded, so it shows how the two masks sit on the front and what goes out as the Spot UV and foil plates. Open one from the start screen or the Showcase samples list; everything in it can be changed and saved as your own template. The brands and addresses in the samples are made up.

Application

Presentation Folder Creator

Presentation Folder Creator builds a pocket folder as the flat blank that gets printed and die cut, and folds it up in 3D with the pockets glued and the cover open or closed. It is the Envelope Creator for folders: the same views, artwork slots, variable data, text boxes, Spot UV and foil plates, press sheet and templates. Open it from Home and pick a folder type on the start screen; Folders… in the top bar brings the start screen back.

Types and sizes

TypeWhat it is
Standard pocket folderOne pocket inside the back cover, curved top, glue tab on the outer edge
Two-pocket folderA pocket inside both covers
Pocket folder with card slitsOne pocket with a business-card slit cut into its front
Expanding-spine folderTwo parallel folds on the spine (1/4″ to start with) so it opens flat on a thick stack
Report coverTwo covers and a spine, no pockets
Mini folder6 × 9, 4 × 9, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2 and 7 1/4 × 10 1/2 for brochures and invitations

The other types come in 9 × 12 (letter), 9 1/2 × 14 1/2 (legal), 11 1/2 × 17 1/2 (tabloid), A4, A5 and A3. The size is the size of one cover. Any size can be typed in; changing it puts the pocket height, glue tab and slit height back to what suits the new size.

Pockets, slits and spine

  • Pockets: none, the back cover, the front cover, or both. Opened, the front cover lies on the left and the back cover on the right, as a book does.
  • Pocket height and top: a third of the cover height to start with (4″ on a 12″ folder). The top can be straight, a curved scoop, angled, or have a thumb notch.
  • Glue tab: the pocket flap hangs below the cover; the tab on the cover's outer edge folds in first, then the pocket folds up over it and is glued down. The glue is dotted on the dieline. Untick the box to leave the tab off, for a pocket that is stitched or taped.
  • Business-card slits: one straight slit or two corner slits, in the back pocket, the front pocket or both. Height up is measured from the bottom edge of the cover to the slit; the card stands above it. Across moves it from the middle of the pocket.
  • Spine: 0 makes a single fold. Anything more makes two folds that distance apart, with the spine between them to carry its own artwork and a line of spine text that reads along it.
  • Corner radius rounds the outer corners of the covers.

Flat and assembled

  • Flat — outside: the printed face of the blank, with the cut line in red and the folds dashed in green. The pocket flaps hang below the covers.
  • Flat — inside: the reverse as it prints — mirrored, because it backs up the outside — with the glue areas and any inside artwork.
  • Assembled 3D: drag to turn, wheel to zoom, double-click to reframe. The first slider folds the glue tabs and pockets up; the second closes the cover. Flat, Open and Closed jump straight there and Turn over shows the other side.

Artwork

Every slot takes a PDF (page 1, kept as vector in the print PDF) or a PNG / JPEG image.

  • Front cover and back cover: fitted inside the cover, or filling it with bleed to the edges. The art is clipped to its own cover so it never runs across a fold, and stops at the pocket's hinge.
  • Spine: artwork and a line of text, when the spine width is more than 0.
  • Logo and company details: the logo sits top left on the front cover and the address block bottom left on the back cover; a white background can go behind either.
  • Inside front, inside back, whole inside spread: laid out as the folder looks opened flat. An optional pattern (tint, guilloche, repeating text) can go under it.
  • Whole outside: a file that covers the whole flat blank plus bleed, for jobs laid out as a flat blank already.
  • Personalised name, variable data and text boxes: as in the Envelope Creator — open a .csv or Excel file, type «Column» merge fields into the name block or a text box, and Print PDF writes one folder per record.
  • Spot UV & foil: two plates for the front cover, from a mask file or from text boxes set to print as Spot UV or foil. Gilder in the top bar opens the folder in Gilder, its plates marked as Spot UV and gold foil, to see them catch the light and write the embellisher's files.

Press sheet — multiple up

The Press sheet card lays the flat blank out on a press sheet exactly as the Envelope Creator does, with the DSM-1000, UD-320 and digital-cutter marks, DDC circles and the DDC-810 QR. A folder blank is large: 9 × 12 two-pocket folders are about 19 × 16″ flat, so expect one up on a B2 sheet and two up on the small mini sizes. The checks tell you when a blank will not fit or a mark lands on a blank.

Saving, templates and samples

  • Print PDF: page 1 the outside, page 2 the inside, with crop marks and a slug line; the dieline can ride in the same file. Dieline PDF has CutContour (cut and card slits), Crease and Glue spot colours.
  • Templates: every setting on the panel, and the artwork when it is under 2.5 MB, kept on this PC and exported as an .iqfolder file to move to another PC or send to a shop.
  • Showcase samples: a law-firm proposal with a card slit, a two-pocket listing folder with spot UV and foil, a school admissions folder, an expanding-spine annual-report binder and a mini wedding invitation folder. Each opens fully editable. The brands and addresses are made up.
Application

Door Hanger Creator

Door Hanger Creator builds a door hanger as the die-cut card that gets printed, and hangs it on a door knob or a lever handle in 3D. It is the Envelope Creator's window for door hangers: the same artwork slots, variable data, text boxes, Spot UV and foil plates and templates. Open it from Home and pick a die on the start screen; Dies… in the top bar brings the start screen back.

Dies, holes and sizes

DieWhat it is
Round hole with slitThe everyday hanger: a round hole with a slit running up and out to the edge, so the card opens over a knob without tearing
Round holeNo slit — flexed over a knob or slid onto a lever; the strongest hole
Open-side hookThe hole opens to the side through a channel, so it hooks over a lever without bending the card
KeyholeA round hole with a narrow slot below it that the card drops into
Arch top / House topA curved or a peaked roof-line top over the hole
Tear-off couponA perforation across the bottom for a coupon or reply card
Oval hole / Rounded slotA wide hole that clears a lever more easily, or a slot that also hangs on a rail or a mirror
  • Sizes: 3 1/2 × 8 1/2 (the usual), 3 1/2 × 11, 3 2/3 × 8 1/2, 4 × 9, 4 × 10, 4 1/4 × 11, 4 1/4 × 14, 4 1/2 × 12, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 99 × 210, 100 × 210, 105 × 297 and A5 — or any size typed in.
  • Hole cutout: any die's hole can be swapped for another. Hole size offers the die-maker's sizes, 1″ to 2″ (1 1/4″ on a 3 1/2″ hanger, 1 3/8″ on 4″–4 1/4″, 1 1/2″ wider), or type a width. Below the top is the card above the hole. An oval or slot has its own height; a hook or keyhole its channel width.
  • Slit: none, up and out to the side, straight out, or straight up, opening to the right or the left. It is cut 1 mm past the edge so the die cuts clean through.
  • Top: square, rounded corners (with a radius), arch or peaked, with the rise above the shoulders.
  • Checks warn when the hole is too small for a door knob's 3/4″ shank, leaves under 3/8″ of card beside or above it, runs off a curved top, or the perforation runs too close to the hole.

Flat and on the door

  • Flat — front and Flat — back: the printed faces with the cut in red and the perforation dashed in green. The back is shown as it prints, turned over left to right.
  • 3D: the hanger on a door, the top of its hole resting on the handle's neck — a round knob or a lever. Front, Back and Turn over turn it round on the handle; untick On a door to see it on its own.
  • Artwork: front and back, each a PDF or an image the size of the whole hanger plus bleed (the hole is cut out of it); a logo under the hole and company details at the foot; a name or address from a data file and text boxes, as in the Envelope Creator.

Gilder, the Imposer and saving

  • Gilder (top bar, the Spot UV & foil card and Output) opens the hanger in Gilder with its Spot UV and foil marked, to see them catch the light and write the embellisher's files.
  • View in 3D opens it in the 3D Viewer, cut out round its die line.
  • Impose › sends the print file — front and back, the die line in CutContour and Perf, the finishes as overprinting spot colours, one hanger per record with a data file — to the Imposer, which makes the press sheets and the cutter's marks.
  • Print PDF: page 1 the front, page 2 the back. Dieline PDF: CutContour for the outline, hole and slit, and Perf (dashed) for a tear-off.
  • Templates are kept on this PC and exported as .iqhanger files. Showcase samples: a lawn-care offer with a tear-off, a Just Listed house top with foil and Spot UV, a hotel Do Not Disturb keyhole and a pizzeria hook with its menu on the back.
Application

Photo Layout

Photo Layout takes one photograph and the sizes a customer ordered — say 6 of 10 × 13, 30 wallets and 20 4 × 6 — and lays every print out on press sheets that a Duplo DC slitter / cutter / creaser finishes in one pass, with the DC-ST100 In-Line Stacker stacking the output by size. It writes the press PDF, one Duplo DC job XML per layout and a job sheet for the operator.

The photo and the order

  • Photograph: a JPEG, PNG or one-page PDF, or Use a sample photo. Click the picture to set what has to stay in every crop (a face); each size is cropped round it.
  • Placement: Fill crops to cover the print with full bleed; Fit shows the whole picture inside a white border.
  • Order: a line per size — wallet 2.5 × 3.5, mini wallet, 3.5 × 5, 4 × 5, 4 × 6, 5 × 7, 6 × 8, 8 × 10, 8.5 × 11, 10 × 13, 11 × 14, 12 × 18, the square sizes, or custom — and its quantity. A print runs the way the photograph does (a portrait photo prints portrait) unless the line says otherwise.

How the sheets are planned

  • A DC slits the whole length of the sheet and cuts across its whole width, so a sheet is a grid: every print exactly fills the cell where its column meets its row, one way round or the other. A cell nothing fits is waste.
  • The planner tries three ways — sizes sharing sheets where the grid allows, one size to a layout run until its quantity is made, and one size to a layout with a part sheet for the rest — and keeps the one with the fewest press sheets, then the fewest layouts (each layout is a DC JOB), then the fewest prints over the order.
  • Every layout is checked against the chosen DC (DC-648, DC-746 or DC-618, from the Duplo finisher specs): the feed size, the slitters (two per gutter plus the edges), the 30 cuts, a column gutter of 0 or 5–15 mm, a row gutter of 0 or at least 3 mm, the 3.2–55 mm edge slitter margins, the lead and trail cuts, the 48 × 50 mm smallest piece. Twice the bleed gutters let every print keep its bleed and are raised to what the DC can drop.
  • The tabs over the sheet step through the layouts; each shows how many sheets to print, its lanes, and where its output goes.

The DC-ST100 In-Line Stacker

The DC-ST100 connects to the DC-648 and the DC-746 (not the DC-618). Each lane off the DC becomes its own stack across the conveyor — three across as standard, five with the OPG-01 side guides — and two or more across need gutter slits. When the finished size or the slit positions change from one JOB to the next, the stacker moves to a new row of stacks by itself. So with the stacker on:

  • each lane carries one size, there are at most three lanes (five with the side guides), and the column gutters are slit gutters;
  • prints longer than 216 mm along the feed (a 10 × 13) cannot be stacked: they are planned on sheets of their own, routed to the delivery tray or the insert tray;
  • the stock has to be 230–400 gsm; the job sheet works out the stacks from its thickness (40 mm high at most).

The stacker's own settings — ST100 Connection, Stacker setting, Space b/w rows, Repeat counter, preset counts — are kept in each JOB on the PC Controller (System → Exit), not in the job XML. The job sheet says what to set for each JOB.

Press PDF, job XML and job sheet

  • Press PDF: one page per layout (or every sheet written out), the photograph embedded once and cropped into every print, with the DC REG mark and job barcode at the lead edge and a slug saying how many sheets to print.
  • Marks on every sheet (Sheet and finisher): Job number in words under the barcode prints the DC JOB number in plain figures below the job barcode, so an operator can read it. Slug line runs along the trail margin with the job name, layout, DC JOB, what is on the sheet, the sheet number of the total, the output and the date. 2D code on every sheet adds a QR code or Data Matrix holding the PDF's file name and “Sheet n of total” (for example Photo order - press sheets.pdf | Sheet 3 of 11), in the lower right corner by default, placed the way the OMR Generator places its code (30 mm in from the right edge of the sheet, 4 mm up from the trail edge, 10 mm square); lower left or top left in the lead margin are there too. With the code in the trail, the trail margin grows to keep the prints clear of it, and the slug line stops short of it. The sheets are numbered straight through all the layouts. Because every sheet's code is different, the press PDF then writes every sheet out. A warning shows if the code will not fit the margin clear of the prints.
  • DC job XML: one Duplo DuploDCJobTemplate file per layout — the format the Imposer and Book write — with a CutBlock for every print (its own size and position, in points from the bottom of the sheet), the REG mark and the barcode area. JOB numbers run on from First DC job number.
  • Job sheet: every DC JOB, the sheets to feed, the output (stacker or tray), the stacker settings, and each lane's size, prints and stacks.
  • Everything for the DC puts the press PDF, the XML files and the job sheet in one folder. Output from an unlicensed copy is marked DEMO.

Templates

The Templates card sets the whole window up for a kind of work — press sheet, DC, stacker, margins, marks and DC job numbers — in one click. Four come built in (Photo lab 13 × 19 — DC JOB by size, Portrait packages 13 × 19, Wallets and 4 × 6 on 12 × 18, Square prints on SRA3, Photo lab B2 — DC JOB by size (DC-746 B2)). Save keeps the settings on screen as your own template (tick Save the order with it for a standing order); Export… writes it as a .iqphoto file for another PC or for the Workflow Photo layout step, and Import… reads one back. The photograph is never part of a template.

Order files

Order file… (or drop the file on the sheet) reads the sizes and quantities from a CSV, a text file or an Excel workbook: a size and a quantity on each line in either order (4x6, 20, 20 x 3.5x5, wallet 40), or Size and Qty columns, with an optional portrait / landscape and a Job: Smith family line for the job name. A size that comes twice is added up; lines that do not read are listed.

DC job numbers by size

Under DC job numbers, One per size, from the table gives every size its own DC JOB, the same on every order: by default 3.5×5 = 200, 4×6 = 201, 5×7 = 202, 8×10 = 203, 8.5×11 = 204, 10×13 = 205, 11×14 = 206, 12×18 = 207, wallet = 208, mini wallet = 209, 4×4 = 210, 4×5 = 211, 5×5 = 212, 6×8 = 213, 8×8 = 214, 12×12 = 215 — edit the table to match your PC Controller. Each size then runs as its own layout, always on the same grid, so the barcode on its sheets calls up the JOB stored for it. XML for every size… writes the whole library once: a job XML for each size in the table, each in a folder named for the size and the press sheet (4x6 on 13x19\JOB 201 - 4x6 on 13x19.xml); sizes that do not fit the sheet are left out and named.

B2 sheets on the DC-746 B2

Choose B2 (500 × 707 mm) as the press sheet (or DC-746 B2 as the DC) and the order is laid out for the DC-746 B2. The DC-20000 cuts each B2 sheet across its feed into cut sheets — JOB A at the lead, then B (and C) — after a 20 mm lead strip, with 10 mm gutters between them and a 10 mm trail. DC-20000 cut sheets a B2 picks 2 (333.5 mm each) or 3 (219 mm each), or whichever prints fewer B2 sheets. The cut sheets need not be the same length: Cut sheet lengths is Equal or unequal, whichever prints fewer (it tries every JOB A and B length in 5 mm steps, and keeps equal lengths on a tie), Equal, or Set them — type the lengths in mm, JOB A first, each 210–370 mm, such as 300, 357; one length sets JOB A and JOB B takes the rest. When the JOB numbers come from the table, a size keeps to one cut-sheet length, so its stored DC-746 JOB always fits. Set each length as its own B2 cut position on the DC-20000; the job sheet lists them. Each cut sheet then turns 90° onto the DC-746: the B2’s left edge becomes its lead edge and the DC-20000’s cut its right-side reference, so every cut sheet is laid out as a DC-746 sheet of its own, with its own L-shaped REG mark (12 mm in from the cut and the left edge, inside the 3–23 mm area the DC-746 B2 reads), its own JOB barcode and QR code. Across the B2’s lead the press PDF prints the DC-20000’s REG line, 1.5 mm wide and 13 mm from the lead, 10–425 mm in from the right edge so both sensors see it; it goes out with the lead strip.

The layout tabs show each B2 layout (which cut-sheet layout is on JOB A, B and C, and how many B2 sheets to print) and then each cut-sheet layout, the DC-746 JOB. Cut sheets of different sizes can share a B2 sheet; each carries its own barcode, so set the DC-746 barcode to Every sheet. The job XML is one file per DC-746 JOB, in folders such as 4x6 on B2, and the job sheet lists the DC-20000 cut positions. The bleed defaults to 1/8″ (0.125″) on every sheet; with Twice the bleed gutters that leaves a quarter-inch between prints.

In a Workflow

The Workflow steps Photo preflight and Photo layout do all of this from a hot folder. The example Photo lab — photo + order file to 13x19 DC sheets, JOB by size watches C:\ImposeIQ\Hot\Photo Layout 13x19\In: drop a photograph and its order file together, or a .zip with them in it (folders inside the zip are fine, and the extra files Windows and macOS add are left out; a zip that will not open goes to Problem with the reason); the photo is checked (it opens, and has the resolution for its biggest print), a failed job goes to Problem, and a good one is laid out with the lab template — the press PDF with the REG mark, job barcode and QR code on every sheet and the job sheet go to Ready, and the DC job XML (this job's and the whole library) to DC Job XML, a folder per size and sheet.

Application

Business Card Creator

Business Card Creator designs a card on the card itself, shows it in 3D with its foil and gloss catching the light, and writes the print PDF, a proof and the imposed press sheets. Any element can print as a foil, a hologram, Spot UV or a blind emboss; those are written the way Gilder reads them, so Open in Gilder shows the finished card and makes the embellisher's files. Open it from Home and pick a card type or a sample; Cards… brings the start screen back.

Cards and sizes

  • Standard card: US 3.5 × 2″, Europe 85 × 55, credit card (CR80), Japan, Australia, slim, square and mini, or any size; landscape or portrait (Turn); square or rounded corners. Front only or both sides.
  • Die-cut card: circle, oval, leaf, arch, ticket (scooped corners), clipped corners, hexagon or a rounded tab. The bleed is the cut grown by the bleed all the way round, and the safe area follows the shape. The die line goes out as a CutContour spot colour.
  • Fold-over card: twice the size, scored and folded along the top (a tent) or the side (a book), with a front, a back and two inside faces. Folding along the top, the back prints upside down above the front so both read once folded, and the inside is laid out as opened and backs up turned 180°.

Designing on the card

  • Pick a face at the top left of the preview. + Text, + Image, + Box, + Rule, + Circle and + QR code add an element; click one on the card to select it and drag to move it. Eight handles resize it: the corners both ways, the sides one way, with the opposite edge staying put; Shift on a corner keeps the proportions (an image always does). On text the side handles change the wrap width and the top, bottom and corners scale the type. Arrow keys nudge (Shift = 5 mm) and Delete removes it.
  • Text takes any of the bundled fonts, a size in points, bold, italic, capitals and left, centre or right alignment, wrapped to its width. Copy to other side puts an element on every face.
  • Classic, Centred and Bold lay every face out again with the usual fields; the images stay.
  • Images: the logo and any pictures, PNG, JPEG, SVG or PDF (a PDF stays vector). A face can also have a background colour and a background image, with bleed.
  • The guides show the cut (red), the bleed (dotted), the safe area (blue, following a die shape) and the fold (green). The checks warn about type outside the safe area, type under 5.5 pt, foil on type under 7 pt and a QR code under 15 mm.

Foil, Spot UV and Gilder

  • Prints as sets what an element is: ink; ink with Spot UV over it; Spot UV alone (clear); gold, silver, rose gold, blue, red or green foil; a rainbow, prism, sparkle or pinstripe hologram; or a blind emboss or deboss. A foil or emboss takes the place of the ink.
  • Background pattern (on the Face card): dots, scattered dots, stripes, pinstripes, chevrons, waves, grid, crosshatch, checkerboard, diamonds, honeycomb, scales, ripples, triangles, repeating text (with «fields») or the repeating logo, over the whole face and its bleed, under the elements. Set the repeat, the dot or line size and the angle; it prints as Spot UV alone to start with, and can be any finish or ink. The presets give a starting point. The checks warn when a line or dot is under 0.4 mm, which a Spot UV or foil may not hold, or so heavy it closes up.
  • An image or a QR code in a finish uses its dark (or, for a transparent PNG, its opaque) parts, so a black logo becomes a gold one.
  • Every finish is written into the PDFs in its own overprinting spot colour, named so Gilder reads it back as that finish (“Gold foil”, “Spot UV gloss”, “Rainbow hologram”…). The Finishes card lists them.
  • Open in Gilder hands the card over: Gilder opens it with the finishes already picked, shows them in the light and writes the CMYK file and the plates for the embellisher. Press sheets in Gilder does the same for the imposed sheets.
  • The 3D view shows the card with its thickness, the foils as metal, holograms with their rainbow, Spot UV as gloss and emboss raised; move the mouse to swing the light across it.

Variable data and vCards

  • Open a .csv or Excel file whose first row names the columns, or try Use the sample staff list. Type «Name» (or click a column) in any text and it fills from each row; an empty field drops its line.
  • A QR code can hold a vCard made from the fields — name, title, company, phones, email, website and address — so every card carries its own contact; or a web address or any text, with fields.
  • Print only when… prints an element only for records where a column matches (equals, contains, is empty…).
  • ◀ ▶ at the bottom step through the records. The print PDF writes a card per person in the range.

Printing, press sheets and cutters

  • Print PDF: a page per printed side of each card, with bleed, trim and bleed boxes, crop marks and a slug; the die line can go in as CutContour. Proof PDF shows every face flat with its cut, for approval.
  • Press sheet: the sheet (12 × 18 takes 21 US cards), gap, margin and turning; One card, repeated for one person's run, or A different person in each place for a staff list. The backs back up work-and-turn at the mirrored place.
  • Cutter marks: pick the machine the sheets go to. The sheet carries only that cutter's marks, only its options show, and the margins move so no mark lands on a card (the checks say so if one does, or if the machine does not take the sheet).
    • Crop marks — guillotine: crop ticks round the grid, one pair per cut.
    • Duplo DC card cutter: the REG mark at the top-right of the lead edge and the job barcode for the DC job number (DC-618, DC-648, DC-746). The DC cuts straight lines, so the checks stop a die shape going to it. With the DC-648 chosen, two more options appear, drawn as the OMR Generator draws them: Skew Mark — a 10 mm bar at the lead edge, 50–60 mm in from the right, that the DC-648 uses to check the sheet fed square; and Shrink Mark — a second L like the REG mark, its corner 9 mm in from the right edge and 370 mm down from the lead edge by default (Shrink mark from the lead edge), from which the DC-648 measures how much the print has shrunk or stretched. On a short sheet the shrink mark moves up to stay 25 mm clear of the trail edge; the cards move in from the right edge to keep clear of it.
    • Duplo UD-320 rotary die cutter: the X / Y register marks the Cover Builder and the Folder and Envelope Creators use — a 3 × 100 mm Y bar centred 5 mm from the lead edge, and a 3 × 25 mm X mark 100 mm from centre on the front and 76 mm on the other side on the back (both faces are marked). Y mark only moves the Y bar to 10 mm and drops the X mark; X mark (front) chooses its side. Turn the artwork 1° clockwise turns the cards (not the marks or slug) about the sheet centre to match a die that cuts a touch out of square. Sheets 210–390 × 297–520 mm.
    • DSM-1000 platen die cutter: the Digital Die Cut registration bars — 3 mm bars 12 mm in from both side edges, 198 mm from the lead, and the conveyance bar at the trail on the reference side. Reference (belt) edge picks the side that runs on the conveyance belt; nothing is cut within the Reference margin (28 mm or more) of it. Sheets 279–530 × 279–750 mm.
    • Digital die cutter: only the locator marks the cutter's camera reads — black circles or crosses (Locator mark, Mark size 3–20 mm) round the sheet, placed as the Digital Die Cut engine places them, with no crop ticks or DC marks.
    With a UD-320, DSM-1000 or digital die cutter (or a die-cut card) Cut file PDF writes the die lines of each card on the sheet in CutContour.
  • Slug: every press sheet, in the preview and the PDF, carries a line along its bottom edge naming the job, the card size, the number up, the sheet, the cutter (with the DC model and job number), the face (front or back, and sheet n of N) and the date.
  • Templates keep the card, every face and the press settings — and the images under 4 MB — on this PC; Export writes an .iqcard file with every image. Output from an unlicensed copy is marked DEMO.
  • Samples: Ridgeline Print Co., a leaf die-cut florist card, a circle kraft coffee card with a blind emboss, a black card in silver foil and hologram, and a fold-over salon appointment card. The names are made up.
Application

Calendar Creator

Calendar Creator lays out a calendar from a start month, a language and a picture per month, shows it flat and in 3D, and writes the print PDF with the pages in the order and the way up the binding needs. It looks and works like the Envelope Creator: open it from Home, pick a calendar type or a sample on the start screen, and change everything on the right; Calendars… in the top bar brings the start screen back.

Calendar types

TypeWhat it is
Wall calendar — wire-o, opens upBound along the top and hung open: the month's photo above, its date grid below, so an 11 × 8.5 calendar opens to 11 × 17. Each photo prints on the back of the sheet above its grid, so 12 months take 13 sheets: the cover carries January's photo on its back, December's grid carries the back cover.
Wall calendar — one page a monthThe photo above the grid on one page, printed one side; wire-o at the top, or no binding for a pad or a stapled calendar.
Desk easel calendarPages flip over the top of a folded board stand. Double-sided runs January–June on the fronts and July–December on the backs: once the last front has gone over, turn the easel round. The stand prints as its own page with its two creases and the wire holes at both ends.
Desk tent cardOne sheet creased twice into a tent: six months on each face and a base that tucks under. The other face prints upside down on the flat sheet, so both read the right way up once folded.
12-month posterThe whole year on one sheet under a photo band — a year planner.

Each type has its standard sizes, and Custom size takes any page; Turn swaps the width and height. For the tent card the size is one face.

Months, language and holidays

  • Start month, year and months: 12 months, 13 for a lead-in month (a wall calendar then has 14 sheets), or any count up to 24, rolling into the next year.
  • Week starts on Sunday or Monday; Language sets the month and day names (17 languages). Names the standard PDF fonts cannot spell, such as Polish, Czech, Greek or Russian, print in the bundled Roboto.
  • US holidays: the federal list is the MIS planner's. A holiday prints on its own date, and when the planner observes it on another weekday (July 4 on a Sunday is off on the Monday) that day says “(observed)”. Popular observances adds Easter, Mother's Day, Halloween and the like.
  • Your own dates: one a line — 2027-03-14 Open house for one day, 7/1 Fiscal year for that date in every year shown.

Photos and design

  • Add photos / PDF takes several images, or one PDF with a page per month, and fills the slots in order from the first empty one — the cover first. Drop files on a slot to start there, or on the flat view to fill the month on screen. A PDF stays vector in the print PDF. The checks warn when a photo will print under 150 ppi.
  • Captions print small in the corner of a month's photo.
  • Themes set the colours and fonts in one click; every colour and the title and text fonts can then be changed.
  • Date grid: ruled boxes, shaded boxes, a rule under each week, or no lines. Rows: as the month needs, always six, or always five with 23/30 and 24/31 sharing a split box.
  • Photo area sets how much of a one-page month, easel page or poster the photo takes, above or beside the grid. The wall calendar's photos fill their own page.
  • Last and next month small in a wall calendar's heading, neighbouring months' dates greyed, ISO week numbers and capitals are options.

Flat, print and 3D views

  • Flat — as read: each spread as the customer sees it, a wall calendar's photo above its grid with the wire between. Guides shows the bleed, the safe area, the wire-o holes and hanger notch, and the creases.
  • Print pages: each page of the print PDF in order, as it lies on the press, with the backs turned the way they print.
  • 3D: drag to turn, wheel to zoom, double-click to reframe. The slider and ▶ flip through the year: the wall calendar's sheets go up over the wire, the one-page calendar's go over and behind, the easel's go over the stand, and the tent card folds up from flat.
  • ◀ ▶ and Page Up / Page Down step through the spreads, the print pages or the months.

Printing and binding

  • Print PDF: every page in sheet order, front then back, with bleed, a trim and bleed box, crop marks and a slug line. A press backing up work-and-turn needs a wall calendar's photo backs turned 180° (they are read flipped up over the wire), which is how they are written; the easel's backs read head to head and are not turned. Untick Backs work-and-turn for a press that tumbles head over head.
  • Wire-o: 3:1 or 2:1 pitch. The holes are centred along the bound edge and kept clear of the hanger notch, and the safe area grows on the bound edge so no type is punched. Punch guide puts the holes and notch in the PDF as non-printing, overprinting WireO and CutContour spot outlines. The Output card gives the wire size for the stack and the number of holes.
  • Creases on the tent card and easel stand go out as an overprinting Crease spot colour, the stand's outline as CutContour.
  • Proof PDF: one page per spread, as it is read, for the customer to approve.
  • Output from an unlicensed copy is marked DEMO, as in every ImposeIQ tool.
  • Samples: a seasons wire-o wall calendar, a double-sided studio desk easel, a year planner poster, a Spanish tent card and a French kitchen calendar. The pictures are painted in code; the company names are made up.

Staples and the hanging hole

  • Wall calendar that opens up, Binding: Staples — saddle-stitched. The calendar becomes a booklet bound along the fold: cover, then each month's photo and grid, blank pages to make a multiple of four, and the back cover (28 pages on 7 sheets for 12 months; 13 months fill 28 pages with no blanks). The print PDF is in printer spreads, the fold across the middle, outside then inside of each sheet, the inside turned 180° for work-and-turn. Two staples go through the fold (three on pages over 14″ wide).
  • A 1/4″ hanging hole is drilled 3/8″ in from the edge away from the fold, through the whole book; opened, the calendar hangs by the hole in its top leaves. The grid pages keep their type clear of it.
  • One page a month, Binding: Staples — staples 1/4″ down from the top, and the hanging hole 0.6″ down between them; the type starts below the hole.
  • With Punch and drill guide ticked, the holes go into the print PDF as a non-printing, overprinting Drill spot outline (wire-o holes as WireO).

Advertising strip

For a wall calendar, tick Make the last page longer and set its depth (2″ to start with). The last leaf then hangs that much below the others, so its foot shows under every month all year — the classic promotional calendar. Type the advertiser's text (the first line prints larger) and, if you have one, put the ad artwork in the Advertising strip slot under Photos: it fills the strip with bleed, and the text prints white over it.

  • Wire-o: the strip is on the sheet with the last month's grid; the back cover behind it is longer too.
  • Saddle-stitched: the strip is on the inside back page, so the outer sheet prints that much longer than the rest (the checks say by how much).
  • One page a month: the last page.

The flat view, the proof and the 3D view all show the strip below the months.

Press sheet — multiple up

  • Choose a sheet (11 × 17 up to 25 × 38, SRA3, B2 or custom), the gap between trims (twice the bleed to start with, so every piece keeps its full bleed) and the margin from the sheet edge to the outermost trim, where the gripper and crop marks go.
  • The same page, repeated fills each sheet with one leaf as many up as fit, so a run needs calendars ÷ up copies of each sheet. Different pages, ganged puts consecutive leaves side by side, to be cut apart and collated. Pieces of a different size (a longer advertising leaf, the easel stand) get their own sheets; a piece too big for the sheet is reported in the checks.
  • Pieces may be turned 90° when that fits more. The back of each sheet carries every piece's back at the mirrored place — across the sheet for a work-and-turn press, up and down it when the press tumbles — turned to match.
  • Crop marks, and dashed fold marks for stapled spreads, sit outside the block of pieces. Press sheet in the view tabs shows each side; Imposed sheets PDF writes them, front then back. The card gives the pieces a sheet and the press sheets the run needs.

Templates

  • Save as template keeps every setting on the panel — type, size, months, language, holidays, titles, design, advertising strip, binding, output and press sheet — and the photos when they come to under 4 MB, on this PC. Open, Update and Delete work on the chosen one.
  • Export writes what is on screen as an .iqcalendar file with every photo in it (a PDF's pages are stored once); Import opens one and keeps a copy in the list.
Application

ImposeIQ ROI

What a Duplo embellishment or finishing machine is worth to a shop, built from the numbers the rest of the Suite already keeps. Pick the equipment and the page shows the payback, and every line of arithmetic behind it.

GroupMachines
EmbellishmentDDC-8000, DDC-810 PRO, DFL-700
Slit / cut / crease / perf / foldDC-618, DC-648, DC-746 B2, CF375 XPRO, CP375 DUO, DF-1300L
Die cuttingUD-320, DSM-1000 B2, DPC-400, DPC-600, DPC-2024
Cutting & binderyHC-550i, HC-680i, DBM-150, DBM-350, DBM-700i, DPB-500, DB-300

Each machine starts from the Duplo USA list price, accessory set, install & training fee and optional annual maintenance on a real quote - the quote number and date show under Investment. Discount off list takes a dealer, partner or franchise discount off the equipment (not the install).

What it is for

Showing where the payback comes from - trade work no longer bought, new work sold, setup time the ImposeIQ barcode gives back, and the prep the Automation Workflow does - rather than one big number nobody can check.

What it is not

A quotation or a tax calculation. Prices are list prices from past quotes, not an offer, and tax is a flat rate with straight-line depreciation. Volumes, trade prices and speeds are starting points.

Sales and Shop

The switch in the header keeps two separate scenarios, so flipping it in front of a customer never loses what was typed into the other one.

ModeWhere the figures come from
SalesDuplo figures for each machine and the MIS sample shop. For walking a prospect through the numbers before they own anything.
ShopThis shop's own MIS: each machine's cost center (sheets an hour, setup minutes), the jobs routed through it in the last year (jobs a year, sheets a job, the MIS sell price) and the Automation Workflow runs (jobs a year, hand prep the steps replace, average job cost). A figure read from the MIS carries an MIS tag; change it and the tag reads edited. Refresh reads the MIS again and keeps anything you edited.

The page only reads. It cannot change a rate, a job, a workflow or a run, and it is never handed artwork paths, customer contacts or workflow folders.

How the number is built

LineArithmetic, per year
Trade finishing no longer boughtsheets × share sent out × trade price, plus freight per trade job
Hand work no longer donesheets × share done by hand ÷ 100 × hand minutes per 100 sheets × wage
New work sold at the MIS pricesheets × the rest of the work × sell price per sheet
Setup recall from ImposeIQjobs × (setup minutes − setup with the barcode / job recall) × wage
Hand prep the workflow doesworkflow jobs × (hand prep − checking minutes) × prepress wage
Remakes preflight catchesworkflow jobs × drop in remake rate × average job cost
Faster quoting in the MISquotes × minutes saved per quote × estimator wage
Running costsoperator hours × wage, consumables per sheet, service contract, power (hours × kW × $/kWh), software

Where the MIS and workflows come in

The five cards under the charts follow one job through the machine being edited: the MIS cost center that prices it, the workflow that preps it, the machine reading the barcode instead of being set up by hand, the floor posting real minutes back to the job, and the payback. Proof from the MIS lists jobs that route through the selected machines, with estimated and actual minutes, what the work cost in house, and what a trade finisher would have charged.

Cash, lease & what-if

Money switches between a cash purchase (payback, NPV and IRR) and a lease (monthly payment against monthly benefit, and the month the lease turns cash positive). What if volume changes? scales every job, sheet and quote; the sensitivity table shows payback at 50% to 150%, and the note under it gives the volume a cash purchase needs to hit your target payback.

Scenarios, CSV & print

Scenarios saves the current mode under a name on this PC; the Suite backup carries them. Export CSV writes the summary, the annual bridge, each machine and every input. Print / PDF prints a clean, light proposal with an assumptions table - choose Microsoft Print to PDF to send it.

Application

ImposeIQ Maintenance

Keeps the finishing kit running, and shows what it costs to. Every machine on the floor has a plan of scheduled tasks, a history of what was done to it, its service calls and downtime, its meter, and the consumables it uses. Open it from Home → ImposeIQ Maintenance or the tray menu.

ScreenWhat it is for
OverviewWhat is overdue or due soon, open service calls, low stock, this year's cost and downtime, and a card per machine.
ScheduleEvery scheduled task, filtered by machine, kind and state. Done… records the work and restarts the clock.
MachinesThe register: model, serial, location, meter unit, service provider and contract. A this-year table of labor, parts, service and downtime per machine.
Service callsBreakdowns and technician visits, with the Duplo or dealer ticket number.
Meter readingsEach machine's current count and its history.
ConsumablesBlades, cutting sticks, feeder parts, lubricants and fluids, with stock on hand and reorder points.
Work logEverything done to every machine - scheduled or not.

Getting started

On a new install the Overview offers Add Duplo machines…. The machines switched on in Settings → Machines come ticked. Each one can be added with a starter plan (cleaning, blade and cutting-stick checks, feeder wear parts, lubrication, inspections, the annual service visit) and starter consumables with zero stock and no price.

Starter intervals are a starting point

They are not Duplo's published service schedule. Check every one against the operator manual or your Duplo technician and change it on the Schedule screen. A task still on its starter interval is marked starter until it is edited.

Take the first meter reading

The first reading on a machine is where its plan starts, so a DC with a lifetime count of 2,400,000 does not open with every task millions of sheets overdue.

Anything else - a press, a laminator, a folder - is added with + Machine. Set Duplo model on a Duplo machine so its sheets can be counted from the MIS.

Tasks & the schedule

A task has a kind (lubrication, blade / knife, feeder wear, preventive service, inspection, cleaning, other), an interval of days, a meter count, or both - whichever comes first, who usually does it, written instructions, and the parts it uses.

  • Overdue - the date has passed or the meter has reached the count.
  • Due soon - within the days set in Maintenance → Settings (7 by default), within 10% of the meter interval, or projected to reach the count within those days at the machine's recent usage.
  • A meter task is projected onto the calendar from the machine's readings over the last 90 days, so "every 100,000 sheets" on a machine doing 5,000 a day shows as about 20 days out. If the projection says the count has probably been reached, the task shows Due soon and asks for a reading rather than calling it overdue.

Done… records the date, the meter, who did it, the time taken, any other cost and notes. For a blade task it also records whether the blade or knife was replaced with new, replaced with a sharpened one, turned, or inspected; blade and feeder tasks can record how worn the old part was. The parts listed come out of stock at their current unit cost.

+ Log work records unscheduled work - a repair, a part swapped - and can be tied to an open service call. Removing a log entry puts its parts back into stock.

Meter readings

Enter the count the machine shows - sheets, cuts (guillotines), clicks, books or hours. A meter figure given when a task is marked done also counts as a reading. A reading lower than the last one is refused unless Meter was reset or the counter replaced is ticked; then every task on that machine keeps the same distance to go.

From MIS… counts good plus waste on the machine's finished MIS operations since the last reading and offers the result as a reading. It is an estimate of the meter - operations booked with no count use the estimated quantity - so check it against the machine's own counter before saving.

Service calls & downtime

A call has a severity - Machine down, Running, degraded or Routine - a status (open, tech scheduled, waiting on parts, closed), the ticket number, who was called, the tech visit date, the resolution, and labor and parts cost.

  • An open Machine down call marks the machine DOWN everywhere and raises the Machine down alert straight away.
  • Downtime is worked out from opened to closed for a Machine down call, or typed in for any call.
  • Tick Covered by the service contract / warranty and the call costs the shop nothing in the totals.

Consumables

Each item has a type, unit, part number, vendor, shelf, unit cost, the machines it is used on, a reorder at level and an order quantity. Receive adds a delivery (and can update the unit cost), Use takes some out, Count sets the on-hand figure from a shelf count. Every change is listed under Recent stock movements.

Downtime & the MIS Schedule

The MIS Schedule plans around machines Maintenance says are out, so work is not booked onto a machine that cannot run it:

In MaintenanceOn the MIS Schedule
An open Machine down call0 hours on that machine from today until the call's Expected back in service day. With no date, it blocks the number of days set in Maintenance → Settings (2 by default, counting today) and rolls forward each day until the call is closed.
A call with a Tech visit date and visit hoursThose hours come off the machine on the visit day.
Book… on a scheduled task, or + Plan downtimeThe hours booked (or the whole day) come off each day booked. A task marked done ahead of its booking gives the time back.

The planner moves work that needed that time to earlier days; a job that cannot fit before its due date shows at risk and raises the at-risk alert as usual. The grid marks those days DOWN or Svc, a banner above it lists what Maintenance has out and when, and the 1-day view says so on the machine's lane. Move to machine… marks a machine that is down that day.

A machine reaches the Schedule through its Duplo model (every cost center with that machine) or the MIS cost centers ticked on the machine - use those for presses and other non-Duplo kit. The Downtime screen shows the next four weeks and names any machine not linked yet. Nothing is written into the MIS work calendar: close the call or remove the booking and the time is back.

Alerts & backup

While the Suite is running, Maintenance checks every 30 minutes and raises four events, each routed in Settings → Notifications like every other event:

EventWhen
Maintenance coming dueOnce, when a task becomes due soon. The person named in Usually done by is also told directly if they are on the People list.
Maintenance overdueOnce more, if it goes overdue. Urgent.
Machine downWhen a call is saved as Machine down. Urgent.
Consumable at reorder pointOnce each time an item drops to its reorder point.

The records are kept on this PC in maintenance\maintenance.json in the Suite's data folder and are included in the Suite backup (Settings → Backup, ImposeIQ Maintenance). Export CSV saves the table on the current screen; Print prints it.

Application

Maskwork

The production mask studio for spot UV and foil (the app calls the foil process sleeking). Where Embellishment Studio is the sales tool — a 3D render for showing a customer what a job could look like — Maskwork is the shop-floor tool: it opens the real print-ready PDF, page by page, and builds the actual coverage masks the DuSense coater and the DFL foiler run from.

What it is for

Turning a real job's artwork into a spot UV plate, a foil plate, or both — by hand, by auto-detecting text and image elements, by importing a separation the customer already supplied, or by asking the AI advisor for a starting concept.

What it is not

A customer-facing preview. There is a 3D check built in so you can see a mask before you export it, but selling the effect is what Embellishment Studio is for.

The window

Three panels around a canvas. The left rail lists the PDF's pages as thumbnails and, for the current page, every element Maskwork's own analysis found — text runs and images, each with its size, so you can click one straight onto the mask instead of drawing around it. The right inspector holds Finish (which channel and mode you are on), Tools, Records, Preview and Output. The canvas in the middle shows the page, the mask and an adjustable overlay together, or any one of them alone.

Mode at the top switches between Spot UV and Sleeking (foil) — everything below acts on whichever mode and channel button is lit, the same idea as Embellishment Studio's per-side channels.

Finish — how the mask keys the plate

The Finish panel is where the mask stops being a shape and becomes a plate. Which controls appear depends on the mode, because spot UV and foil key completely differently.

ControlModeWhat it does
Varnish densitySpot UV0–100%, default 100%. Spot UV holds continuous tone, so artwork gradients carry through to the plate rather than being flattened to solid.
Foil thresholdSleeking0–255, default 180. Sleeking is binary — ink denser than this keys the foil and everything lighter drops out. There is no partial foil, so this one number decides the whole plate.
Choke / spreadBothDefault 0.00 mm. Negative pulls the mask inside the artwork edge, positive pushes it out. This is the press-registration allowance: a choke keeps varnish off a light background when the sheet drifts, a spread stops a hairline of bare stock showing at the edge of a foil block.
Why the two modes differ Continuous tone versus on/off is not a UI choice, it is the process. A DuSense coater lays varnish in a build ramp, so a 40% grey means a genuinely thinner build. A DFL foiler either transfers foil at a point or it does not — setting a foil plate with a density slider would promise a half-tone the machine cannot make.

Pages & elements

Open any PDF and every page gets a thumbnail; a filled dot marks a page that already carries a mask. Click a page to work on it. Its detected elements list underneath — All text and All images buttons mask every element of that kind on the page in one click, or pick individual rows from the element list to build the coverage up piece by piece.

Tools

ToolWhat it does
SelectPick an existing masked element or region to adjust or remove it.
WandClick a color or a shape on the page and let Maskwork find the matching area, the same idea as the wand in Embellishment Studio.
Rectangle / Ellipse / LassoDraw a shape by hand for coverage that does not follow the artwork's own elements.
Brush / EraserPaint or remove coverage freehand, for touching up an edge an automatic tool got close but not exact on.

Undo and Redo step through every change; Clear page empties the current page's mask on the current channel and starts again.

Importing a mask

Rather than build a mask from nothing, Import Mask brings one in from either a plate or mask PDF someone already made, or a spot color already in this artwork — the same idea as Embellishment Studio picking up a file's own named spot plate. Ignore below (default 6%) drops faint noise on the way in, so a scanned or anti-aliased plate does not key the whole sheet. A file that already carries a proper separation for the varnish or foil comes in correctly masked with no manual work at all, which is how a properly prepared job should arrive.

Records — N-up sheets & VDP

A mask is usually built once and needs to repeat: an N-up sheet has the same card several times, and a VDP merge has the same layout on every record with only the variable text changing. Maskwork detects that layout and shows it under Records; with Sync edits to every record checked (on by default), masking one card stamps the identical edit onto every other record on the sheet. Turn it off only when one specific record genuinely needs different coverage from the rest.

Concepts — the AI advisor

Before it asks, the advisor takes a short brief so the concepts come back buildable rather than generic: Stock (“16pt C2S, silk laminated”), Lamination (“matte, on the DFL-700”), Foil available (“brushed gold, rose”), Brand tone (“restrained, luxury”), and a free-text Anything the advisor must respect box for the constraints that actually decide a job — the customer will not pay for foil on the reverse, keep the coating off the QR code.

The Concepts… button sends the current page to the AI and asks for three fully-described embellishment concepts: Spot UV only, Foil only, and Raised Spot UV + foil. Each concept comes back with a customer-facing description, the regions it proposes for each channel, a recommended foil color where one applies, the percentage of the page it covers in varnish and in foil, a suggested production route, and any operator notes worth knowing before it goes further.

Nothing the AI proposes is trusted blindly: the software checks every proposed region against the page's real elements first, and shows you what it had to correct before showing you the concepts themselves — the corrections come first on purpose, because they are the part an operator actually needs to read. Apply replaces the page's current mask with a concept; Add layers it on top of what is already there. Either way the result is an ordinary mask selection once it lands — it undoes, previews and exports exactly like anything drawn by hand, because there is no separate "AI mask" path.

Note — The advisor needs the ImposeIQ desktop app's AI connection (Settings → AI) to be set up — the same shared connection Image Rescue and the rest of the suite use.

Preview

Preview in Gilder › opens the artwork with its Spot UV and foil plates in Gilder — every page, the plates added as layers in the inks SpotUV and Foil, the same file Impose › sends — so the finish can be checked catching the light before it goes to the coater, rather than trusted as a flat gray shape, and Gilder can write the embellisher's files.

Output — coverage, DPI & export

The canvas can show the Original artwork, an Overlay of the mask on top of it in an adjustable color and opacity, or the Mask only — the same three-way check Embellishment Studio's channel overlay gives you, here against the real production file.

SettingWhat it controls
DPI300, 600 or 1200 — how finely the coverage buffer is rasterized before export.
FormatPDF or TIFF.
BackgroundWhite (plate) for a file the coater reads directly, or Transparent (overlay) for checking the mask against the artwork in another application.

Export Mask writes the current channel; Both Plates writes the spot UV and foil plates one after the other in a single pass. Save and Open on a mask project (.mwk) keep work in progress separate from an exported plate, so a job can be picked back up without redoing the masking.

Utility

Spot Layers

For a customer file that arrives with no finish layers. Open the PDF and click the type, shapes, logos and pictures that should be coated or foiled: a copy of each goes onto a Spot UV or Foil layer, as the object itself, in a spot ink. Where Maskwork builds plates — including finish that is not on the artwork, like patterns and frames — Spot Layers only ever copies what is printed, and keeps it as vectors.

Picking objects

The two buttons in the header choose the layer a click puts objects on (keys 1 and 2). Hovering shows the object under the pointer and what it is.

Do thisTo
ClickPut the object on the active layer; click it again to take it off.
Double-click textTake its whole line — some programs set every letter as an object of its own.
Drag a boxAdd every object wholly inside it. Alt-drag takes them off instead.
Alt-clickReach the object underneath; Alt-click again on the same spot to go deeper.
All text / All picturesPut every text run or picture on the page on that layer.

An object can be on both layers — foil with a raised varnish over it. Each layer's list in the side panel shows what is on it for the page, with × to take one off. Undo and Redo (Ctrl+Z, Ctrl+Y) step through every change.

What goes on a layer

An object is one painting operation in the PDF: a text run, a filled or stroked shape, a picture, a placed graphic or a gradient. Its copy is drawn exactly where the original is, under the same clipping, at 100% of a SpotUV or Foil spot ink, set to overprint so the print underneath is not knocked out.

  • Type stays live type in the same font, and a shape keeps its exact outline.
  • A picture with a transparent background — a cut-out logo — is coated through its own transparency, so the coating follows its shape. Any other picture is coated as its rectangle.
  • A placed graphic (an embedded PDF or EPS) goes on whole.

The customer's artwork is not changed: with both layers turned off, the page is the page that came in. The layer and ink names are the ones the Imposer carries through imposition and Embellishment Studio reads.

Result & saving

Result renders the file as it will be saved, with checkboxes to show the artwork and each layer. On screen Spot UV shows as magenta and Foil as gold; on press each is a plate of its own. Save PDF… writes a copy named … - spot layers.pdf.

Note — Password-protected PDFs cannot be opened; ask for an unprotected copy.
Application

Workflow Automation

The part of the suite that runs jobs without you. A workflow is a trigger — how work arrives — followed by a list of steps that run in order on every job. Drop a file in a hot folder, or let a customer post one in over the web, and the job is checked, imposed, numbered, approved, delivered and logged while you are doing something else.

34 steps, 8 groups

Preflight and routing, the real ImposeIQ apps, imposition and marks, page surgery, people and approvals, and delivery to folders, FTP, cloud storage or a Fiery.

26 worked examples

Every scenario below ships as a ready-made workflow you can import and edit — Settings → Import an example…

How it works

The Workflows window. Saved workflows down the left with their trigger and step count, the selected workflow’s ordered steps in the middle — each with a one-line description, an enable tick and reorder arrows — and the live Activity list on the right. Underneath the steps, <em>When something goes wrong</em> sets the folder problem files go to and whether the workflow switches itself off after a failure.
The Workflows window. Saved workflows down the left with their trigger and step count, the selected workflow’s ordered steps in the middle — each with a one-line description, an enable tick and reorder arrows — and the live Activity list on the right. Underneath the steps, When something goes wrong sets the folder problem files go to and whether the workflow switches itself off after a failure.

A job is a set of files traveling through the step list together. Each step can change the files, add job variables, or decide the job should stop. Nothing is destructive: the engine works on copies in a temp folder and only writes where an Output, Upload or Send step tells it to.

Job variables are the glue. A step that learns something — preflight pass/fail, the AI's answer, a database column, a job number read off the artwork, the Fiery's status — writes it as [var.NAME], and any later step can use it in a filename, an email, or a Route decision.

Note — Everything survives a restart. Jobs waiting on approval, watch folders, poll timers and the activity log are all on disk, so closing the app or rebooting the PC does not lose a job mid-flight.

Triggers — how jobs arrive

A run paused at a safe checkpoint. The counters show what is done, what is left and what failed or needs a look, and the activity log underneath says what the engine was doing when it stopped.
A run paused at a safe checkpoint. The counters show what is done, what is left and what failed or needs a look, and the activity log underneath says what the engine was doing when it stopped.
TriggerWhat it does
ManualYou pick the files and press Run now…. Good for testing a workflow before you let it loose.
Watch folderAnything dropped into the folder runs automatically. Set the file types, whether sub-folders count, and whether several files arriving together are one job or many.
Incoming API / webhookAnother system — a web-to-print store, an MIS — POSTs the job in. The editor shows you the exact address to give them.
FTP / SFTPPolls a remote folder on a schedule: a customer pickup site, an off-site RIP, a partner. Downloads, then optionally deletes.
Cloud storagePolls a Google Drive, Box or SharePoint/OneDrive folder — no mapped network drive and no VPN. Connect the account once in Settings, then browse to the folder.
Tip — A watch folder can be protected, which marks it with a distinctive icon and stops it being used by two workflows at once. Grouping matters too: leave grouping off and ten files dropped together become ten jobs; turn it on and they become one job with ten files, which is what you want for a set that must stay together.
Note — A fourth way in: ImposeIQ Storefront hands a customer's order straight to a published workflow, artwork and job ticket together, and the run reports its outcome back onto the order. Those jobs arrive with the trigger storefront-order.

The step library

Steps are grouped by what they do. Add them in any order — the list runs top to bottom.

GroupSteps
ImposeIQ appsPreflight · Impose + OMR · Book · Image Rescue — these hand the job to your real applications rather than reimplementing them.
CheckPreflight check · Route / decide · Ask the AI · Extract PDF attachment · Read job number / instructions from PDF · Job ticket information · Extract metadata from PDF · Look up in database · Write result to database.
ImposeImpose N-up · Booklet imposition (2-up) · Copies · Sequential numbering / Bates stamp · Add marks / barcode / slug · Add color bar · Shrinkage compensation.
PagesMerge PDFs · Split PDF · Split page into tiles · Rotate pages · Duplicate pages · Add bleed · Time to reorder card · End of job card · Job split card.
FilesRename files · Tag filename (File Name Tagger codes + job ticket) · Tag PDF metadata · Images to PDF.
PeopleWait for approval · Notify the shop · Tell the customer · Send to Zapier.
OutputSend to folder · Upload to FTP / SFTP · Send to cloud storage · Submit to Fiery.
AdvancedRun a program — hand each file to an external tool or script.

Using your real apps

The three ImposeIQ apps steps run the actual Imposer, VDP and preflight engines — the same code paths, the same templates, the same Duplo OMR marks — not a copy. Point Impose + OMR at one of your saved Imposer templates and the workflow produces exactly what the app produces, including the cutter XML.

Tip — Impose + OMR can take the template name from the filename. Name the file Acme_BC21.pdf, set the separator, and one hot folder handles every product you have a template for. Example 04 is set up this way.

Book step (ImposeIQ Book)

Runs a template saved in ImposeIQ Book in a hidden Book window, so a hot folder produces exactly what the Book app does. Anything left on Same as the template comes from the template; the step only overrides what you set.

  • Saddle stitch — nested (sheets per signature 0) or gathered signatures, creep and DC marks. With Separate cover the cover sheet comes out as name_book_Cover.pdf and the text as name_book_Text.pdf, so each can run on its own stock. Outside only prints the inside covers blank and leaves pages 2 and second-to-last in the text.
  • Perfect bound — the gathered text block, plus name_Cover.pdf with the spine worked out from the page count and the body stock (a measured caliper beats PPI, which beats the table), and the cover crease job(s) for the PC Controller — two files when there is no up-crease module.
  • Cover file — drop the text and the cover together (turn on Group files on the trigger). The PDF with cover in its name becomes the artwork: one wide page is used as the whole flat wrap, otherwise page 1 is the front and the last page the back.
  • Job variables for later steps: [var.bookPages], [var.bookSheets], [var.spineIn], [var.spineMm], [var.coverWidthIn], [var.coverHeightIn], [var.coverPasses].
Tip — Examples 28 (saddle stitch, separate cover), 29 (perfect bound with spine check) and 30 (Image Rescue, then Book with the template from the file name) are ready to copy.

Image Rescue step

Finds the pictures in a PDF that are under the target dpi at the size they are placed, rebuilds them in place and writes name_rescued.pdf. Text, vectors and boxes are untouched. Images too small to rescue well are refused and counted in [var.rescueRefused] — follow it with a Route step to send those jobs back for new art.

Note — The plain Preflight check and Impose N-up steps exist for shops that do not have the matching app installed. They set the same job variables, so a Route step behaves identically whichever you use.

Preflight templates

The Preflight (ImposeIQ app) step does not carry a long list of tick-boxes. It takes one template — a saved, named set of rules — from the Preflight profile dropdown, so the same standard can be reused across every workflow and changed in one place. Three templates are built in and always present:

TemplateWhat it checksWhen to use it
Standard check
the default
The file opens and parses, and is not encrypted or password-protected. General intake. Deliberately light — it catches the files nothing downstream can open, and lets ordinary customer artwork through.
Print ready Not encrypted · all fonts embedded · page boxes consistent across every page and correctly nested (Trim inside Bleed inside Media). Jobs going straight to press with no prepress touch. Expect it to divert files that rely on base-14 fonts or mix page sizes.
Duplo finishing Not encrypted · no page rotation · MediaBox starting at 0,0 · boxes consistent and correctly nested. Anything that will be slit, cut or creased. A rotated page or an off-origin MediaBox is the usual reason a DC cut lands in the wrong place.
Note — Templates are cumulative rule sets, not severity levels. Duplo finishing is not "stricter than" Print ready; it checks geometry the cutter cares about and says nothing about fonts. A shop that needs both saves a custom template with all of it.

Your own templates. Anything you save appears in the same dropdown underneath the three built-ins, and is stored in preflight-profiles.json alongside the rest of the automation settings — so it travels with a Backup & Restore file. A custom template can draw on any rule the engine implements:

Rule groupRules
File integrityNot encrypted · document ID present in the trailer · no embedded or externally referenced files · Trapped stated as True or False · allowed compression filters (Flate, DCT, CCITT by default).
GeometryNo page rotation · MediaBox at 0,0 · CropBox matches MediaBox · boxes consistent across pages · box nesting · every page has a MediaBox and either an ArtBox or a TrimBox.
FontsOnly embedded fonts · no partially subsetted fonts.
Color & contentNo RGB images · no grayscale images · no spot (Separation/DeviceN) images · no transparency groups · no private application data.
PDF/XExactly one GTS_PDFX output intent · that output intent carries OutputConditionIdentifier and Info.
Whole fileRequired page count · maximum PDF version.
What it does not check — This engine reads the PDF's structure, not its painted content. Effective image resolution, ink density, registration black, actual bleed coverage, and the color of vector or text objects need the content stream interpreted and are outside its scope. Only declared image color spaces are tested.

Color policy sits on the step, not the template. Three settings are layered on top of whichever template you pick, so one template can serve accounts with different color standards:

  • Required rendering intent — relative colorimetric, perceptual, saturation or absolute colorimetric. A file that declares no intent passes; the RIP then applies its own default.
  • Flag files that mix rendering intents — one intent on the images and another in the graphics state is a common reason a proof does not match press.
  • Flag absolute colorimetric — it simulates the source paper white and usually prints with an unexpected cast.

Whatever the file declares is written to [var.renderingIntents] and logged, enforced or not.

When a file fails, the step either flags it and keeps going — the normal choice, so a Route step can divert it to a hold folder or an email — or stops the job outright. Either way it sets [var.preflightPassed], [var.preflightErrors] and [var.preflightErrorCount]. Carry forward any repaired files the app returns lets Preflight Repair's corrected file continue down the step list in place of the original.

Reading the job — preflight, AI, tickets & databases

Before a job can be routed it has to be understood. These steps are how a workflow finds out what it is holding.

StepWhat it is for
Preflight checkValidates incoming PDFs against your rules and sets pass/fail so a Route step can divert the bad ones. Profiles cover readability, embedded fonts, box geometry and color.
Ask the AIShows the job to a model and makes it pick one of your answers — business cards, postcards, booklet — and stores it for a Route step. The classic use is one hot folder that sorts itself.
Extract PDF attachmentPulls a file embedded inside an incoming PDF — a CSV or Excel data file, an XML or JSON job ticket — works out which format it is, and stores it so a Route step can send each format down its own path.
Read job number / instructions from PDFWhen the filename doesn't carry the job number, reads it off the artwork: the PDF's own text layer, or OCR for a scanned or flattened ticket. You supply a pattern; it stores the job number and any production notes.
Extract metadata from PDFReads everything the file says about itself — Title, Producer, custom Info keys a customer's MIS wrote, XMP properties, page count and trim size — into job variables. See Reading a PDF's own metadata.
Job ticket informationAttaches the commercial half of the job — customer name and number, contact, job number, PO, quantity, sets, due date, priority, stock, finished size, finishing, sales rep, cost center and a note — to the job, so every later step can route, name, email and bill by it. See Job tickets & filename tagging.
Look up in databaseRuns a SELECT against your shop database and drops the columns into job variables — the customer's preset, discount or spec, fetched by job number.
Write result to databaseRecords what happened — status, quantity, delivered file, Fiery result — back into the database with an INSERT or UPDATE, optionally only when the job passed, failed, was approved or rejected.

Route / decide is what acts on all of it. Look at the filename, the page count, the file size or any job variable; test it with is / is not / contains / starts with / ends with / greater than / less than / matches a pattern; then continue, stop, or divert the files to a folder with an optional .txt report explaining why.

Decision tree → route to workflow is the one-hot-folder version: one workflow takes everything in, and hands each file to the workflow that should process it. The step measures the file itself — the trim size name (Business card, Postcard 4x6, Letter, A4, Tabloid, 13x19…), width and height, orientation, page count, mixed page sizes, the spot colour names in the PDF, the file name, type and size — and can also look at any job variable, such as the AI's answer or the customer.

  • Questions and branches. Each question looks at one thing; its branches test it (is, is about ± tolerance, at least, between 4 - 8, one of, contains, matches a pattern…). Branches are tried top to bottom and the first match wins; Otherwise catches the rest.
  • What a branch does. Hand it to workflow, Ask another question (a nested question — e.g. Letter size → How many pages? → 8 or more → Booklets), Move it to a folder, Carry on with this workflow or Stop.
  • Test with a file… under the tree measures a sample file and shows the route it would take, without moving or running anything.
  • The target workflow gets its own copy of the file and runs straight away, even if it is switched off — a target usually has a Manual trigger and is only ever fed by the router. The route taken is stored as [var.route], with [var.sizeName], [var.pageCount] and [var.routedFrom] passed along. The router's own Remove the original setting decides what happens to the incoming file.
  • A branch that hands the file back to the same workflow, or a chain of more than five hand-offs, fails the job rather than looping. A branch with no workflow or folder chosen, or pointing at a deleted workflow, stops the router being switched on or run until it is fixed.
Barcodes — Read job number reads printed text, including by OCR. It does not decode 1D/2D barcode symbols. If your tickets carry the number only as a barcode, put it on the ticket as text as well.

Imposition, marks & press compensation

StepWhat it does
Duplicate pagesRepeats pages inside the artwork, before imposition. Choose every page, the first or last, odd or even, or a list such as 1, 3-5, last; set how many copies (counting the original, so 2 makes one duplicate), or read the number from a job variable. Each page followed by its copies gives 1, 1, 2, 2; Complete sets gives 1, 2, 1, 2 — and with only some pages chosen, the extra sets hold just those pages. Typical uses: a one-sided business card made into a front and a back (first page, 2 copies), or a form printed twice. A listed page that is not in the file fails the job unless the step is set to ignore it, and a file that would pass the page limit is refused before anything is written. Not the same as Copies — quantity to sheets, which repeats the whole imposed document to fill an order. Two-sided cards is set to match the job: a two-page file is a front and its back, so each front is copied with its back (front, back, front, back) and Impose N-up can put every back behind its front. Choose Every page is its own piece if your two pages are two different one-sided cards.
Copies — quantity to sheetsTurns an order quantity into a sheet count: 500 cards at 21-up becomes 24 sheets. It reads pieces-per-sheet from the imposition, so a template on manual grid reports it and one on auto-fit cannot.
Sequential numbering / Bates stampA running number on every page, every file, or every individual piece on an imposed sheet — raffle tickets, certificates, security-numbered forms, Bates-stamped legal sets.
Booklet imposition (2-up)Saddle stitch or cut-and-stack, with bleed handled correctly at the fold and the artwork rotated rather than the sheet.
Add marks / barcode / slugRegistration mark, barcode and job slug so a Duplo cutter or slitter can register and identify the sheet.
Add color barA CMYK control bar of square patches in the sheet margin — solids, tints, overprints and gray balance in real DeviceCMYK. It reads what is already printed along that edge and fits the patches around OMR and camera marks, barcodes, QR codes, slug text and fold guides, never over them; if space is short the squares get smaller, and any patch that still does not fit is left off with a warning in the job log. Put it after the Impose step: that is what tells it where the pieces are.
Shrinkage compensationImages the sheet slightly larger so it lands on size after fusing, with separate feed and cross-feed values per media.
Time to reorder cardInserts a reorder reminder the same size as the artwork — your details, phone, email and a QR code inside a distinctive border. The card is made to the size the artwork shows (its crop, turned the way the page is turned), so artwork cropped to the card on a larger sheet, or saved sideways, still gets a card that matches, with the same trim and bleed boxes as the artwork. On a two-sided job the card goes on both sides: Sides of the card is set to match the job, so a two-page file (a front and a back), or one the Copies step marked as duplex, gets a front page and a back page for every card, and the pages after it stay in step. Choose One side if your two pages are two different single-sided cards, or Two sides to force it; What goes on the back can be the same card or a blank back. A file of four or more pages is left one-sided unless you say otherwise, because only the shop knows whether it is a booklet or several cards. After Impose N-up it goes into the run as one card (front and back on a two-sided job) where the share of the run is left, and the job is laid up again exactly as before — the same layout, cut & stack order and crop marks — so it is still one piece of the right size in the right place. When no quantity is given the number of cards in the run is used. Two-sided jobs in Impose N-up: its Sides setting matches the job, so a front-and-back card is laid up with every front sheet followed by its back sheet and each back in the mirrored cell behind its front (turning on the long edge, or the short edge if you choose).
End of job cardCloses the run with a card the size of the job, so the end of every job is plain in the stack: a dark band with END OF JOB and the job number, the job name, customer, quantity and size, stock, PO and due date, finishing, how it was imposed (layout, sheet, one- or two-sided), when it was finished and by which workflow, a note for the packer, and a Code 128 (or QR) barcode of the job number to scan the job closed. Every detail fills itself in when its box is left empty — from the MIS job, then the Job ticket information step, then the file name and the run itself — and any box can be typed over, tokens included. A band runs off the leading edge so the card shows at the side of the stack. It can also be a start card, or both. Put it after Impose N-up: it goes in as one piece (with its back on a two-sided job) at the very end of the run, and the job is laid up again the same way — on DC Series cut & stack that is the bottom of the last pile.
Job split cardA card every N pieces, so the finished stack splits into counted bundles: BUNDLE 3 of 8, the pieces it covers (501–750), the job number with a barcode, the job name and customer, at the size of the job with a colored band down both edges so each card shows at the side of the stack. Put it after Impose N-up: the cards go into the run and the job is laid up again. With HC or DC cut & stack every bundle is N pieces of the run; with step & repeat every pile splits into bundles of N. A sequential layout is refused, because its piles do not come off the cutter in run order.

DC-746 and DC-746 B2 JDF workflows

Two examples in the library drop a PDF in a hot folder and leave the imposed PDF and its JDF in Ready, ready for the JDF Console:

ExampleTemplateWhat it makes
48, DC-746 JDFDC-746 JDF 320x460A 320 × 460 mm sheet for the DC-746, with the job ID in the QR and the DC-ST100 in the ticket.
49, DC-746 B2 JDFDC-746 B2 JDFA 500 × 707 mm B2 sheet of equal DC-20000 cut sheets, each a DC-746 sheet with its own REG mark, barcode and QR. Hot folders are under C:\ImposeIQ\Hot\DC-746 B2 JDF.

Both take the piece size from each PDF. Both are saved switched off, so check the folders and turn them on.

  • Your own B2 template: in the Imposer pick DC-746 B2, the sheet and the cut sheets, tick the QR, QR job ID and White space boxes, save it, and choose it in the Impose + OMR step. Cut sheet count and lengths are saved with it.
  • Unequal cut sheets are one DC-746 JOB each, so the step returns one XML each, and Convert JDF ↔ DC job XML writes one JDF each with [jobname] ending in JOB A, JOB B. Set each cut position on the DC-20000 yourself.
  • Convert JDF ↔ DC job XML: [jobname] in Name it is the job name inside the file, which is the JobID the QR holds. The job finishes on a DC-ST100 stacker names it in the ticket. Write the converted file to keeps the JDF in that folder, out of the way of a later Send to folder step. Leave it empty to carry the JDF on with the job.
  • Finishing check: put it after the Impose step and before Send to folder, because nothing runs after the job has been sent on. On a B2 job it judges JOB A’s cut sheet as the DC-746 sees it. List DC-746 as the finisher.
  • One folder, one workflow: two switched-on workflows watching the same folder each take the file, so a drop makes two PDFs. Saving a workflow warns you when another one watches its folder.
  • Jobs run one at a time through the hidden Imposer window, so overlapping drops cannot mix their settings. A big batch queues rather than running side by side.

Reading a PDF's own metadata

Three steps read a job, and it is worth being clear about which reads what, because they sound alike:

StepReads
Read job number / instructionsWhat is printed on the page — the text layer, or OCR for a scan.
Tag PDF metadata (read)Our tag, and nothing else.
Extract metadata from PDFWhatever is actually in the file, whoever put it there.

The last one exists because the useful metadata is usually somebody else's. A customer's MIS writes the order number into a custom Info key. The designer's Title carries the product name. The Producer tells you which RIP has already been through it. The trim box tells you the finished size without anyone typing it. None of that is in our vocabulary, so none of the other steps will find it. It never modifies the file.

What it sets

Everything lands as job variables under a prefix you choose — meta_ by default:

VariableWhat it holds
[var.meta_title] [var.meta_author] [var.meta_subject] [var.meta_keywords]The standard fields.
[var.meta_creator] [var.meta_producer]What made the file, and what last wrote it. Creator is usually the design app, Producer the RIP or distiller — the pair tells you a lot about what has already happened to a job.
[var.meta_created] [var.meta_modified]Dates, as 2026-09-01 10:30.
[var.meta_pages] [var.meta_width] [var.meta_height] [var.meta_size] [var.meta_orientation]Page count and media size, in inches, millimeters or points — your choice.
[var.meta_trimWidth] [var.meta_trimHeight] [var.meta_hasTrimBox] [var.meta_bleed]The finished size and the bleed allowance, worked out from the boxes. hasTrimBox is no when the trim box just matches the media box, which usually means the designer never set one.
[var.meta_uniformPageSize] [var.meta_rotation] [var.meta_pdfVersion] [var.meta_encrypted] [var.meta_fileSize]The facts an imposition or a preflight decision turns on.
[var.meta_info_KeyName]One per custom Info key. A customer MIS writing OrderID gives you [var.meta_info_OrderID].
[var.meta_xmp_ns_name]One per XMP property — [var.meta_xmp_dc_title], [var.meta_xmp_xmp_CreatorTool].
[var.meta_tagFound] [var.meta_tagSource] [var.meta_tagMarks]Whether the file carries our own tag, and from which carrier. When it does, the ticket also arrives as the usual [var.ticket_*] variables.
Start with everything, then narrow — leave What to read on Everything and List everything found in the log ticked, run one real customer file through, and read the log. It prints every variable and its value. That is how you find out what your customers' files actually carry, which is never quite what you expect. Then switch to Only the specific ones I list — Info:OrderID, XMP:dc:title — and turn the log off.

Fail this step unless these are set is the guard rail. Name the variables a later step depends on — info_OrderID, say — and a file that does not carry one stops here with a clear message, rather than being filed into a folder called [var.meta_info_OrderID] that does not exist.

Malformed XMP does not fail the step. Packets in the wild are frequently broken, and a strict parser would take the whole job down over a stray ampersand in somebody's copyright line. It reads what it can and skips what it cannot — which is the right behavior for a step whose entire job is "tell me what is in here".

Job tickets & filename tagging

Two steps bring the File Name Tagger's vocabulary into a workflow. They use the same encoder the File Name Tagger utility uses, byte for byte, so a name a workflow writes decodes in the mark applier, in a DC hot folder and in another workflow — and the other way round.

StepWhat it does
Job ticket information
Check
Sets the customer, quantity, PO, due date and the rest as job variables. It touches no file. Every field accepts tokens, so a value can be typed literally, pulled from an earlier step ([var.db_CustomerName]), or built from both.
Tag filename
Files
Writes the mark codes and the ticket into the filename. All nine flags, all nineteen value codes, any of the three bracket styles, and every value token-expandable.
Tag PDF metadata
Files
Writes the same tag inside the PDF instead — XMP and the Info dictionary — leaving the name alone. Also reads a tag back, or strips one. See Metadata Tagger → In a workflow.

Keeping them apart is deliberate: a workflow can collect ticket data without renaming anything, or rename using ticket data that came from a database lookup rather than from the step.

Where the ticket comes from

Job ticket information reads any ticket the incoming filename already carries first, then lets your typed fields override it. So a file the File Name Tagger stamped in the shop arrives with customer and rep already set and the workflow only has to top up what it knows. Turn that off if you want the step's own fields to be the only source.

Once set, the values are available to every later step as tokens:

TokenUse it in
[var.ticket_customerName]An output folder per customer — Send to folder creates it.
[var.ticket_quantity]The Copies step, or the body of a customer email.
[var.ticket_jobNumber]A database write-back key, or the subject line of an approval request.
[var.ticket_dueDate]A Route test that pushes anything due today down a rush path.
[var.ticketSummary]One readable line — Acme Printing · #4471 · 2500 · due 2026-09-01 — for a notification.

There is one token per ticket field, named [var.ticket_ plus the field name from the job ticket table. Rename files and Send to folder accept them like any other token.

Tagging the name

Tag filename builds the name from three parts: a job name pattern ([name] is the incoming name with any existing groups already stripped, so re-tagging replaces rather than stacks), the mark codes, and the job ticket — which it takes from the job by default, or from its own fields, or leaves off entirely.

  • A blank value field leaves that code out of the name, which tells the machine to keep whatever it is already set to. It does not write a zero.
  • Keep codes the file already carries starts from the incoming tag and changes only what you fill in — useful when the workflow only needs to add an end mark to a file the shop tagged.
  • A value outside the range the machine accepts is reported in the log and left out, rather than sent on to a cutter that will reject the sheet.
A typical shape — Read job number from PDF → Look up in database (customer, quantity, due date by job number) → Job ticket information (map the database columns onto ticket fields) → Impose + OMR → Tag filename → Send to folder at [var.ticket_customerName]. The file lands in the customer's folder carrying its own cutter settings and its own ticket.

Approvals, notifications & the customer

An approval step’s settings: what the approver is being asked to confirm, the instructions they see, and how the request reaches them — desktop notification, phone push with its own priority, real Approve and Reject buttons, email, or a Slack channel.
An approval step’s settings: what the approver is being asked to confirm, the instructions they see, and how the request reaches them — desktop notification, phone push with its own priority, real Approve and Reject buttons, email, or a Slack channel.

Wait for approval parks the job until a human says yes. The files stay put and survive closing the app. It can raise the request on any combination of channels at once:

ChannelNotes
Desktop notificationA toast on the shop PC.
Phone pushPushover when it is set up in Workflows, with a priority you set — including emergency, which repeats until acknowledged. With no Pushover it falls back to whatever Settings → Text messaging is set to, so Telegram or ntfy covers approvals for nothing. The priority setting is Pushover's alone; the others send at their own.
EmailTo anyone you name.
Slack / Microsoft TeamsPosts the request into a channel with Approve, Reject and Open job buttons. Clicking one resolves the hold directly — no bot to install and no interactivity endpoint to host.
TelegramApprove, Reject and Open job as a real inline keyboard on the phone — tap one and the hold is resolved. This is the one to pick. Set Telegram up once in Settings → Text messaging and choose it under Send approvals via on the step. ImposeIQ collects the tap from Telegram, so this PC has to be on and ImposeIQ open (or the Workflows service running). If tapping does nothing, use Test approval buttons on the Telegram card. It sends a test message and tells you whether your tap arrived. If it didn't, it tells you why: usually another tool such as Zapier or n8n has set a webhook on the same bot (Let ImposeIQ take the bot removes it), or another PC is using the same bot.
Other text methodsThe same step can send on ntfy, Twilio or Zapier instead, but none of them give you a dependable button: ntfy's notification actions do not reliably carry an approval through, and Twilio and Zapier have no button at all — they get the links written into the message. Use them for the alert, not the decision.

A rejected job can be moved straight to a folder you nominate. The other three people-facing steps are Notify the shop (your own team), Tell the customer (received, proofing or ready — the address looked up from the filename with a fallback so nothing goes unsent), and Send to Zapier, which pushes the job on to Sheets, Slack, QuickBooks, an MIS, or anything else Zapier reaches.

Note — The Slack and Teams buttons are signed links served by ImposeIQ itself. Set the port and whether they answer on this PC only or across the LAN under Settings → Approval links; the shop floor needs to be able to reach that address for the buttons to work.

Delivery — folders, FTP, cloud & Fiery

StepWhere it sends
Send to folderA destination folder, with dated sub-folders and copy / move / unique-name handling. Normally the last step.
Upload to FTP / SFTPA remote server — customer pickup, off-site RIP, partner.
Send to cloud storageGoogle Drive, Box or SharePoint/OneDrive, using an account you connected once in Settings.
Submit to FieryStraight onto a Fiery print server over the Fiery API — not a hot folder. Send it to the hold list, process and hold (RIP, ready to print) or print, with a copy count and a job title (by default the MIS job number and file name, so the operator can tell whose job it is in Command WorkStation). It can wait until the Fiery says the job printed (or processed) or failed, and stores the result in [var.fieryStatus] and the Fiery job ids in [var.fieryJobIds].

Sending from the Imposer. After Generate Imposed PDF, Send to Fiery… sends that PDF to any Fiery set up here. It starts on the hold list; Print now asks first. When the Imposer is linked to an MIS job, the job’s history records where it went.

Setting up a Fiery — Settings → Fiery servers → Connect with: Fiery API. You need the Fiery’s address (the one Command WorkStation uses), its username and password, and a Fiery API key from EFI (fiery.com → Fiery API → Request a license key; there is a trial key too). The API version (v5, v4 or v3) is found on its own. Press Test: it signs in and reads the job list, so a wrong key or password shows up there rather than in the middle of a job. Custom paths is only for servers set up before this mode existed.

Connections & settings

Everything a step needs to reach the outside world is set up once under ⚙ Settings and referenced by name afterwards — so an exported workflow never carries a password.

PanelWhat it holds
Customers · Shop detailsYour details for slugs and reorder cards; the customer list used by Tell the customer.
Media & shrinkagePer-stock feed and cross-feed compensation values.
Email setupSMTP server for approvals and customer mail.
PushoverApplication token and user key for phone push.
AIProvider and API key — Anthropic, OpenAI, xAI (Grok), Google (Gemini), OpenRouter, or a local Ollama on your own network. Leave it empty and Workflows uses the suite-wide AI from the Home screen (Settings → AI); fill it in only to give this PC a different provider or model.
ZapierNamed Zap catch-hook URLs.
Slack · Microsoft TeamsNamed channel webhooks for approval requests.
Approval linksPort and reach for the Approve / Reject buttons.
Cloud storageGoogle Drive, Box and SharePoint/OneDrive accounts, connected by signing in through your normal browser.
Fiery serversAddress, username, password and Fiery API key per press. Shared with the Imposer’s Send to Fiery.
Database connectionsConnection strings for the lookup and writeback steps.
OCRThe key used to read scanned job tickets.
Activity log · Backup & restoreWhat ran and when; a full backup of workflows and settings, restorable by merge or replace.
Password & lockingLocks settings and workflow editing behind a password so the shop floor can run jobs without changing them.
One AI for the whole suite — The Home screen's Settings → AI holds a single provider, key and model that every app can use: which apps are allowed, how long an answer may be, how much creativity to allow, how long to wait, and whether file names and job details may appear in a prompt at all. Artwork is never uploaded. The key is encrypted by Windows and is never shown again — not to you, and not to any app window. Workflows keeps its own panel above as an override for a shop-floor PC that needs a different model.
Tip — Every connection panel has a Test button. Use it. Proving the SMTP server, the Fiery, the database or the Slack channel works takes ten seconds and saves finding out at two in the morning when a job silently fails to deliver.
Credentials — Passwords, API keys and connection strings are encrypted with Windows' own credential protection and never leave the PC. Steps reference a connection by its name, so workflows can be exported and shared safely.

The example library

Twenty-seven complete workflows ship with the app — Settings → Import an example…. They are the fastest way to learn the editor: import one, look at how it is built, and change it into what you actually need.

ThemeExamples
Core productionBusiness cards 21-up · booklet prep · orchestrating the real ImposeIQ apps · VDP mailer · images to press.
Page workAdd bleed then impose · saddle stitch · scanned tabloid rotate + split · split for delivery · copies with a reorder card · raffle-ticket numbering.
Press & qualityShrinkage-compensated cards · press-check color bar · legacy tool handoff.
IntakeCustomer FTP intake · web-to-print order by webhook · Google Drive intake to Fiery · PDF-attachment dispatch by format · customer PDF metadata intake.
People & systemsCustomer updates + press approval · Slack/Teams press approval · Zapier job tracking · deliver to SharePoint · database preset lookup · OCR job-number recovery.
AIOne hot folder where the AI decides the product and picks the template.

Worked example: business cards, 21-up

The shape of a typical production workflow, start to finish:

Trigger — watch folder. C:\ImposeIQ\Hot\BusinessCards\In, PDFs only, one file = one job.
Preflight. The real ImposeIQ preflight app with your Print ready profile. Sets pass/fail.
Route. If preflight did not pass, divert to Problem with a report and stop. Everything after this line only sees good files.
Impose + OMR. Your 21-up business card template, complete with the Duplo marks and cutter XML.
Copies. Turns the ordered quantity into the right number of sheets.
Approval. Posts to the press-floor Slack channel with Approve / Reject buttons, and pushes to your phone. The job waits here — safely — until someone answers.
Send to folder. Moves the approved sheets to Ready in a dated sub-folder.
Notify + write back. A toast for the shop, and an UPDATE into the database recording the job as delivered.

Worked example: filing a job from what the PDF already says

Example 27 in the library. A customer's system exports PDFs with the order number already inside them, and nobody in your shop should have to retype it:

Trigger — watch folder. C:\ImposeIQ\Hot\Intake\In, PDFs only.
Extract metadata from PDF. Everything, in inches, listed in the log. The order number arrives as [var.meta_info_OrderID], the finished size as [var.meta_trimWidth] × [var.meta_trimHeight].
Route — has a trim box? No trim box means the designer never set the finished size, so the file goes to NoTrimBox with a report rather than being guessed at.
Route — does the order number look right? Anything whose OrderID does not start SO- goes to NoOrderNumber. Two cheap tests, and everything after this line is known-good.
Look up in database. The order number fetches the customer, the quantity and the due date.
Job ticket information. Maps it all onto the ticket — job number from the PDF's own metadata, customer and quantity from the database, finished size from the trim box.
Tag PDF metadata. Writes our marks and the completed ticket back into the file, alongside the customer's own keys, which are left untouched.
Rename and file. SO-88213_Bravo_Menu.pdf, into a folder named for the customer.
Notify. A toast carrying the order number, the trim size, the page count and what the file was designed in.
Nothing was typed. The order number came from the customer's MIS, the finished size from the artwork's own boxes, and the customer name from your database — all keyed off one custom Info field the exporting system already writes.
✨ Build with AI — The button at the top of the workflow editor. Describe the job the way you would to a new hire — “watch a hot folder for business cards, preflight them, impose 21-up on 13 × 19 with Duplo cut marks, drop them on the press folder” — and the assistant asks whatever it still needs, then builds the trigger and the steps for you. It uses the provider and key from Settings → AI, and sends only what you type plus the list of steps this copy of ImposeIQ has — no artwork, no customer data. Nothing is saved until you look it over and press Save.
🔍 Check this workflow — In the same window, this button has the AI look over the workflow open in the editor for mistakes: settings that are wrong or out of range, steps in an order that cannot work, a step that is not connected on this PC, a layout your finisher cannot run. ImposeIQ runs its own checks first and hands them to the AI, then shows what was wrong and exactly what the fix changes — worked out by ImposeIQ itself by comparing the two versions. Press Use these fixes to load them into the editor; nothing is saved until you press Save. The workflow's settings are sent to your AI provider for this, but never its passwords or keys, and those are kept exactly as they were.
Tip — Build it with a Manual trigger first and use Run now… with a couple of real files. When it does what you want, switch the trigger to the watch folder. That one habit prevents most of the mess a new workflow can make.
Application

Paper Dummy

The sheet of paper you fold and number by hand to work out an imposition, done on screen. Say how the sheet is cut, folded and stacked, and the page on every panel follows. Open an imposed PDF and the same fold shows whether its pages land in the right order and the right way up.

Folding the sheet

Point at the sheet in the Fold view. A line shows the nearest fold position (1/2, 1/3, 2/3, 1/4 or 3/4 of the paper as it now lies) and the side you are on is tinted: that side moves.

Do thisTo
ClickFold the tinted side over the rest.
Alt-clickFold it behind the rest.
Cut, then clickCut the paper into two pieces. The next folds apply to every piece.
Stack piecesLay the cut pieces on each other, first or last on top, so they fold together.
Turn overTurn the paper over without folding it.
Drag, wheelTurn the view and zoom. Right-drag moves it. Underneath looks at the other side.

The buttons do the same at a position you choose, including a position in inches for a short panel. The slider under the view runs the folds back and forward, and Unfold all, Undo and the × on a step take steps away. Schemes you use often can be named and kept on this PC.

How the pages are numbered

Going through the folded stack from the outside, each panel gives two faces in a row, and those are the pages in order. Under The finished piece set which edge is the head and which is the spine: together they decide which face is page 1. The last fold's crease is offered as the spine.

The Flat sheet view shows both sides with the page each panel should carry. The number has a chevron pointing at the head of the page. The back is drawn as the file shows it: after the sheet has gone over its turn or tumble edge.

For a job on several sheets, choose whether each follows the last (gathered) or they go inside each other (saddle stitch, or sections). Cut pieces can carry on the sequence or be copies of the same pages.

The card also says which edges still have folds to trim open and whether the spine fold holds every leaf.

Checking an imposed PDF

Open imposed PDF takes pages in pairs, front then back, and shows one sheet at a time, so a large file is not read further than the sheet on screen. Set the fold area when the sheet has marks outside the folded area: the whole page, the file's TrimBox, or a size centred on the page.

Each panel's text is read for its direction and for a page number: a number alone on its line near an edge, or set very large. A green number is the right page the right way up. A red one has its reason in the side panel.

ButtonWhat it does
Work out head and spineTries every head, spine, turn or tumble and turned-over start on the first four sheets and sets the best fit, saying how many pages matched. It can only find the best fit for the fold you gave it, so read the count.
Check all sheetsReads every sheet and lists every wrong page, with a bar showing how far it has got and a Stop button.
Read throughShows the panels in order, each cut out and turned as the fold leaves it. A page that should not be there, or is upside down, is plain to see.

Text in a picture, outlined type and pages with no number cannot be read. Those panels say so rather than pass, and Read through is how to check them by eye.

What it does not do

Paper Dummy does not make press sheets: use the Imposer or Book, and check the result here. It folds through every layer of the paper, so a fold that takes only the top flap is not possible, and it does not allow for paper thickness or creep. Each side of a sheet has to be its own page in the PDF.

Unlicensed, the saved dummy PDF is marked DEMO like the output of any other tool.

Application guide

ImposeIQ Book

Books. Two binding styles that impose differently, the paper maths behind a perfect-bound spine, the cover creases that decide whether a book opens flat or cracks along the glue line, and the artwork that goes on those three panels.

What it is for

A book is not a stack of N-up sheets. The page order depends on how the sheets end up bound, the spine width depends on the paper, and the cover depends on the spine — get any one wrong and the job collates perfectly and reads in the wrong order, or the cover misses the spine by an eighth of an inch. Book works those three out from what you already know: the page count, the stock, and the machine you are running on.

The window

ImposeIQ Book. The Imposer’s own console and live sheet preview, narrowed to book work — here a 23-page manual coming down to an 11 × 8.5 booklet, with Fit PDF to press sheet reporting the shrink it applied.
ImposeIQ Book. The Imposer’s own console and live sheet preview, narrowed to book work — here a 23-page manual coming down to an 11 × 8.5 booklet, with Fit PDF to press sheet reporting the shrink it applied.

It is ImposeIQ, held to book work. Book is built on the Imposer’s own engine — the same source-PDF loader, the same live sheet preview, the same signature nesting, creep, DC marks, cutter XML, HC cut export, templates and PDF output — so anyone who can drive the Imposer can drive this. Drop a PDF on Source PDF, set the piece and the press sheet, and the preview redraws as you go. The header carries the same unit switch, AI Workflow, Job… and Settings buttons.

What changed is the scope. Sheet layout offers only the two book layouts — one signature stack per sheet (a 2×1 spread), or two-up signatures per sheet (2×2, slit the Gutter Y apart afterwards) — because a book cannot be a repeat or a gang layout. Above it, Binding is the choice that actually matters, and two more sections appear when you pick perfect bound: Perfect-Bound Cover for the spine and creases, and Cover Artwork for what is printed on it. Both hide again on saddle stitch, since a stitched book has no spine to crease and no cover panels to lay out — a saddle-stitched cover is a sheet of the nest, set with the Cover box in Binding instead.

Note The Imposer itself is unchanged and still does every layout it always did. Book is a separate application, not a mode of that one.

Fit PDF to press sheet

A booklet spread that is a shade too wide for the press sheet used to be rejected outright, leaving the operator to work out by hand what trim size would have fitted and retype it — losing the real one in the process. Fit PDF to press sheet does that sum instead. It shrinks the piece, and the pages in it, just enough that the whole grid fits inside the sheet’s margins.

Three things about it are deliberate. It only ever shrinks, never enlarges. It applies one factor to both axes — scaling width and height separately would also fit, and would print a booklet with stretched pages, which is worse than not fitting at all because it looks nearly right. And it is non-destructive: your typed Trim W/H stay exactly as they are and only the layout sees the reduced size, so unticking the box puts everything back. The note underneath reports what it did, for example Shrunk to 50% — piece 4.25 in × 5.5 in, from the 8.5 in × 11 in you typed.

Two settings ride with it, and both apply only while Fit is on:

SettingWhat it does
Gutter, top & bottom of sheetBlank clearance reserved at the sheet’s lead and tail edge while fitting. Booklet and Booklet ×2 zero out the lead and tail margin, so without this the fitted grid runs flush to the top and bottom of the sheet. Defaults to 0.25″.
Rotate pages (landscape booklet)Off, 90° or 270°. Off places the pages as designed. Pick a rotation when the booklet itself is landscape and the pages are meant to turn — a portrait page on a landscape spread. The two directions are mirror images: if one comes out upside-down or backwards, pick the other. With Fit off, Rotation on sheet under Piece still decides.

Saddle stitch

Saddle-stitch sheets nest: they sit inside one another, so the outermost sheet carries the first and last pages and the innermost carries the middle spread. A book of S sheets folds to 4S pages, and the whole book is normally one signature.

Because they nest, creep runs across the whole book. The inner pages push outward as the stack thickens, so they shift toward the spine to survive the face trim. Leave Sheets per signature at 0 and the whole document nests as one book. Creep is set per sheet, or calculated from the paper weight, exactly as it is in the Imposer — only the live art moves, never the trim marks or the fold line.

Cut data on a folded signature

A signature spread is one finished piece with a fold down the middle, not two pieces side by side. Cut it like a normal 2-up grid and the machine slits straight down the spine and halves the book. The Cut data box in the booklet options says what to cut instead:

SettingWhat is cut
Outside only (default)The block is cut out whole — all four outside trims, nothing down the spine.
Top and bottom onlyThe block runs the full width of the sheet, so only the lead and tail trims are cut. No slits at all.
Every pieceThe old behaviour: each page cut out on its own, spine cut included. For a spread that is not folded.

The setting drives the DC job XML (one CutBlock per spread instead of one per page), the HC guillotine CSV and the Copy Cut Data list together, so nothing can disagree about what gets cut. Booklet ×2 still keeps one block per row, so the Gutter Y cut that slits the two signature stacks apart survives either way.

Self cover or a separate cover

The outermost sheet of a saddle-stitched nest is the cover. The Cover box in Binding says how it is run, and four checkboxes say what is printed on its four panels. Both only show on saddle stitch in a booklet layout — perfect bound has its own cover panels further down.

Self cover leaves that sheet in the nest, on the same stock as the text, and the job stays one file. Separate cover sheet pulls it out and writes it as …_Cover.pdf, one sheet front and back, to run on the cover stock; the text nests behind it as …_Text.pdf.

PanelTakes
Front coverPage 1
Inside frontPage 2
Inside backSecond to last page
Back coverLast page

Untick a panel and it prints blank, and that page stays in the text block instead, which pads out with blanks to whole sheets as always. All four ticked is the ordinary book, self-covered or plus-covered; none ticked wraps the file in a blank cover, for one printed elsewhere or left plain.

The outer sheet takes no creep — it is the fold creep is measured from — and the sheets behind it creep from one sheet in.

Two things Book will tell you Blanking a panel needs one nested book, so it is ignored while Sheets per signature is above 0 — gathered signatures run every page straight through. And if the ticked panels would use up every page in the file, there is nothing left to nest and the cover sheet becomes the whole job. Either way the message appears under the checkboxes before you build.

Perfect bound

A perfect-bound book does not nest. It is a stack of separate signatures, each folded on its own and milled off at the spine, so pages run straight through: signature 1 holds pages 1–16, signature 2 holds 17–32. Set the sheets per signature and the book pads out to whole signatures.

The distinction that costs a run Creep in a perfect-bound book runs from the outside to the inside of one signature and restarts on the next. Applying whole-book creep to a perfect-bound job walks the inner pages of every later signature further and further off. Picking Perfect bound sets the signature size for you and says what it has done.

Body stock & spine width

Everything about a perfect-bound cover comes back to one number — how thick the body is:

spine = body pages ÷ PPI

Pages, not sheets. PPI is pages per inch, how the mill sells book paper; a caliper is what a micrometer reads on one sheet. They are the same fact — PPI = 2 ÷ caliper — because one sheet is two pages. Book takes whichever you have, in this order:

SourceWhen it is used
Measured caliperAlways wins. The number off your own micrometer, for your own stock, on this job’s run.
Typed PPIThe mill’s own spec sheet figure. Beats the table.
The grade tableGroundwood / high bulk, uncoated offset / opaque, coated matte / dull, coated gloss / enamel, by basis weight. Used when nothing was measured. Uncoated offset is the default.
gsm rule of thumbLast resort — the same caliper mm = gsm ÷ 800 the Imposer’s creep field uses, so the two apps never disagree about the same sheet.

Whichever was used is named on the right, next to the PPI, because “where did this spine width come from” is the first question anyone asks when a cover comes back wrong.

The table is for estimating Bulk varies by mill, by grade within a family, and by run. For a job where the spine has to be right, measure a bound dummy or read the mill’s spec sheet and type that number in. Book says so on screen every time the table is what produced the answer.

A glue allowance is available and defaults to zero. Most shops quote the spine without one; a shop that has measured its own glue line adds it here rather than fudging the PPI to compensate, which is what hides the real number.

Perfect-bound covers

A perfect-bound cover is one flat sheet that becomes three panels — back cover, spine, front cover — and wraps the block:

Back cover Front cover spine down down up up Solid blue = spine crease (folds down) · dashed amber = strain-relief crease (folds up)
The four creases on a fold-plus-strain-relief cover. The relief creases sit outboard of the spine creases, on the cover panels — the pair forms the hinge.
OptionWhat it produces
Fold only — 2 creasesOne crease at each edge of the spine. The cover closes around the block.
Fold + strain relief — 4 creasesThe default. A second crease on each cover panel, a short way out from its spine crease. That pair is the hinge: it takes the flexing when the book is opened, so the fold does not crack along the glue line and the covers lie flat instead of springing.

The relief offset is measured centre-to-centre from each spine crease to its strain-relief crease. It defaults to 6 mm and is editable per job — a heavier cover wants a wider hinge. Book refuses an offset wider than the cover panel rather than quietly clipping it, and warns when the relief is a large fraction of the panel.

Cover stock is entered the same way as the body. Point stock is exact — 12 pt is 0.012 in — while the # cover weights (65#, 80#, 100#, 120# on the 20 × 26 basis) are typical values and are labeled as such. Heavy board earns a warning to score before folding.

The Perfect-Bound Cover panel. Stock in at the top, the crease plan out at the bottom — spine width with the source it came from, then every crease with its panel, fold direction and position, split into the passes the machine will actually run.
The Perfect-Bound Cover panel. Stock in at the top, the crease plan out at the bottom — spine width with the source it came from, then every crease with its panel, fold direction and position, split into the passes the machine will actually run.

A Perfect binder can be named — DB-300 or DPB-500 — and this is where Book is deliberately honest about what it does not know. No binder ships with a book-block thickness range, a minimum spine or a maximum cover size built in. Those numbers are on Duplo’s spec sheets, but a wrong limit is worse than no limit: it either passes a job the machine will jam on, or refuses one it would have run. Until you enter your own machine’s figures, Book says plainly that no check was made rather than showing a tick you have not earned. Fill the limits in once and every job is checked automatically from then on.

Crease direction & passes

This is the part that decides how many times the cover goes through the machine. Spine creases fold down. Strain-relief creases fold up. They oppose each other — that is what makes the hinge work — and a DC creasing wheel drives the stock one way only.

MachinePassesWhat happens
Fold only, any machineOneEvery crease folds the same way, so there is nothing to oppose.
DC-648 or DC-746 up-crease moduleOneThe module carries the opposing tool, so all four creases are made in a single pass. This is exactly what it is for.
No up-crease moduleTwoPass 1 makes the spine creases with the sheet as printed. Flip the sheet left-to-right and run it again: pass 2 makes the relief creases as down creases on the reversed sheet.
Why the second pass looks different Flipping the sheet reverses which edge leads, so every second-pass position is mirrored across the sheet. Book does that mirroring for you and shows the mirrored positions on the pass. Working them out by hand, and forgetting the mirror, is the classic way a two-pass cover comes back with the relief creases on the wrong side of the spine.

A shop that has the module can still tick Run the cover through twice anyway — some operators prefer it on heavy board — and Book plans the two passes properly rather than pretending.

Feed direction A DC-Series crease is a channel crease, not a rotary tool like score and perf. It is one full-width pass of the wheel that runs the whole length of the paper, edge to edge, straight through the margins — it has no X extent at all, so the cover must be fed with the spine square to the feed. Book describes the sheet in that fed orientation when it writes the job, and says so on screen.

Cover design — in Cover Builder

Book does not design the printed cover itself any more. When Binding is Perfect bound, the Cover Design section under the Perfect-Bound Cover settings has one button, Open in Cover Builder. It opens Cover Builder with this book already loaded:

  • From Book, one way: the body PDF, the trim size and the bleed. The text block is Book's, so these always follow Book. Load a different PDF or change the trim and Cover Builder updates on its own. A body PDF with no bleed leaves Book's bleed at 0; the cover still needs one, so in that case Cover Builder keeps its own (1/8" to start).
  • Both ways: body stock (grade and weight, PPI or caliper), glue allowance, cover stock, creasing (fold only or fold + strain relief), relief offset, the up-crease module and the perfect binder. Change any of them in either window and the other follows, so Book's spine and DC crease job always match the cover being designed.
  • Back to Book: Cover Builder's spine width, its flat cover size and the path of the last cover PDF it saved. Book shows them under the button, next to its own spine. If the two spines differ — a spine typed in by hand in Cover Builder, the cover wrap added, or blank pages added there — Book says by how much and why.

Untick Keep Cover Builder in sync to pause the link while you try something out; tick it again and Book sends the book across once more. Closing Cover Builder ends the link. Open in Cover Builder sets it up again.

Workflows A Book workflow step still builds its cover without a window, from the step's cover title, spine text and cover file settings, exactly as before. Cover Builder is for covers designed by hand.

Feeder & collator marks

These are the Imposer’s own OMR controls, carried across unchanged and drawn onto the imposed sheets — Booklet maker barcode and Booklet maker end mark in the DC Marks section. Three machines, and they do not read the same thing:

MachineWhat it reads
DSF-2200 · DSF-6000Booklet-maker feeders, with two alternative ways to find the end of a set: the barcode kit prints a number on every sheet, or the plain optical sensor watches for a solid end mark on the last sheet of the set. A shop has one or the other — printing both is harmless, but only one is read, and Book says so.
DSC-10/60 Intelligent CollatorThe collator tower. Its BARCODE KIT FOR LUL / LUR reads a different number, built from ordered fields — Set ID, Sheet ID, No. of sheets, Job ID — in whatever order the PC Controller’s LUL/LUR tab is set to. It has no optical end-mark sensor; ask for one and Book tells you it will not be read.

The barcode value is built the way the controller builds it, so a sheet printed here and a job keyed in there agree without anyone retyping a number. The end mark goes on the last sheet of every set — that is what separates one book from the next — including a short final set.

The end mark has a window 15–20 mm long, 2–5 mm thick, from the feeder’s own spec. Outside it the sensor either misses the bar or reads artwork as one, and both stop the job. Book checks the mark against that window rather than trusting it.

DC marks & HC cuts

The whole DC Marks section comes across from the Imposer — registration, skew, shrinkage, end and bold marks, the Code 39 barcode and QR code, creases and perforations, and the DC job XML that goes with them. The device follows the machines ticked in Settings, so the body job and the cover job always agree about which machine they are for. Only the DC-648 has the registration hardware for skew and shrink marks — the other models use a CCD reader and cannot see them — so the suite hides marks no ticked machine can read rather than printing something that will never be looked at.

The HC-550 and HC-680 guillotines cut the body sheets. A guillotine has one blade and cuts sequentially — each step feeds the stack forward and cuts, re-measuring from the new leading edge — so the plan slits the sheet into strips first, rotates the stack, then cuts each strip. Waste strips are flagged for auto-eject; kept pieces are not.

What it exports

ExportWhat you get
Generate Imposed PDFThe imposed book itself — every sheet, front and back, with the marks. The Imposer’s own output, unchanged, including the option to embed the DC job XML inside the PDF.
Export DC Job XMLThe cutting program for the imposed body sheets, for the PC Controller’s Import prepress XML folder.
Export Cover DC JobThe cover creases as their own DC job. A two-pass cover writes two files, named -pass1 and -pass2-flipped — they are two separate runs with the sheet flipped between them, and one file with all four creases would tell the machine to do something it cannot.
Cover PDF (from Cover Builder)The printed cover — outside and inside, at the size the spine calculation produced, exported from Cover Builder. Separate from the body PDF, because they are different stocks and usually different presses.
HC series cut CSVThe DocuCutter import CSV for an HC-550 or HC-680, the same export the Imposer writes.
TemplatesSaved layouts, exactly as in the Imposer, plus the cover stock, crease and artwork settings. Set a book up once and recall it.
Tip Run the cover plan before the body. The spine width sets the cover size, and a change of body stock two days into a job changes the cover with it.

Job Data Matrix & Send to Fiery

Two things the Imposer does with a job that is linked to the MIS, now in Book too, and held to the same code so a fix to one reaches the other.

Job Data Matrix. A small 2D code carrying the MIS job number (for example J-260003), so the Shop floor scanner — a USB 2D scanner, or the phone scanner — finds the job straight off the press sheet. It is in Marks, with its size in millimetres, and is on by default. It prints on fronts only, and only when the sheet is linked to an MIS job: an unlinked sheet prints nothing rather than a code that would scan as somebody else’s job. It goes where no finisher reads — clear of every mark and barcode, out of every mark’s reader lane, out of the QR reading range, and off the artwork and the slug lines — and the notes panel says so if there is nowhere for it to go. The preview and the PDF use the same placement, so they cannot disagree.

Send to Fiery. After Generate Imposed PDF, Send to Fiery… sends the PDF to a Fiery print server, from the servers set up under Automation Workflows → Settings → Fiery servers. Choose the hold list (the default, so nothing prints until the operator says so), process and hold, or print now — print now asks you to confirm first. You can set the copies and the job title, which starts with the MIS job number when one is linked, and the send is noted on that job’s history. A saddle-stitched job with a separate cover makes two files, so the panel has a File choice — the text block is preselected, and you send the cover as its own job.

Application

ImposeIQ Storefront

A white-label ordering front end for your customers. You build a branded catalog for an account, price each product, and either demonstrate it from inside the suite or publish it as a real website. Orders and quote requests land in a queue you work through — and can be handed straight to a Workflow Automation workflow, so a customer order becomes an imposed, marked, delivered job without re-keying anything.

What it is for

A published storefront as the customer sees it — the shop’s own name, colours and banner, a product list, and a running request total. The “Powered by Netlify” line at the foot is the published site, not the ImposeIQ window.
A published storefront as the customer sees it — the shop’s own name, colours and banner, a product list, and a running request total. The “Powered by Netlify” line at the foot is the published site, not the ImposeIQ window.

Most shops have a handful of accounts that reorder the same short list of products. Storefront turns that into a catalog with the account's own logo, colors and pricing: the customer picks a product, sets the quantity and options, sees a live estimate, uploads artwork, and submits. You get a structured order with the job name, PO, due date and artwork attached instead of an email thread.

Each account gets its own storefront. Products belong to exactly one storefront, so pricing can differ per account without one customer ever seeing another's catalog.

The window

A storefront picker sits in the header — everything below it applies to the storefront selected there — with a mode indicator showing whether you are in Admin mode or previewing as a customer. The left rail holds the views:

ViewWhat it does
StorefrontsCreate, edit, duplicate, archive and restore storefronts, and set which one is active.
ProductsThe catalog for the selected storefront — pricing, options, artwork, active/inactive, ordering.
OrdersThe order and quote queue for the selected storefront.
All productsEvery product across every storefront, so you can find one without knowing where it lives.
All ordersThe same, for the queue — one list of everything waiting anywhere.
Preview storefrontSwitches the window to what the customer sees, from the access gate through to the confirmation.

Storefronts & branding

Storefronts → New storefront asks for the things that make the catalog look like the customer's:

  • Store name and short description.
  • Logo text / mark, primary and secondary color, and a background style.
  • Logo image and banner image — wide artwork works best for the banner, around 1200 × 300.
  • Contact phone and email, and a display-only custom domain that appears in the site's own chrome.
  • Welcome message, shown at the top of the customer catalog.

Duplicate copies a storefront with its whole catalog — the fast way to stand up a second account that buys much the same list. Archive takes a storefront out of circulation without deleting its order history; Restore brings it back.

The access gate

Require an access code to view this storefront puts a shared code in front of the catalog, so an account's pricing is not simply on the open web.

Understand what this is — the gate is a single shared code checked in the browser. It keeps a published storefront out of casual view; it is not authentication, and it is not account security. Anything genuinely confidential should not be published.

Categories

Products are filed under print categories, and a new storefront is seeded with the full library: business cards, flyers, postcards, brochures, booklets, posters, banners, labels & stickers, menus, mounted boards, packaging and custom quote. Add or remove categories per storefront in the storefront's edit dialog — a category with no products in that storefront simply does not render for the customer, so pruning is tidiness rather than necessity.

Products

Products → New product defines one line in the catalog:

  • Name, category and description.
  • Base unit price — the per-unit price below the lowest quantity tier.
  • Card artwork — a locally drawn icon (card, sheet, brochure, booklet, poster and so on), with no external images fetched. Optionally upload custom card artwork — PNG, JPEG, WEBP or SVG up to 700 KB — which replaces the icon on the catalog card. Removing it falls back to the icon.
  • Delivery fee, and whether the product allows pickup, delivery or both.
  • Active — inactive products stay in your list but disappear from the customer catalog.

Duplicate a product to build a family (same options, different stock) quickly, and drag the list into the order you want customers to see it in.

Pricing — breaks, options, turnaround

The estimate a customer sees is built from four things, in this order:

Quantity price breaks. Each tier is a minimum quantity and a unit price. The highest tier whose minimum the customer has reached wins; below the lowest tier, the base unit price applies.
Configurator options. Each option group (Stock, Coating, Corners…) holds choices, and each choice carries a price delta per unit — positive or negative — added to the unit price. Only the groups you add appear for that product.
Turnaround surcharge. A percentage of the subtotal. New products start with Standard (5–7 business days, no surcharge), Expedited (2–3 days, +20%) and Rush (next business day, +45%).
Delivery fee. The product's flat fee, added only when the customer chooses delivery.

The customer sees the same breakdown line by line under the live estimate, so a price is never a single unexplained number.

Note — The operator preview and the customer configurator call the same pricing code, and the published site has that same code spliced into it. One quote, one answer, wherever it is calculated.

Preview — the customer's path

Preview storefront walks the whole customer journey inside the app, exactly as the published site behaves: access gate (if enabled) → catalog, with search and category filtering → configure, where options, quantity, turnaround, pickup/delivery, job name, PO number, notes and an artwork upload come together against a live estimate → basket → checkout details — name, email, phone, company, and a delivery address when delivery is chosen → confirmation.

A Custom Quote product takes the same details but no price, and arrives in the queue as a quote request rather than an order. Exit preview in the header returns you to admin mode.

Tip — Orders placed in preview are real rows in the queue. It is the fastest way to rehearse a new catalog end to end, and to show an account what their storefront will feel like before you publish anything.

Orders & quote requests

The queue is tabbed by status with a live count on each tab, plus a search across order number, customer and company. Orders move through a fixed sequence:

StatusMeaning
NewSubmitted, not yet looked at.
Needs artworkWaiting on the customer — nothing usable was uploaded, or what arrived will not run.
ReadyChecked and cleared to schedule.
In productionOn press or in finishing.
CompleteDelivered or collected.

Opening an order shows the customer, the configured lines, the estimate, delivery method and address, job name, PO, due date and uploaded artwork. You can add a note at any point — notes stay with the order — and every status change is recorded against it. Quote requests use the same vocabulary and sit on their own tab.

An order that has been handed to a workflow also carries an Automation workflow panel showing that run's state and letting you send it again. See Sending orders into a workflow.

All products & all orders

Every product belongs to one storefront, which is what keeps per-account pricing honest — but it makes "which storefront was that on?" a real question. All products lists the lot, and can assign a copy of any product to another storefront: the copy is independent from that moment, so repricing it for the new account changes nothing for the old one. All orders is the same idea for the queue — one list of everything outstanding, whoever it belongs to.

Publishing the storefront

Publishing generates a self-contained static site — one index.html, the product images, and the pricing logic — reproducing the customer preview with no build step and nothing to install. Two targets, set up per storefront in its edit dialog:

TargetSetupGood for
GitHub Pages Save a classic GitHub token with repo scope, give the repo a name (letters, numbers and hyphens), publish. Catalogs and quote requests. No server-side code, so no card payments.
Netlify Save a Netlify token, choose a site name (lowercase letters, numbers and hyphens), publish. The same, plus Stripe checkout — which needs a Netlify Function to run.

Tokens are saved once for the app, not per storefront, and can be replaced at any time. After a successful publish the dialog keeps the live URL with the date it went out, ready to open or copy. Publishing again overwrites the site with the current catalog — that is how you push a price change.

Payments

None (email request) is the default: the customer submits, the order lands in the queue, and money is handled the way you handle it now. Selecting Stripe instead collects payment at checkout, and needs three things:

The publishable key — starts with pk_, safe to expose, from Stripe's dashboard under Developers → API keys. It goes in the storefront.
The secret key — starts with sk_. Saved encrypted on this machine only; it never leaves it and never appears in the published site.
The Netlify environment variable — after publishing to Netlify, add STRIPE_SECRET_KEY to that site under Site configuration → Environment variables. Checkout will not work until you do.
Netlify only — Stripe checkout will not work on a storefront published to GitHub Pages. Card payment needs server-side code, and GitHub Pages serves static files only.

Taking real orders online

By default a published storefront collects quote requests only — an order is an email in to you, and money is handled the way you already handle it. Turn on Take real orders on the published site in the storefront's edit dialog and the site itself takes the order (and payment, if Stripe is set up) — but it can only do that on a Netlify publish, because taking an order needs somewhere to run code and GitHub Pages serves static files only.

Two more checkboxes sit next to it: Let customers send an order for a quote instead of paying now, and Let customers upload artwork with an order, with a Largest upload limit in MB — anything bigger is refused with a message asking the customer to email it instead.

Collecting orders — the pull key

Orders placed on the live site do not push themselves onto this PC — nothing on this machine is exposed to the internet. Instead the site holds them, and ImposeIQ collects them from the site every few minutes, or on demand with Check for orders now. An order placed while your computer is off is simply waiting there when it comes back on.

The connection is a key, not a password you type in: Create the key (or Show the key once one exists) reveals it once so you can paste it into the Netlify site as an environment variable named IMPOSEIQ_PULL_SECRET (Site configuration → Environment variables), then redeploy. Until that variable is set, the site refuses every collection attempt and no order can reach the shop.

Replacing the key — Replace issues a new key immediately; the old one stops working the moment you save, and orders will not reach the shop again until the new value is pasted into Netlify and the site is redeployed. Only replace it if you believe the key has leaked.

If Stripe is selected as the payment provider but no secret key is saved yet, online orders are still taken — the customer is told the shop will arrange payment rather than being shown a broken checkout.

Publishing to Netlify now sets the key (and the Stripe and email keys below) on the site for you, so there is normally nothing to paste. The manual steps above are only needed if the publish log says a value could not be set.

Going live: test mode, email & accounts

Test or live

Every storefront has a Site mode. Test puts a yellow TEST MODE banner on every page, numbers orders T- instead of W-, tags every email [TEST], and brings orders into ImposeIQ and the MIS with a TEST job name and a note not to produce or invoice them. No real money moves. Live takes real orders and real payments. New storefronts start in Test; switch to Live and press Publish again when you are ready.

Card payments

Choose Card payments (Stripe). In Test mode you pick how cards are tested:

  • Built-in test checkout — no Stripe account needed. The customer lands on a clearly marked test payment page: 4242 4242 4242 4242 approves, 4000 0000 0000 0002 declines, 4000 0000 0000 9995 is insufficient funds. This page only exists on a Test publish.
  • Stripe test mode — the real Stripe Checkout, run on your sk_test_ key.

Save a Test secret key and a Live secret key separately. ImposeIQ keeps both encrypted on this PC and sends only the matching one to the site: a test site never gets the live key and a live site never gets the test key. If a paid customer closes the tab before Stripe sends them back, the payment is still picked up at the next order collection.

Email

Under Email, pick Resend or SendGrid, save its API key, and set a From address on a domain you verified with that service. The site then sends the customer an order confirmation, sends you a new-order alert (to Send new-order alerts to, or the contact email), and sends the account emails below. Use Send a test email to check it works before publishing. A failed email never loses an order.

Customer accounts and purchase orders

Tick Let customers register an account on the site (under Ordering on account). Customers get a Sign in / Register button; they are signed in right away and their details fill in at checkout. Paying by purchase order is unlocked only when:

  • you Approve them under Show registered customers (you get an email when someone registers, and they get one when you approve them), or
  • their email is on the Approved accounts list and they have confirmed it with the emailed link.

With accounts on, a PO always needs a signed-in, approved account — typing an address is not enough. Reject or Revoke closes an account and signs it out. PO orders arrive in ImposeIQ and the MIS unpaid, marked to invoice on the account's terms. Passwords are stored hashed; customers can reset theirs by email.

Sending orders into a workflow

In the storefront's edit dialog, Send new orders to an Automation Workflow picks one of your published workflows and hands every new order and quote request to it the moment it is placed. This is a real round trip: the order goes out as a workflow job, and the run reports back onto the order.

What the workflow receives

The job is the customer's artwork itself — the files they attached, exactly as uploaded — so preflight, imposition and delivery steps have something real to work on. Alongside them comes the commercial half of the ticket as job variables, ready for a Route, Rename, Tag filename or Notify step:

VariablesWhat they carry
[var.storefrontName] [var.orderNumber] [var.orderType] [var.orderStatus]Which storefront, which order, and whether it is an order or a quote request.
[var.customerName] [var.customerCompany] [var.customerEmail] [var.customerPhone]Who it is for — enough for a Tell the customer step to write to them directly.
[var.productName] [var.categoryId] [var.quantity] [var.lineCount] [var.total]What was ordered. The category is what a Route step usually branches on.
[var.jobName] [var.po] [var.dueDate] [var.turnaround] [var.customerNotes]The job ticket the customer filled in.
[var.deliveryMethod] [var.deliveryAddress]Pickup or delivery, and the address when there is one.
[var.option…]One per configurator group, named after it — [var.optionStock], [var.optionCoating]. This is how a workflow picks the right imposition template for the stock the customer chose.
[var.artworkName] [var.artworkCount]What was attached, for naming and for a Route step that needs to catch an order with no artwork.

Quote requests carry [var.projectName], [var.description], [var.desiredQuantity], [var.dimensions] and [var.finishingNotes] as well. The job's trigger is reported as storefront-order, so a workflow that also watches a hot folder can tell where a job came from.

What comes back

The run reports its progress onto the order — no switching to the Workflows window to find out what happened. Every order that has been sent carries an Automation workflow panel showing the workflow, the run state, how many files went with it, and the last thing the run said; each change is also written to the order's timeline.

The runThe order becomesWhy
StartedUnchangedProgress is worth showing, but a job that has merely begun has not earned a status change.
Waiting for an approvalUnchangedReported distinctly from "running" so you can see the difference between working and blocked.
Finished cleanlyReadyPreflighted, imposed and delivered — cleared to schedule.
Finished, but preflight failedNeeds artworkThe reason preflight gave is written onto the order, so you can quote it back to the customer.
Failed for any other reasonUnchangedAn unreachable output folder or a full disk is not the customer's artwork problem. The failure is recorded and left for you.
Note — A workflow only ever moves an order forward out of New or Needs artwork. Once you have advanced an order by hand, a run finishing later never drags it back.

Sending by hand

The same panel has a workflow picker and a Send to workflow button. Use it to re-run an order after the customer sends corrected artwork, to send an order placed before automation was switched on, or to run a different workflow than the storefront's usual one. Each send starts a fresh run and files the previous one under Earlier runs, so the record of why an order needed re-sending survives.

Tip — Rehearse it with the preview. Place a test order against a workflow whose delivery step points at a scratch folder, watch the panel move through Submitted → Running → Finished, then repoint the delivery when you are happy.
Artwork has to reach this machine — the round trip works for orders placed in the preview, where the file is uploaded straight into ImposeIQ. An order from a published storefront arrives by email with no file on this PC: the run still starts and still reports back, but it has no artwork to work on until you attach it. Send the order to the workflow by hand once you have the file.
Note — Workflows must be published before they appear in this list. If the dropdown is empty, build and publish one in Workflow Automation first.
Application

Email Campaigns

Email Campaigns sends newsletters, offers and automated email series to your customers and prospects from this PC. It keeps your lists and subscribers, builds the emails, sends them at a pace your mail server accepts, and records who opened, clicked, unsubscribed or bounced. Sign-up forms, landing pages, a preference page, A/B tests, automations, reports, deliverability checks, an API and webhooks are all built in. Open it from Home › Utilities › Email Campaigns; the Help button in its title bar brings you back to this page.

Where it runs — everything is stored and sent from this PC (campaigns.json in the suite’s data folder, included in backups). Campaigns and automations only send while the ImposeIQ desktop suite is open; a campaign interrupted by closing the suite carries on from where it stopped next time.
Unlicensed copies — without a licence for Email Campaigns, each campaign goes to its first 10 recipients only and every email carries a “demo” line in its footer. Everything else works, so you can set it up and test it fully first.

Quick start: your first campaign

Fill in Settings. Open Settings in the Campaigns window. Enter a From name and From email on a domain you own, your Organisation and Postal address, and choose a mail server (the suite’s own, from the suite’s Settings › Email, or a separate one). Press Test connection, then Save settings.
Give recipients a way out. Either set a Public link address and switch on the link server (best — it gives one-click unsubscribe, open and click tracking; see Public link address), or at the very least an Unsubscribe mailbox. A campaign will not send without one of them.
Add people. Go to Subscribers and use Import CSV… or Import from CRM…, or Add them one at a time. They go on the Newsletter list unless you choose another.
Write it. Campaigns › New campaign (or Examples… to start from a ready-made one). Give it a subject, tick the list, pick a Layout… and edit the blocks. The preview on the right shows exactly what the first subscriber will get.
Test it. Send test… to yourself and look at it on a phone and in Outlook or Gmail. Check content gives it a spam score.
Send it. Review & send… lists anything that would stop it in red and anything worth reading in amber. Press Send now (or Schedule if you set a Send at time). The report opens and fills in as it goes.

Examples to start from

Both the Campaigns and the Automations pages have an Examples… button with ready-made emails written for a print shop. Use this adds one as a draft and opens it: nothing is ever sent, and no automation is switched on, until you have read it and done so yourself. Change the wording, offers, codes, pictures and links (they point at example.com until you do), send yourself a test, then send it or turn it on. Use the same example as often as you like.

Example automationStarts when…What it does
Welcome seriessomeone joins your first public listWelcome email; three days later what you print; four days later an Engaged tag for clickers or a first-order offer for the rest.
New customer onboardingsomeone is tagged Customer (the CRM import does this)Thank-you, file-preparation tips, a review request after two weeks, a reorder nudge after a month.
Quote follow-upyour website or MIS sends the API event quote-sentA check-in after two days; if no Ordered tag five days later, emails the shop and books a CRM call for the rep.
Reorder reminderthe API event order-shippedTags them Ordered, then about ten weeks later asks whether stocks are running low (free shipping line for VIPs).
Birthday offertheir Birthday attribute, every yearA greeting with a discount code.
Customer anniversarytheir Customer since attribute, every yearA thank-you, with a different gift for VIPs.
Hot lead alerttheir lead score passes 50Tags them Hot, emails the shop and books a CRM call.
Win-backsomeone is tagged Inactive (Deliverability › List health)A “we miss you” offer, a last check, then Sunset for those who never respond.
Trade show follow-upsomeone signs up on a formA same-day thank-you, then a random split tests two offers.
Clicked but did not ordersomeone clicks in any campaignScore points, and a day later a helpful nudge unless they are tagged Ordered.

Example campaigns: Monthly newsletter, Holiday cards promotion (with an A/B test of two subject lines), New product launch (product cards — pick your own from the Storefront), Open house / trade show invitation, Customer feedback survey (one-click answers you read off the click map; customers only), Re-engagement campaign (people tagged Inactive only) and a plain, personal Seasonal deadline reminder.

Tip — The quote and reorder automations wait for API events. Have your website or MIS post quote-sent and order-shipped to /api/v1/contacts/{email}/events (see The API), and tag people Ordered when they order, through the API or by hand.

The window

The menu on the left has one page per job:

PageWhat it is for
DashboardSubscriber totals, recent campaigns with their open and click rates, a setup checklist (anything red stops sending) and the latest activity.
CampaignsEvery campaign with its status and progress. Click a draft to edit it, a sent one to see its report.
AutomationsEmail series that run by themselves: welcome series, birthdays, follow-ups. See Automations.
ReportsAll your campaigns side by side, compared with your averages.
SubscribersEveryone on file: search, filter by list, status, tag or segment, edit, tag, import and export.
AudienceSegments, tags and groups — the ways of picking who gets what.
ListsYour mailing lists, and which ones are public on the sign-up form.
FormsSign-up forms, landing pages, and the confirmation and welcome emails.
TransactionalOne-to-one emails your website or MIS sends through the API — order shipped, proof ready. See Transactional emails.
TemplatesThe frame (header, colours, footer position) that goes round each campaign.
DeliverabilitySPF, DKIM and DMARC check for your domain, list health and inactive subscribers.
SuppressionAddresses that must never be emailed, whatever list they are on.
SettingsSender, footer, mail server, sending speed, link server, bounces, API, webhooks, lead scoring, brand kit and the public archive.

A pill at the top right shows how many campaigns are sending right now, and Demo when the copy is unlicensed.

Setting up: sender and footer

  • From name / From email: what recipients see. Use an address on your own domain (news@yourshop.com), never a Gmail or Outlook.com address — those are rejected or sent to spam by the big providers when they come from another server. A campaign can override both for itself.
  • Reply-to: where replies go, if not the From address.
  • Organisation and Postal address: shown in the footer of every email. A real postal address is required on commercial email in the US (CAN-SPAM) and most other countries; the review before sending warns when it is missing.
  • Footer HTML: added to every campaign. It understands [UNSUBSCRIBE] (the unsubscribe link), [PREFERENCES] (the preference page link), [ORGANISATION], [ADDRESS] and [LISTS] (the list names the person is receiving this through). The template decides where it goes with [FOOTER]; otherwise it goes at the very end.
  • Unsubscribe mailbox (optional): added to the email’s List-Unsubscribe header as a mailto, and used as the unsubscribe link when there is no public link address. Requests that arrive there have to be handled by hand — add the address to Suppression.

Setting up: the mail server

  • Use the suite’s mail server: the SMTP server in the suite’s own Settings › Email (the one quotes and alerts use). Fine for a few hundred recipients.
  • Use a separate server for campaigns: recommended for any real list. Office 365 and Gmail accounts cap a day at a few hundred to two thousand recipients and will lock an account that sends a newsletter. A sending service — SendGrid, Mailgun, Amazon SES, Postmark, Brevo, SMTP2GO — gives you an SMTP host, port, user and password; enter them here. Port 587 without the TLS box (STARTTLS) or 465 with it.
  • Test connection logs in to the server without sending anything. The password is stored encrypted on this PC and never shown again.
Tip — Use a sending service’s own bounce or return-path domain if it offers one, and set its sending limit as your sending speed.

Setting up: SPF, DKIM and DMARC

Gmail, Yahoo and Microsoft reject or junk bulk mail from domains that have not published these three DNS records. They are set at whoever hosts your domain’s DNS (GoDaddy, Cloudflare, your web host), with the values your sending service gives you:

RecordWhat it doesTypical value
SPFLists the servers allowed to send as your domain. One TXT record on the domain itself.v=spf1 include:sendgrid.net ~all
DKIMA public key that lets receivers check each email’s signature. A TXT (or CNAME) record at selector._domainkey.yourshop.com; the service tells you the selector.v=DKIM1; k=rsa; p=MIGf…
DMARCTells receivers what to do when SPF and DKIM fail, and where to send reports. A TXT record at _dmarc.yourshop.com.v=DMARC1; p=none; rua=mailto:dmarc@yourshop.com

Then open Deliverability, type your domain (and the DKIM selector if it is not a common one) and press Check. Each record shows green when it is right, amber when it works but could be better (DMARC p=none only monitors), red when it is missing or wrong — for example two SPF records, or an SPF record ending in +all. DNS changes can take an hour to show.

The unsubscribe, preference, view-online, open-tracking and click-tracking links in each email, and the sign-up forms, confirmation links and landing pages, are answered by a small web server inside the suite: the link server. For those links to work for your recipients, it has to be reachable from the internet at an https address — the Public link address.

Switch on the link server. In Settings › Links, tracking and sign-ups, tick Run the link server on this PC. Leave the port at 8790 and Listen on at This PC only. The green bar confirms it is listening.
Put it on the internet. The simplest way is Tailscale Funnel: with Tailscale installed and signed in on this PC, run tailscale funnel --bg 8790 in a command prompt. It prints an address like https://shop-pc.tail1234.ts.net. Alternatively, a reverse proxy on your web host (for example https://mail.yourshop.com) forwarding to this PC works too.
Paste the address into Public link address and press Save settings. Open <address>/subscribe in a browser on your phone (off your Wi-Fi) to check it answers.
  • Track opens adds an invisible 1-pixel image. Opens are under-counted: Apple Mail’s privacy protection and image blocking hide them, so compare open rates between your own campaigns rather than with other people’s.
  • Track clicks sends each link through the link server, which records the click and passes the reader straight on. Clicks are exact.
  • Every link carries a signed token, so a link cannot be edited into someone else’s unsubscribe, and the server reveals nothing about your list.
  • With an https address, each email also carries the one-click unsubscribe header Gmail and Yahoo require from bulk senders, and they show their own Unsubscribe button next to your name.
Without a public address — campaigns still send, but there is no tracking, and unsubscribing works only by email to the unsubscribe mailbox. Sign-up forms, landing pages, double opt-in and the preference page need the public address.

Setting up: sending speed and time zone

  • Messages per batch and Batch period: at most this many emails in each period. 60 per 60 seconds is 3,600 an hour. Set it inside your provider’s limit; 0 means no limit.
  • Pause between messages: a short gap between emails, which some servers prefer.
  • Automations share the same speed limit as campaigns.
  • Default time zone (for example America/Chicago): used for same local time delivery when a subscriber has no Timezone attribute, and for the day a date automation (a birthday) fires.

Setting up: bounces and complaints

When your mail server refuses an address outright, Campaigns counts that bounce itself. Bounces that come back later as emails, and spam complaints, need a mailbox to read:

  • Make a mailbox that only receives bounces (e.g. bounces@yourshop.com) and set it as the Return-Path or bounce address at your sending service. Sign up for the feedback loops your service offers so spam complaints come there too.
  • In Settings › Bounces, tick Read bounces from a POP3 mailbox and fill in its POP3 host, port (995 with TLS), user and password. Check now reads it straight away; afterwards it is read every Check every minutes.
  • A hard bounce (address does not exist) counts against the address; after Disable after this many hard bounces it becomes bounced and gets no more mail. Soft bounces (mailbox full) are recorded but not counted.
  • A spam complaint (someone pressing “This is spam”) unsubscribes the address and puts it on the suppression list for good.
  • Messages in the mailbox that are not bounces or complaints are left alone. Delete bounce messages once read keeps the mailbox small.

Lists and subscribers

  • Lists are the mailing lists people are on (Newsletter, Trade customers…). A person can be on several and still gets one copy of a campaign sent to more than one of them. Public lists appear on the default sign-up form and the preference page.
  • A subscriber’s status decides whether they get mail: active (yes), unconfirmed (waiting for double opt-in — no), unsubscribed, bounced and blacklisted (no). Only active subscribers are ever sent to, and the status is checked again at the moment of sending.
  • Attributes are any other facts about a person — City, Birthday, Account manager. Each one becomes a placeholder: a City attribute is [CITY]. Two are special: Timezone (America/Denver) for local-time delivery, and any date such as Birthday for date automations.
  • Click a subscriber to edit them, see their tags, groups, automations and every email they received with its opens and clicks.
  • With selected… (tick the boxes first) adds or removes a tag, adds to or removes from a list, unsubscribes, blacklists or deletes. To stop mailing someone, unsubscribe or blacklist them rather than delete them — a deleted address can be imported again by mistake.

Importing and exporting

  • Import CSV… takes a CSV or text export from Excel, Outlook, Mailchimp, phpList or your MIS. The first row should name the columns. Email, first name, last name, company and tags columns are recognised automatically (check the choices under the file); every other column becomes an attribute. A Tags column can hold several tags separated by ;.
  • Choose the lists to add them to, and optionally a tag for everyone in the file (“Trade show 2026”).
  • Tick These people have agreed to receive email only when they have; otherwise they come in as unconfirmed and get nothing.
  • An address already on file is updated, never duplicated. Someone who unsubscribed, bounced or is blacklisted stays that way — an import never re-subscribes a person who left.
  • Import from CRM… brings in every contact with an email address from the MIS customers and prospects, tagged Customer or Prospect, with the company, customer code and job title as attributes. Only import people who expect to hear from you.
  • Imports do not start automations — a welcome series is for people who have just joined, not for a list you already had.
  • Export CSV writes the subscribers currently shown (respecting the list, status, tag and segment filters), with their lists, tags, groups and attributes.

Tags

Tags are your own labels: VIP, Banner buyer, Trade show 2026. They are not case-sensitive. Add them from the subscriber list, a subscriber’s card, a CSV import, a sign-up form, an automation step or the API. Audience › Tags shows every tag with its count, and can rename one everywhere (segments follow the new name) or take it off everyone. Adding a tag can start an automation.

Groups

Groups are questions subscribers answer themselves — “What do you print?” with the options Banners, Business cards, Signs. Make them under Audience › Groups with one option per line. They appear as tick boxes on sign-up forms that include them and on the preference page (untick Show on the default sign-up form and the preference page to keep a group internal). Use them in a segment (Group interest has Banners) or in the email itself with [IF INTERESTED:Banners].

Segments

A segment is a saved set of conditions — “VIP customers in Texas who clicked in the last 60 days” — worked out again every time you send, so it is always up to date. Make one under Audience › Segments › New segment; the count underneath updates as you build it. Choose whether all or any of the conditions must match.

ConditionTests
Email, First name, Last name, Company, Signup sourceis, is not, contains, does not contain, starts with, ends with, is blank, is not blank. Not case-sensitive.
AttributeThe same on any attribute you name, plus greater than / less than, which compare numbers as numbers and dates as dates (Spend greater than 1000).
Statusis / is not active, unconfirmed, unsubscribed…
Listis on / is not on a list.
Tag, Group interesthas / does not have.
Date addedbefore or after a date, in the last N days, more than N days ago.
Campaign activitywas sent, was not sent, opened, did not open, clicked, did not click — one campaign, or any campaign. Did not open a particular campaign means they got it and did not open it.
Engagementopened or clicked in the last N days, or ignored the last N campaigns (got them and opened none).
Lead scoregreater than / less than a number (see Lead scoring).

To send to a segment, pick it under Segment in the campaign editor: the campaign goes to the people on the chosen lists who match it. Conditions… next to it adds one-off conditions just for that campaign, without saving a segment.

Lead scoring

Every subscriber has a lead score: points for what they do, so you can see who is warm right now — the way ActiveCampaign and HubSpot score contacts. Set it up under Settings › Lead scoring:

  • Points for opening an email, clicking a link and signing up on a form. Each email counts once for its open and once for a click, however many times it is opened.
  • Points for tags, one per line as Tag: points — Requested quote: 25, Visited the showroom: 15, or negative (Competitor: -100).
  • Points fade after a number of days (90 by default), so a burst of interest last spring does not keep someone hot for ever. 0 keeps them for good.
  • Automations can add or take points with the Lead score ± step.

The score shows on the Subscribers page (15+ warm, 50+ hot) — choose Highest score first to put the hottest at the top — and on each subscriber’s card with the points behind it. The Dashboard counts the hot leads. Use it in a segment (Lead score greater than 40), and to start an automation with the Reaches a lead score trigger — for example notify the rep the moment a prospect passes 50.

Tip — Tag the actions that really signal intent (a quote request from the website through the API, a visit to a price page via a link) with big points, and leave opens small; opens are the least reliable signal.

Suppression

Addresses on the suppression list are never emailed, whatever list they are on or are imported into. Use it for people who asked by phone or letter, competitors, and role addresses you must not mail. Paste one or many with a reason. Blacklisting a subscriber and spam complaints add to it automatically. Removing an address from the list does not re-activate the subscriber; change their status yourself if they really have opted back in.

Sign-up forms

Every public list can be joined at <public address>/subscribe — the default form. Under Forms › Sign-up forms › New form you can build your own, each at its own address <public address>/f/<name>:

  • Heading, Introduction, an optional Image (an https address), the Button text and the Thank-you message.
  • Fields: email is always first. Add first name, last name, company, or any attribute (Other — City, Phone, Birthday as a date…), and mark any as required.
  • Sign-ups join: the lists a sign-up is added to. A form can add people to a private list (a trade-only list, say); tick Let them choose among these lists to show the lists as tick boxes.
  • Groups to ask about, and Tag sign-ups with (“Website”, “Trade show”).
  • Embed code gives HTML to paste into your own website or Storefront page. It is a plain form with no script, so it works in any site builder; it posts to your public address. Open shows the hosted form in your browser.
  • Forms include a hidden trap field that catches most spam bots.

Double opt-in, confirmation and welcome emails

  • With double opt-in on (recommended, and expected in Europe and Canada), someone who signs up gets a confirmation email and is only added once they click its link. Until then they are unconfirmed and get nothing.
  • Edit that email under Forms › Sign-up emails. It must contain [CONFIRMURL] — the link they click.
  • The optional welcome email goes once they are confirmed (or straight away with double opt-in off). For more than one email, use an automation instead.
  • Both understand placeholders and [IF] blocks. Someone already active who signs up again just joins the new lists — no second welcome.

Landing pages

A landing page is a page of your own with a sign-up form on it, for a trade show, a QR code on a flyer or an ad. Under Forms › Landing pages give it a title, an address (/l/<name>), choose its form and write the page in HTML; put [FORM] where the form goes, or it goes at the end. Scripts are switched off on landing pages for safety, so use plain HTML and CSS. The list shows how many times each page has been viewed.

The preference page

[PREFERENCES] in the footer links each person to their own page where they can correct their name and company, choose which public lists they get and tick their group interests. Unticking every list unsubscribes them. The unsubscribe page also offers it as “Rather get less?” — many people would sooner get one list than none.

Pop-up form

Any sign-up form can also appear as a pop-up on your website, as MailerLite and Sender offer. Under Forms › Sign-up forms press Pop-up code, choose how many seconds after the page opens it appears and how many days before it shows again to the same visitor, then Copy and paste the code just before </body> on your website. The form opens in a frame over the page; visitors close it with × or by clicking outside it. The form itself still runs on your link server, so your website never handles anyone’s address. Only the sign-up forms can be shown in a frame — every other page the link server answers refuses it.

Writing a campaign

The editor has three columns: the campaign’s settings on the left, the content in the middle, and a live preview on the right (switch between Desktop and Mobile). The preview is personalised for the first person who would receive it.

  • Campaign name is for you; Subject and Preview text (the grey line after the subject in the inbox) are what recipients see.
  • Send to: tick one or more lists. Segment narrows it (see Segments).
  • Template: the frame round the content. None sends the content as written.
  • Send at: leave empty to send when you press Send, or set a date and time to schedule it.
  • Delivery time: see Send times.
  • Save draft keeps your work; leaving with unsaved changes asks first.

The block builder

New campaigns open in Blocks: the email is a stack of blocks you add, drag and edit, written out as email-safe HTML that works in Outlook and Gmail and stacks columns on phones.

  • Add a block from the row under the blocks, or drag one from there into place. Layouts… starts from a ready-made layout — Newsletter, Promotion, Announcement, Event invitation — replacing the current blocks.
  • Click a block to open its settings; click again to close them. Drag the ⠿ handle to move a block, or use ↑ ↓. ⧉ duplicates, ✕ removes, ☆ saves it to reuse in other campaigns (Saved blocks…).
BlockSettings
HeadingText, size, alignment, colour.
TextRich text: bold, italic, links, lists. Placeholders and [IF] blocks work.
ImageAn https image address (images must be on the web — upload them to your website or image host), alt text, an optional link, width and alignment.
ButtonLabel, link, colours, alignment.
Divider, SpacerA line, or blank space of a given height.
2 columnsTwo stacks of blocks side by side; on a phone they stack.
Social linksButtons for the networks you give an address for.
HTMLYour own HTML, for anything the other blocks do not do.
FooterPuts the settings footer (unsubscribe, address) here instead of at the end.
LogoYour logo from the brand kit; width and alignment.
ProductA product card — picture, name, description, price and an Order now button. Pick from the Storefront… fills it from your Storefront products.

Visual and HTML are the other ways to write. Switching from Blocks to either turns the blocks into HTML you can edit freely — but it cannot be turned back into blocks (you are asked first). Plain text lets you write the text-only version yourself; left empty, it is made from the HTML.

Placeholders (merge tags)

Placeholders in square brackets are replaced for each person. Click one under Insert a placeholder to put it where the cursor is.

PlaceholderBecomes
[FIRSTNAME] [LASTNAME] [NAME] [COMPANY] [EMAIL]The subscriber’s details.
[CITY], [ACCOUNTMANAGER]…Any attribute, by its name in capitals without spaces.
[FIRSTNAME%%there]The first name, or “there” when there is none — so Hi [FIRSTNAME%%there] never reads “Hi ,”. Works on any placeholder.
[UNSUBSCRIBE] / [UNSUBSCRIBEURL]The unsubscribe link, or just its address.
[PREFERENCES] / [PREFERENCESURL]The preference page link, or its address.
[VIEWURL]The address of the email in a browser.
[ORGANISATION] [ADDRESS] [LISTS]From Settings, and the lists the person gets this through.
[DATE] [YEAR]Today’s date (October 25, 2026) and year.

The review before sending lists any placeholder no subscriber has a value for — usually a typo.

Conditional content

Show some of the text to some people only. A block starts with [IF …] or [IFNOT …], may have [ELSEIF …] and [ELSE] parts, and ends with [ENDIF]. Blocks can sit inside each other, and work in the subject, the body, the plain text and the footer.

WriteShows the text when
[IF FIRSTNAME]Hi [FIRSTNAME],[ELSE]Hello,[ENDIF]the field is not empty.
[IFNOT COMPANY]…[ENDIF]the field is empty.
[IF CITY = Houston]Local pickup is free.[ELSEIF CITY = Dallas]…[ENDIF]a field equals a value. Also !=, >, <, >=, <= (numbers compare as numbers) and contains. Values can be in quotes.
[IF TAG:VIP]Your VIP discount: 15%[ENDIF]the person has the tag.
[IF INTERESTED:Banners]…[ENDIF]they ticked that group option (or INTERESTED:Group:Option to be exact).
[IF LIST:Trade customers]…[ENDIF]they are on that list.
Check the brackets — an [IF] without its [ENDIF] stops the campaign from sending (the review says so), rather than sending everyone the raw text. Send a test to someone with and someone without the field to see both versions.

Brand kit and product blocks

Under Settings › Brand kit set your logo (an https address of a PNG or JPG on your website), brand colour, button text colour and font. In the block builder the Logo block shows the logo, and buttons and product cards use the brand colour unless the block sets its own — so changing the brand kit restyles every new campaign at once. The Newsletter, Promotion and Product showcase layouts start with the logo.

The Product block shows one product with an order button. Pick from the Storefront… lists the products in your storefronts; choosing one fills in the name, description and a “From $… each” price, and — once the storefront is published to the web — its picture and a link to the store. Edit any of it afterwards. The Product showcase layout is a ready-made product email.

Templates

A template is the HTML frame around every campaign that uses it: your logo, colours, width and footer area. Put [CONTENT] where the campaign goes and [FOOTER] where the footer goes. Edit them under Templates, with a preview beside the code. The Simple branded template shows your organisation name in a header. Images in templates must be on the web (https). A template used by a campaign that is still sending cannot be deleted.

Testing and the content check

  • Send test… sends the email to one or more addresses with [TEST] in the subject. If an address belongs to a subscriber, it is personalised for them. Test links are not tracked and the unsubscribe link does nothing. With an A/B test you choose which version.
  • Check content scores the email out of 100 and lists what spam filters dislike: a subject in capitals, !!!, spammy phrases, an email that is mostly images, images without alt text, link shorteners (bit.ly), links whose text shows one website and go to another, scripts or forms, and HTML over 102 KB (Gmail cuts it off, hiding the unsubscribe link). It is a guide; the receiving server decides.

Sending and scheduling

Review & send… saves the campaign and checks it. It shows how many people it will go to (active, on the lists and segment, not suppressed, one copy per address), the content score, and:

  • Red — must be fixed first: no subject, empty message, no list, nobody to send to, no mail server or From address, no way to unsubscribe, broken [IF] blocks, scripts in the email.
  • Amber — worth reading: no tracking, link server off, no postal address, unknown placeholders, a small A/B test pool.

Send now starts at once; with a future Send at the button is Schedule and it waits as scheduled. Either way it sends in the background, at your sending speed, while the suite is open. From the report you can Pause, Resume and Cancel (emails already sent stay sent; a scheduled campaign that has not started goes back to a draft). A campaign that has started cannot be edited — Duplicate it instead.

  • If the mail server stops answering or refuses the login, the campaign pauses itself with the reason, so you can fix it and press Resume.
  • Retry N failed tries again the emails the server refused for a temporary reason.
  • Send to new subscribers sends a finished campaign to people who joined its lists since.
  • Resend to non-openers… makes a new draft — optionally with a new subject — for the people who got this campaign and did not open it. Give it a day or two first, and do not resend more than once.

Send times

Delivery time in the editor:

  • Everyone at once: as fast as the sending speed allows, from the start time.
  • Each person’s best hour: each person gets it within 24 hours of the start, at the hour of day they have usually opened past emails. People with no history get the hour the whole list opens most.
  • Same local time in each time zone: everyone gets it at, say, 9:00 in their own time zone, on the Send at date. It uses each subscriber’s Timezone attribute (America/Chicago, Europe/London — import it as a column), or the default time zone from Settings. People whose 9:00 has already passed get it straight away, so set Send at a day ahead.

A/B and multivariate tests

Tick A/B test in the editor to try different versions on part of the list and send the best one to the rest.

  • Give two or more subject lines, from names or send times (one per line), and/or a second version of the content (HTML). Testing more than one thing at once makes every combination — a multivariate test — up to 8 versions, labelled A–H.
  • Test on: the share of the audience that gets the test, split evenly between the versions (20% is typical; give each version at least a few hundred people for a reliable result).
  • Winner by open rate or click rate, picked automatically after the hours you set — or I will pick.
  • While it waits the campaign shows as testing. The report’s A/B test tab compares the versions, and Send this one picks a winner early. The winner goes to everyone held back.
  • A test of send times only goes to the whole list, split across the times — there is nothing left to send a winner to; use the result next time.
  • The preview has a Version menu to see each one.

Automations

An automation sends a series of emails by itself, person by person, as things happen — a welcome series for new subscribers, a birthday offer, a follow-up to people who clicked. Each person goes through the steps at their own pace.

Start one. Automations › Welcome series makes a ready-made series (welcome email, three days later a second email, then a tag for people who clicked or an offer for people who did not). New automation starts empty.
Choose the trigger on the left: what makes someone start.
Add the steps with Add step. Click a step to open or close it; use ↑ ↓ ✕ to move and remove.
Send a test of each email from its step.
Save and turn on. From then on, people who meet the trigger start it. Pause holds everyone where they are.
TriggerStarts when someone…
Joins a listis added to the list (or any list) and is active: by hand, a form, the API, the preference page or another automation — not by an import. With double opt-in, when they confirm.
Gets a tagis given the tag.
A datehas a date attribute (Birthday, Customer since) whose day and month is today — or Days before today. Checked once a day from the hour you choose; repeats every year. Dates can be written 1990-03-14, 03/14/1990, 14.03.1990 or 03-14.
Opens / Clicks in a campaignfirst opens, or first clicks in, that campaign (or any campaign).
API eventis sent an event of that name through the API — “quote-requested” from your website, “job-shipped” from the MIS.
Signs up on a formsigns up on that form (or any form).
Reaches a lead scorehas their lead score go up past the number you set. Someone whose score hovers around it starts once.
StepDoes
Send emailSends an email: subject, preview text, template and HTML body, with placeholders and [IF] blocks. Its opens and clicks are tracked and shown on the step.
WaitWaits so many minutes, hours or days before the next step.
Wait untilWaits until a condition holds — clicked any campaign, Tag has Ordered — or at most so long, checking every minute. Follow it with an If / else on the same condition to treat the two outcomes differently.
Random splitSends each person down Path A or Path B at random, in the share you set — to test two follow-ups against each other. Compare the emails’ numbers on each path.
Lead score ±Adds (or, negative, takes away) lead-score points.
Notify staffEmails your staff about this person — their details, score, tags and recent emails, with your note (placeholders work: [FIRSTNAME] from [COMPANY] is hot, score [SCORE]). Empty address = your reply-to or From address.
CRM follow-upAdds a follow-up task for the account’s rep in the MIS CRM, due so many days later, with a title and notes. Only for contacts imported from the CRM (others are skipped and the activity feed says so).
If / elseChecks one condition — any segment condition, such as Campaign activity clicked any campaign or Tag has VIP — and follows the Yes or No branch. Each branch has its own steps; afterwards both carry on with the step after the if.
Add tag / Remove tagTags or untags the person (adding a tag can start another automation).
Add to list / Remove from listMoves them between lists.
End the journeyStops here for this person.
  • Each person goes through an automation once, unless you tick Let people go through it again. Date automations run once a year by their nature.
  • Someone who unsubscribes, bounces or is suppressed leaves the automation at their next step.
  • The list shows how many people are in each automation now, how many finished and how many emails it has sent; the editor shows each email’s numbers.

The campaign report

Click a sent campaign. The top shows progress and the totals: delivered to the server, opened, clicked, unsubscribed, bounced and spam complaints. The tabs:

  • Overview: every link with its clicks and the number of people who clicked it, and the reasons people gave when they unsubscribed.
  • A/B test (test campaigns only): each version’s results, and Send this one while it is waiting for a winner.
  • Click map: the email itself with each link outlined and labelled with its clicks and share of all clicks — so you can see whether the button or the picture got the clicks.
  • Activity: first opens and first clicks, hour by hour, for 48 hours after sending started — useful for choosing a send time.
  • Domains: results by the recipients’ email provider (gmail.com, outlook.com, your customers’ own domains). One provider opening far less than the others, or bouncing more, often means it is filtering you.
  • Recipients: everyone it went to with their status, version, opens and clicks, searchable.

Export CSV saves every recipient’s results for Excel. Reports in the menu puts all campaigns side by side — open, click, click-to-open, unsubscribe, bounce and complaint rates — with your averages; green is better than average, amber worse. Click a column to sort.

What good looks like — keep bounces under 2% and spam complaints under 0.1% (Gmail and Yahoo start filtering at 0.3%). A falling open rate over several campaigns usually means sending too often or to people who have lost interest.

List health

Sending again and again to people who never open tells the big providers your mail is unwanted. Under Deliverability › List health, enter a number of campaigns and press Count to find active subscribers who ignored all of them. Then Tag them “Inactive” — and send them a win-back campaign using a segment Tag has Inactive — or Unsubscribe them.

Public archive and RSS

Like Kit and beehiiv, Campaigns can publish past issues on the web, so new subscribers can read back and your newsletter is findable. Switch it on under Settings › Public archive and give it a title. Then tick Show in the public archive once sent in each campaign you want there.

  • <public address>/archive lists them, newest first, with a Subscribe link; each opens at /archive/<id>.
  • /archive/rss.xml is an RSS feed of the same, for feed readers and website widgets.
  • Archived issues are shown to an anonymous reader: no names (use [FIRSTNAME%%friend] fallbacks and [IF FIRSTNAME]…[ELSE]…[ENDIF] so they read well), no tracking and no unsubscribe link. For an A/B test, the winning version is shown.
  • Only sent campaigns appear, and only while the archive is switched on.

Transactional emails

Transactional emails are one email to one person, sent the moment something happens — order confirmed, proof ready, job shipped, quote sent — like Mailjet’s and Brevo’s transactional email. Your website or MIS asks for them through the API; Campaigns fills them in and sends them at once.

Make one under Transactional › New transactional email: a name, a key the API asks for (order-shipped), the subject and the HTML body, and optionally a template and a From address of its own.
Use the data. Your system sends values with each request, and each becomes a placeholder: {"orderNumber": "10432"} is [ORDERNUMBER]. The recipient’s own fields ([FIRSTNAME]…) work too when they are a subscriber, and so do [IF TRACKING]…[ENDIF] blocks.
Test it with Send test… and some sample data.
Send it from your system: POST /api/v1/send with {"template": "order-shipped", "to": "pat@example.com", "data": {…}} — to can also be {"email": "…", "name": "Pat Lee"}.
  • Transactional emails go to people who unsubscribed from your newsletters (a receipt is not marketing) but never to a suppressed or bounced address — the API answers 422 and says so.
  • They carry no unsubscribe link or bulk-mail headers, no tracking, and the footer is just your organisation and address.
  • The page lists how many of each have been sent or failed, and the most recent sends.
Receipts only — do not use transactional emails for offers or newsletters; that is what campaigns are for, and sending marketing this way breaks anti-spam law and gets accounts closed.

The API

The API lets your website, an online form service, Zapier or the MIS add contacts, tag them and start automations, without the Campaigns window.

Switch it on in Settings › API: tick Run the API on this PC (port 8791), choose This PC only or All network adapters if another computer on your network will call it, and press Save API settings.
Create a key. Create key shows it once — copy it somewhere safe. Replace key makes a new one (the old one stops working); Revoke turns access off.
Call it with the key as a bearer token: Authorization: Bearer iqk_… (or as the password of HTTP Basic authentication, the way Mailchimp clients send it).
RequestDoes
GET /api/v1/pingChecks the key.
GET /api/v1/lists, /segments, /campaignsLists them with their counts and statistics.
GET /api/v1/campaigns/{id}/reportA campaign’s results, links and domains.
GET /api/v1/contacts?email=&list=&tag=&status=&offset=&limit=Finds contacts (up to 1,000 at a time).
POST /api/v1/contactsAdds or updates a contact by email: email, firstName, lastName, company, attributes, lists (ids or names), tags, and status — subscribed (default for a new contact), pending (sends the confirmation email first) or unsubscribed.
GET / PATCH / DELETE /api/v1/contacts/{email or id}Reads, updates or unsubscribes one contact.
POST /api/v1/contacts/{email}/tags{"add": ["VIP"], "remove": ["Prospect"]}
POST /api/v1/contacts/{email}/events{"name": "quote-requested", "properties": {…}} — starts automations with that API event trigger.
POST /api/v1/sendSends a transactional email: {"template": "order-shipped", "to": "pat@example.com", "data": {…}}.
curl -X POST http://127.0.0.1:8791/api/v1/contacts \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer YOUR_KEY" -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
  -d '{"email":"pat@example.com","firstName":"Pat","lists":["Newsletter"],"tags":["Website"]}'
  • Answers are JSON; errors come back as {"error": "…"} with status 400 (bad input), 401 (wrong key), 403 (refused), or 404.
  • A contact who unsubscribed or is suppressed is not re-subscribed by the API.
Server to server only — the API refuses any request made by a web page in a browser, so it cannot be called from JavaScript on your website; call it from your website’s server, Zapier or the MIS. To reach it from outside your network, put a reverse proxy in front of it — do not expose the port directly, and keep the key secret.

Webhooks

Webhooks are the other direction: Campaigns tells another system when something happens. In Settings › Webhooks › Add webhook, give the https address that should receive them and tick the events:

EventSent when
subscribesomeone joins (or confirms)
unsubscribesomeone unsubscribes
profilesomeone changes their preferences or details
cleanedan address is disabled after bounces
complaintsomeone marks an email as spam
taga tag is added
campaigna campaign finishes sending

Each one is a POST of JSON — {"type": "unsubscribe", "firedAt": "…", "data": {…}} — with the headers X-ImposeIQ-Event and X-ImposeIQ-Signature: sha256=<hex>, the HMAC-SHA256 of the body with the webhook’s secret (shown when you add it and on Edit). Check the signature on the receiving end to be sure the request came from you. A delivery that fails is tried again after 5 and 30 seconds; the list shows the last result, and Test sends a test event.

Troubleshooting

ProblemWhat to check
“No mail server is set up”Fill in the suite’s Settings › Email, or give Campaigns its own server in its Settings, then Test connection.
The campaign paused with “Mail server problem”The server refused the login or did not answer. Fix the setting or wait for the server, then Resume.
Many emails “failed”Read the reason under each in the report’s Recipients tab. A sending limit reached? Lower the sending speed and Retry failed later.
Emails go to spamRun the domain check in Deliverability (SPF, DKIM and DMARC must be green), the content check in the editor, and look at the Domains tab. Send from your own domain through a sending service.
Unsubscribe or tracking links do not openThe public link address must reach the link server: link server switched on, the funnel or proxy running, and the address in Settings exactly as it prints (https://…). Try <address>/subscribe from a phone off your Wi-Fi.
“Port 8790 is already in use”Another program uses the port. Choose another port, and point the funnel or proxy at it.
Open rate shows 0%Tracking needs the public address and Track opens. Even then, many clients block images — look at clicks too.
Sign-ups stay “unconfirmed”Double opt-in is on and they have not clicked the confirmation link. Check the confirmation email reached them (spam folder) and contains [CONFIRMURL].
An automation did not startIt must be turned on; imported people do not trigger it; a date automation needs the date attribute in a recognised format and runs from its hour; each person goes through once unless re-entry is ticked.
“Recipients have no way to unsubscribe”Set a public link address or an unsubscribe mailbox in Settings.
The API answers 403The request came from a browser page, or (with This PC only) not addressed to localhost. Call it from a server, or listen on all adapters for another PC.
Good practice — only email people who asked to hear from you or are your customers; make unsubscribing easy and act on it; keep a steady rhythm rather than bursts; and remove people who never engage. It protects your reputation with the email providers as much as your customers’ goodwill.
Application

ImposeIQ MIS

The management system the rest of the suite feeds. An MIS — Management Information System — is what a commercial shop runs its jobs on: the estimate that won the work, the job ticket the floor works to, what each operation really cost, and the invoice that closes it. This one is built around the thing most print MIS packages cannot do — the floor reporting for itself. A DC-618 that finishes a job says so, and the board moves.

What it is for

Knowing where every job is, what it is costing against what it was quoted at, and what is about to be late — without walking the floor to find out.

What it is not

Accounting. It raises invoices and records payments against them so a job can be closed, but the books live in your accounts package.

Cost centers, stock & routings

Nothing can be priced until the shop exists in the software, so a new install comes up as a plausible small commercial printer in Texas: fourteen customers (retail, trade, broker and house pricing, a franchise shop, a dealer partner, a school-district in-plant, two Storefront customers and one prospect) and thirty jobs that between them come in by every route the MIS takes — typed in, converted from a quote, a Storefront web order (paid by card, or on a PO), a JDF ticket from a dealer's MIS by hot folder or JMF (one waiting for review, one released, one released over a finishing-check block, one rejected), and an Automation Workflows hot folder. Their artwork carries preflight results from Preflight PRO, callas pdfToolbox and PitStop (passed, failed, and fixed); most are imposed, one is blocked by the finishing check, and several are routed to a POLAR N 115, one of them cut from a saved cutter program. Invoices are there in every state — out, overdue, part paid and paid — plus a toner press, a B2 inkjet, a 20 × 26 offset, three guillotines, the Duplo finishing line this suite already knows about, a booklet line and a perfect binder — with paper at real-ish money. Every one of those numbers is a starting point, not a claim about your shop. Replace them in Cost centers & setup before you quote anything real.

A cost center is a machine or a bench with a burdened hourly rate, a run rate, and a setup time. The run rate is counted in whatever that center actually measures:

Rate basisCounted against
Press sheets / hourThe sheets the job runs, including makeready and spoilage.
Finished pieces / hourThe quantity ordered — addressing, packing.
Books / hourBound books, not the sheets that made them.
Flat chargeNo run time at all — prepress booked by the hour, outside work.
Note — A cost center can name a machine from Settings → Machines. That is what lets a JMF message from a DC-618 find the operation it belongs to rather than guessing.

A routing is a list of cost centers a job walks through in order — "digital business cards", "saddle-stitched booklet", "spot UV + foil cover". Picking one on an estimate drops the whole operation list in already ordered.

Estimating

The estimator prices the way an estimator does, and shows its working:

  • The imposition — how many up the piece runs on the press sheet, worked out with the same geometry the Imposer uses, both ways round, best yield kept. An estimate built on 8-up that imposes 6-up is how a shop loses money without ever finding out where.
  • The paper — net sheets, plus makeready sheets burned getting to color, plus running spoilage. All three are real stock the job pays for.
  • The time — setup and run for every operation, at that center's own rate and basis, with minimum charges applied where they bite.
  • The money — cost, markup, sell, margin, unit price and price per thousand. Markup and margin are both shown, because confusing the two is a classic way to quote a job at a loss.
  • Quantity breaks — the same job at 250 / 500 / 1,000, each one a full estimate, because the answer is never linear: setup spreads over more pieces and the unit price falls in a curve.

Outside services — a cutting die, trade foiling — are entered separately and marked up on their own, so the shop's press markup is not applied to something a trade house made.

Laid out for the finisher. When an estimate's operations include a Duplo DC (DC-618, DC-648 or DC-746), the imposition is the best one that DC can actually slit and cut, not just the best paper yield. Each column gutter uses two slitters, and the DC-618 has six, so 25-up business cards turned (five across) are out. A slit gutter must be 0 or 5–15 mm, so a 1/8″ gutter between columns is widened to 1/4″, and the cut gutter between rows is left as you set it. On 13 × 19 this gives the usual 24-up (3 × 8). How it runs shows which machine the layout was made for, and when it gave up yield it shows the best-yield layout and the reason. The paper, the press time and the job's finishing check all use this layout.

Will the sheet run? The press sheet is checked against every machine on the estimate. Presses are checked against their press-library limits; a press with no library record is read from its name, so "(SRA3)" means 13 × 19.2. Finishers are checked against their feeders, such as the DC-618's 330.5 mm across and the DFL-700's 385 × 660 mm. When the sheet does not fit, a red This sheet will not run card says which machines refuse it. It also offers the cut of the stock that goes through all of them, for example 12.5 × 19, 2 out of each 19 × 25, with one click to use it. A press sheet cut from a bigger stock sheet is costed and stocked in stock sheets. When the press operator books 40 sheets used, 20 stock sheets come off the shelf.

Custom dies: steel rule (DSM-1000) & flexible (UD-320)

A new die layout means a new die from a die maker, and the die is often the longest lead time on the job. There are two kinds, and the kind is a field on the die:

  • Steel-rule die for the DSM-1000 platen die cutter. It takes one die-board size whatever the sheet: 20.47 × 32.28 in (B2).
  • Flexible (magnetic) die for the UD-320 rotary die cutter. A thin etched plate that wraps the magnetic cylinder.

Add one with Add a steel-rule die (DSM-1000) or Add a flexible die (UD-320) on the estimate, or on a job's Routing & time tab. You can switch the kind on the die afterwards. Each kind has its own budget tiers, turnaround and rush in Setup.

  • What it is — the kind, new die or a die already on the shelf, a budget tier, number up, the operations on the die (cut, crease, perf, kiss-cut), the substrate, the rule height (steel rule only) and the die maker.
  • What it costs — the tier's budget, or the die maker's own figure when you have one. The tiers are budget allowances, not supplier quotes. Steel rule, from Duplo's DSM-1000 steel-rule die overview: Simple layout $250–$500, Typical B2 DSM-1000 job about $500 (the default), and Complex or heavily populated layout $800–$1,500+. Flexible dies run about $250 up to close to $2,000, with a median and average around $550: Simple layout $250–$450, Typical UD-320 job about $550 (the default), and Complex or heavily populated layout $650–$2,000. The die maker sizes a flexible plate from the cut-line area, and plate size drives the price. The real price depends on the layout (rule length or etched area, number up, detail), the operations and the substrate. Ask the die maker to itemize the die, any ejection rubber or creasing accessories, freight and rush.
  • How it is charged — passed through at cost (the default) or with its own markup, set per kind. It is an outside line, so the shop's press markup is never applied to it. Reusing a die costs nothing and waits for nothing.
  • Turnaround — the die maker's working days, editable per die. Steel rule defaults to 5 (rush 2); the overview gives no figure, so set it from your die maker. Flexible defaults to 5 (rush 2), because a die usually takes 4–5 production days. Rush uses the rush lead time and adds the rush surcharge (default +50%) to a budget figure. Neither source gives a rush figure, so those are guesses to edit.
  • Die maker file. On a new flexible die on a job, or in a die’s own form, Die maker file… saves a UD-320 drawing for Kocher & Beck as DXF or PDF. The MIS knows the die’s size and number up, so it draws a rectangle, rounded rectangle or oval and lists any crease or perf lines as not drawn. It can also tilt each piece 1° to the right (the printed artwork then has to be tilted to match) and add recommended nicks / ties, as in Digital Die Cut; a die with nicks can no longer be used with the waste separator. For any other shape, or to draw those lines, use Digital Die Cut, which writes the same file. Saving from a die’s form attaches the file to that die. Nothing is sent. The UD-310 is discontinued, so new flexible dies now default to the UD-320; dies already recorded against a UD-310 keep that, and its routing steps still count.

Die and artwork checklist. The estimate and the job card show a checklist for the kind of die. For a flexible die on the UD-320 it comes from the UD-310 product guide and Operation Manual:

  • Sheet 8.27 × 11.69 in to 15.35 × 20.47 in (210 × 297 to 390 × 520 mm), 106–400 gsm; 200 gsm minimum to use the separator. The largest workable cut area is 14.33 × 20.275 in (364 × 515 mm).
  • First cut at least 10 mm from the lead edge, because that cut feeds the sheet (12–15 mm on thin paper). 15 mm margins top and bottom, gutters at least 10 mm horizontal and 6 mm vertical. Turn each piece 1° on its own when it has straight cuts across the feed.
  • Register marks. Y mark: 3 mm wide, 100 mm long, centred on the sheet width, 5 mm from the edge. X mark (when reading X and Y): 3 mm wide, 25 mm or longer, 100 mm from the sheet centre face up (76 mm face down), 5 mm from the edge.
  • Dieline colours for the die maker: cut red, score green, kiss cut blue. Creases are a three-knife score.
  • A flexible die lasts about 100,000–200,000 impressions, depending on the die lines and stock. The Dies list counts it against 100,000.

The estimate shows the die line, the date the die would arrive if the quote were approved today, and the earliest delivery: the die's turnaround plus the working days from die to delivery (default 2). The quote PDF says Delivery: N working days from approval. Working days follow the shop's work calendar, so weekends and shop holidays are skipped.

On the job. The die card follows the order: To order → Ordered → Received → In use. Mark ordered records the order date and PO, and the die is due that many working days later. Until the die is received the die-cutting step (the DSM-1000 step for a steel-rule die, the UD-320 step for a flexible one) is held. The schedule will not plan it before the die arrives and shows a Die tag on it, and the floor cannot start it. The card warns when the die lands after the press run. When it lands after the job's due date, the job shows At risk. A die not ordered yet is counted from today, so the hold moves later every day nobody orders it. Mark received puts the die on the shelf in Dies, numbered, against the customer, at what it cost, as a steel-rule or flexible die. A repeat job can then pick Reuse a die on the shelf. Only dies of the same kind are offered, and the customer's own are listed first and marked ★.

Setup → Custom cutting dies has a block for each kind. Each block holds the tiers (label, low, high, budget, open-ended, which one is the default), the turnaround, rush turnaround and surcharge, the days from die to delivery, and whether those dies are passed through at cost or marked up. Dies and settings saved before there were kinds count as steel rule.

Quotes and turning one into a job

Save an estimate and it becomes a numbered quote with a validity date; a quote past that date reads as expired without anybody running a nightly job. Accept → create job turns it into a real job in one step, carrying the priced routing across with the estimated setup, run time and cost frozen onto each operation. That frozen number is what the floor's real time is measured against later — recomputing it from today's rates would quietly erase the variance the shop is trying to see.

Note — A customer's price tier (retail, trade, broker) is part of who they are, so a trade customer's quote is the same estimate at a lower sell without anybody remembering to discount it.

The job ticket

Every job carries its specification, its routing, its materials, its shipments and a full history. The history is written by the software on every path, not by whichever screen made the change — so when a job ships two days late, the shop can see exactly where the two days went.

A job's status mostly looks after itself. Start the first operation and it is in production; close the last one and it is finished; ship the whole quantity and it is shipped; invoice it and it is invoiced. On hold and cancelled are the two an operator sets on purpose, so they stick — deriving those would fight the person who set them.

Board, schedule and what is late

The production board is the job lifecycle left to right, cards sorted by priority and then by due date, late ones flagged. Drag a card to move it by hand; anything the floor reports moves it on its own.

The schedule plans every open job backward from its due date. The last operation lands on the due date, or the latest working day that still has room on that machine. Each earlier operation lands a set number of working days before the next one (Days between steps, 1 by default). A full day pushes work earlier, and a long operation can be split across days. Work that cannot fit before today goes on today, and the job is marked At risk: it will not make its date as planned. Operations already running are always on today. That is how a shop sees on Tuesday that Thursday is already over-booked, instead of finding out on Thursday.

Each job's Routing & time tab shows the planned day for every operation.

Work calendar

In Cost centers & setup → Work calendar you set how jobs are scheduled (Plan backward from the due date, or Put all work on the due date for the old behaviour), the days between steps, and the shop's working days. Below that, add holidays, overtime and downtime. Pick a date and either the whole shop or one machine, then the hours available that day: 0 for closed, or for example 4 for a Saturday of overtime. Add US holidays adds New Year's, Memorial Day, July 4, Labor Day, Thanksgiving (and the day after) and Christmas, moved to the nearest weekday when they fall on a weekend.

Each cost center keeps its own capacity hours per day, and can have its own working days (untick Same as the shop calendar), for example a press that also runs Saturdays. On the Schedule, days a machine does not work are shaded, and the load % is measured against that day's hours.

Pick 1 day or 7 / 14 / 21 / 30 days at the top. Use ‹ / ›, Today or the date box to move around, and the department list to show one department. In the multi-day grid, click a day heading or any cell to open that day.

The 1-day view shows one lane per machine: a shift bar with each job as a block in run order (the dashed red line is the end of the shift; striped blocks run past it), then a card for every operation. On a card you can Start, Pause and Finish the operation, open the job, or move the job's due date one working day with ← Due / Due →. You can also drag a card onto a day in the week strip at the top to make that day the due date. The whole job then re-plans around the new date. Undo move puts the last one back.

Run order. The number on each card is the order that machine runs its waiting work in. Drag a card up or down within its machine, or use ▲ / ▼, to change it. Cards set by hand show a filled number. Work already running (▶) always stays first. The shop-floor queue follows the same order.

Move to another machine. Drag a card onto another machine's lane, or use Move to machine… on the card. Work can only move between machines in the same department, for example DC-648 to DC-618 or HC-550i to HC-680i, and not while it is running. Set-up time becomes the new machine's, and run time is adjusted for the speed difference. The job's quoted cost stays as it was sold. The move is recorded in the job's History.

At risk. The Dashboard shows an At risk count and list: jobs the schedule says will miss their due date but are not late yet. An alert, Job at risk of being late, is sent once per job (Telegram, email or whatever you have set up in Settings → Notifications). It is sent again only if the job gets back on track and then slips again, or its due date changes.

Keys — ← / → change day (or week), T today, D 1-day view, W 14-day view, R refresh.

Floor performance: machines, estimates and Duplo ROI

At the top of Reports, pick a period (last 30, 90, 180 or 365 days). Three reports read the time your floor booked on operations finished in that period. Each one exports to PDF.

Machine performance shows, for each machine, hours planned vs hours run and how that compares with the estimate (over 100% means faster than quoted). It also shows make-ready vs running time, utilization (hours run against the hours the work calendar says the machine was available), waste %, real speed against rated speed, and how much of the time came straight from the machine (JMF) rather than being keyed in.

Estimate vs actual by machine tells you where your rates are off. Once a machine has at least 3 finished operations and is 10% or more away from its rated speed or set-up, it suggests the real numbers, for example "Runs 22% faster than your estimate." Apply writes them to the cost center, so new estimates use them. Jobs already sold keep the numbers they were quoted on. Setup must be unlocked to apply.

Duplo automation ROI compares the time your Duplo machines actually took with the same pieces done by hand. For each machine you can set the manual process it replaces, minutes per 1,000 finished pieces (books, for binders), manual set-up per job, and how many people it takes. Enter the shop's loaded labor rate and, if you like, what the machine cost, and it shows hours and dollars saved, a yearly figure at the current pace, and payback. The starting minutes are estimates, so set them to what the shop really did before. The PDF prints every assumption it used. It counts labor only: less waste, work brought in-house and new work won are on top of it.

Press library: adding and removing your presses

Cost centers & setup → Press library lists 68 production presses from Canon, Ricoh, Sharp, Konica Minolta, HP, Xerox, Fujifilm and Kyocera: color and mono toner, HP Indigo, sheetfed and UV inkjet, and roll-fed inkjet. Filter by maker or technology, or search. Add to shop makes the press a cost center. The window shows its speed as press sheets per hour, one-sided and two-sided, plus a starting burdened rate, set-up, makeready sheets and click cost. Change any of them, then save. Add your own model covers a press that is not listed. To take a press out, use Remove on the cost center list. If it is still on an open job, you are offered Deactivate instead.

What the MIS does with it:

  • Speed. Makers quote Letter/A4 pages per minute, B2 sheets per hour, or metres per minute. The library turns each into press sheets per hour on the press's own sheet. Letter/A4 ppm runs two-up on a 13 × 19 class sheet, so the sheet rate is half the page rate (the maker's SRA3 figure is used when published). Two-sided work runs at half speed, except on presses that print both sides in one pass. Figures marked ≈ were worked out rather than published, so check them against your own press.
  • Two-sided jobs are estimated at the press's two-sided speed and charged two clicks per sheet.
  • Sheet size. An estimate warns when the press sheet is bigger than the press takes, or needs its long-sheet option.
  • Roll-fed presses are rated in Letter/A4 pages. Estimate them with an 8.5 × 11 sheet.
  • The Schedule, machine performance and estimate-vs-actual reports use the press like any other cost center.
  • In the Imposer, each press in the shop appears in the sheet-size list (🖨) at its maximum sheet.

Export to QuickBooks

Invoices → Export to QuickBooks writes a file QuickBooks can import. Pick a format and a date range:

  • QuickBooks Online: invoices (CSV). In QuickBooks Online go to Settings → Import data → Invoices and choose the file. It has one row per invoice line, with dates as MM/DD/YYYY. You can import up to 100 invoices at a time. Intuit does not allow this import when sales tax is switched on in the company; the window warns you when that applies.
  • QuickBooks Desktop: customers, invoices & payments (IIF). In QuickBooks Desktop go to File → Utilities → Import → IIF Files (back up the company file first). New customers are added. Payments arrive un-applied, so apply each one to the invoice named in its memo.
  • Payments received (CSV). A plain list for your records or a bookkeeper. QuickBooks Online cannot import payments from a file on its own.

By default only invoices and payments not exported before are included. Once the file is saved they are marked, and a small QB tag appears next to the invoice number. Draft, void and sample invoices are never exported. Under QuickBooks item and account names, enter your product/service item, income, receivable, deposit and sales-tax names exactly as they appear in QuickBooks. They are remembered for next time.

On a job's Job ticket tab, Share a status link publishes a page the customer can open any time. It shows where the job is (Order received, Proof, In production, Finished, Shipped), the production steps with the one on the machine now, the due date, and shipments with tracking links. It shows no prices, costs or internal notes. Copy, Open or Email to customer the link. The page updates by itself a few seconds after anything changes on the job. Stop sharing takes it down, after which the link says it is no longer active.

The page is served from your published Storefront site on Netlify, using the same collection key as online orders, so nothing on this PC is opened to the internet. Publish the storefront once after updating ImposeIQ to add status pages to it. If an update cannot reach the site, the job shows Last update failed and it retries on the next sweep.

Online proof & approval

On a job's Job ticket tab, the Online proof card sends the customer a link to a soft proof. Click Send a proof…, tick the artwork files to show (PDF pages, JPEG or PNG, up to 80 pages; Add another file… for a proof that is not attached to the job), check who it goes to and the message, then Publish proof. ImposeIQ renders each page on this PC, puts it on your Storefront site and marks the job Proof out. Tick Email the link from the website to send it through the storefront's Resend or SendGrid email; if the site has no email set up, your mail app opens instead.

The customer sees every page with a dashed trim line (bleed shaded), can zoom, and clicks anywhere on a page to pin a numbered comment. They type their name as a signature and choose Approve, Approve with the small changes I noted (you can switch this choice off) or Make changes and send me a new proof. Approving needs a tick confirming they checked spelling, wording, numbers, size and layout. Each version can be answered once; the shop gets an email, and the customer gets a copy if they gave an address.

ImposeIQ collects the answer every two minutes (or click Check for an answer):

  • Approved ticks Proof approved by the customer with their name, moves the job to Ready and raises the Proof approved notification.
  • Approved with changes does the same and adds a note to the job that the changes must be made before it runs.
  • Changes requested moves the job back to Prepress and raises Proof changes requested. Fix the art and click Send new version…; the same link shows v2 and the customer can still look at v1.

Every answer is filed in the job's artwork folder under Proofs as an approval record PDF: who answered, when, from what internet address and browser, what they ticked, their notes, and each page with their pins drawn on it. Approval record (PDF) opens it. The pictures the customer saw are kept in the same folder.

When the job also has a customer status link, the status page shows a Review and approve the proof button while a proof is waiting, and the proof page links back to the status page. Withdraw link takes the proof down; the versions and answers stay on the job. Like status pages, proofs are served from your Storefront site with its collection key — publish the storefront once after updating ImposeIQ to add proof pages to it. Shops that still approve by phone or in person can keep using the manual Proof checkboxes.

Use a phone as the barcode scanner

No USB scanner at the machine? On Shop floor, click 📱 Phone scanner, then Turn on phone scanner. Point the phone's camera at the QR code shown and tap the link. The ImposeIQ Scanner page opens on the phone.

  • Tap Scan barcode and take a photo of the barcode on the job ticket or press sheet. The page reads it and sends it to the PC. Get close enough that the barcode fills most of the photo, and avoid glare. You can also type a job number and tap Send.
  • On the PC, a phone scan works like a USB scanner. On Shop floor it looks the job up. If a text box has the cursor, it types the code there. Anywhere else, it opens the job.
  • The phone shows each job it scanned: number, title, customer and where it is. Prices and contacts are never sent to it, and it cannot change anything.
  • It reads the MIS job barcode (Code 39) and Code 128 on any phone. Android phones also read QR and other codes.
  • The phone must be on the same network as the PC. The first time, Windows may ask to allow ImposeIQ on private networks; allow it. The phone stays paired even after a restart. New pairing code unpairs every phone, and Turn off stops it.
  • A live viewfinder, which scans continuously without taking photos, needs a secure (https) page. On the shop network the page uses the photo method instead. If the PC is reached over Tailscale with https, the live camera is used automatically.

The shop-floor station

Sized for somebody standing at a machine with a scanner: big type, big buttons, one input with the cursor already in it. Scan the job barcode off the sheet and the job comes up with its operations; Start, Pause and Finish book real time against the operation, and Finish asks for the good count, the waste and the sheets used.

Tip — The barcode is the same number the Imposer prints on the sheet. Point MIS job numbers at the suite's shared DC barcode pool in Cost centers & setup and one scan means the same job on the press, on the DC and in the MIS. The station also accepts the job number typed by hand, because an operator holding a sheet should not have to know which number they are looking at.

That is the station on the shop PC itself. To put the same job of work on a tablet at the machine — its own queue, its own operator, and no pricing anywhere on it — see Accounts, terminals & who sees what below.

Accounts, terminals & who sees what

Everything above assumes one PC in the office. A shop with a prepress operator and people on the floor wants more screens than that — and the moment a second screen can change a job, the question stops being "what does this screen show" and becomes "what is this person allowed to do".

Two things on this screen sound alike and are not. Getting them the wrong way round is the single easiest mistake to make here, so they are named differently everywhere in the app:

WhatWhereWhat it actually does
Station profile Appearance, on Cost centers & setup Decides which sections this screen offers — the shipping bench does not need Inventory in its nav. A convenience. It hides menu items; it stops nothing.
Terminal Accounts & terminals A real machine with a real key, allowed onto the MIS over the network. A credential.
A profile is not a permission. Hiding the pricing section on a floor screen was always worth doing and was never protection: the request that fetches a job would still have carried its margin, and anyone who opened the browser's network tab could read it. That is what the accounts below are for, and it is why the checks happen where the work happens rather than in the screen.

Three kinds of screen, and they are deliberately different things:

The office

The full MIS. Estimating, quotes, customers, inventory, purchasing, dispatch, invoicing, reports. You and whoever answers the phone.

Prepress

The same application, signed in as Prepress. The job ticket, the artwork and the routing — and no price anywhere on it.

The shop floor

A web page on a tablet at the machine. One queue, one job, four buttons. Nothing to install and nothing to update.

What each kind of account can do

Five kinds, and a shop can hand one person an extra power without inventing a sixth.

AccountWhat it can do
Owner / manager Everything — pricing, margin, job costing, issuing invoices and taking payments, approving a purchase order, and who else has an account.
Estimator / CSR Customers, estimates, quotes, jobs, dispatch. Sees price and cost, because that is the job. May raise a purchase order and draft an invoice; the owner approves the spend and posts the invoice.
Prepress The ticket, the artwork, the routing and the running order. Never sees what a job sells for or what it costs.
Shop floor operator One machine's queue. Start, pause and finish an operation, report the good count and the waste, book the material actually used, flag a problem. Sees the proof, not the customer's file.
Service account Not a person. Storefront orders coming in and machines reporting for themselves. It can bring work in and cannot look at the shop.
Money comes off, it does not come back as zero — when an account cannot see costs, the price, the estimate, the per-operation cost and the paper's unit cost are simply not in the answer. They are not blanked or set to nothing, because a sell price rendered as $0 reads as "this job earns nothing" and a missing margin divides into nonsense three screens later. Everything the work needs — quantities, minutes, stock, sizes, dates, the routing — is all still there.

Two smaller controls sit alongside the five:

  • An extra power for one person — the prepress operator who also does the buying gets purchasing added to their account rather than being promoted to something they should not be.
  • Something taken away — and taking away always wins, including over the role. A permission somebody is arguing about is a permission they should not have.

Putting a screen on the shop floor

Five minutes, once per screen. Everything is on Cost centers & setup → Accounts & terminals.

Make the owner account. Until the shop has one, the MIS runs on this PC alone and the rest of this screen stays out of your way. Your name, a short sign-in name, and a password of at least eight characters. Only a salted hash of it is stored, so if it is lost the account has to be replaced — keep it where you would keep a safe combination.
Turn shop floor access on. Pick Shop network — the floor terminals, leave the port alone unless something else on the PC wants it, and Save. The address box lists the addresses this PC actually has; it is a picker rather than a text box so a typo cannot become a listener nobody can find.
Add a terminal. Name it after the machine it will sit at — DC-648 #1, Packing bench — and set its department. That is what tells the screen which queue to show, so nobody has to keep fourteen tablets configured correctly.
Write the key down once. Creating a terminal shows its key, and that is the only time it is ever shown. Copy it.
Open the address on the tablet. The Open this on a shop floor tablet box has the address; type it into the tablet's browser, paste the key in, and that screen has set itself up. It remembers itself from then on, including through a reboot.
Add your operators. A name and a number they will tap in. Now the work gets booked to a person instead of to a machine, which is the whole reason the job costing is worth reading.
The key is shown once and cannot be looked up. Nothing stores it — only a salted hash — so there is no screen anywhere in the MIS that could show it to you again, and no support call that can recover it. If a key is lost, or a tablet walks off, use New key: the old one stops working immediately and that screen is set up again with the new one.
Tip — a screen with nobody signed in still shows the queue. That is deliberate: a board bolted to the wall by the folder is meant to be glanced at, and making somebody tap a number in to read it is how a board stops getting looked at. It cannot report any work until somebody signs in, because work reported by nobody is exactly what job costing cannot use.

The operator's phone

A terminal stays at one machine. An operator's phone goes with the operator. They pick the machine they are at (or scan the job ticket), see that queue, and start, pause, finish or flag the work. A second tab, Workflows, shows what the Workflows engine is running, what failed, and any approval step waiting for somebody, so the proof check at the press can be answered at the press.

  1. Turn on Shop floor access (Cost centers & setup → Accounts & terminals). Shop Wi-Fi works on the floor. Behind tailscale serve also works off-site and gives the phone a live camera viewfinder.
  2. Under Shop floor terminals, click Add a phone and name it after whose phone it is.
  3. A pairing QR code appears. Point the phone's camera at it and tap the link. The phone pairs itself, and the operator taps their PIN. Use Share → Add to Home Screen to make it an app icon.

Jobs tab: the chips across the top pick the department, then the machine. The phone starts on the operator's own department. Tap a job to see its steps. The likely step is already picked, and the operator can tap another. Start, Pause, Finished (good and waste counts) and Problem work the same way as on a terminal. Work is booked to whoever signed in on the phone.

Scan tab: scans the barcode on the job ticket and opens that job. Over plain http the phone takes a photo and reads the barcode out of it. Over Tailscale https it opens a live viewfinder.

Workflows tab: approvals show the instructions and the held files. Tap a PDF or image to look at it, then Approve (the workflow carries on) or Reject (a reason is required, and it is passed to the workflow's reject action). The decision is logged as "Name (phone)". Operators and prepress can approve, and estimators can only watch. To stop one person approving, deny workflow:approve on their account.

Tip — supervisors and prepress can skip pairing: open /op on the shop PC's address and sign in with their own MIS login. A lost phone: edit it under Shop floor terminals and tick Switched off, and it stops working at once. Anything done with no signal is kept on the phone and sent when it reconnects. A double tap still books only once.

Operators, the number they tap in, and badges

An operator is not an account. They have no password, they cannot sign in to anything else, and they exist for one reason: so the twelve minutes that just went onto a job have a name on them.

At the terminal they tap a four-digit number, or scan their badge if the shop has a wedge scanner — the screen takes either without being told which is coming. It is tried on every digit from the fourth, so a four-digit number needs no Enter key and a longer one still works.

Four digits, honestly — that is ten thousand possibilities, and it is not a password. It is defensible because of what it actually guards: it says which operator is standing at a terminal that has already been let onto the shop network and issued a key by somebody in the office. It cannot be used from anywhere else, it grants nothing but reporting work, and a screen that gets it wrong a few times has to wait — the wait doubles each time, so guessing your way through is slower than walking round and asking. Take the terminal away and the number is worth nothing at all, which is the design rather than a gap in it.
  • The obvious numbers are refused — 1234, 4321, 0000, and anything counting up or down. Between a third and a half of all PINs ever chosen are in that handful.
  • Nobody is still signed in the next morning. An operator is cleared after about ten hours, so the first job of the day is never booked to whoever closed up last night.
  • Removing an operator keeps their work. The hours already booked stay on the jobs they went onto.

Shop floor access and the remote board are two different things

Both put the MIS on another screen, and they are not interchangeable.

Remote boardShop floor access
What it is for Looking at the shop from a phone. The floor reporting its own work.
Can it change anything? No — it answers reads and nothing else, and refuses anything that is not a read before it can reach the data. Yes. That is the point of it.
Who can open it Anybody on your tailnet. Only a screen holding a key you issued.
Where it listens Its own port, over Tailscale. Its own port, on the shop network.

Turning one on does not turn the other on, and turning one off does not turn the other off.

Reachable fromWhat it means
OffNothing outside this PC can reach the MIS. The default, and where a shop should leave it until it actually wants a terminal.
Shop networkWhat the floor terminals use. Binds to one address on one adapter — never to everything this PC is plugged into, which on a machine with a second network card or a VPN up means something nobody intended.
Loopback, behind tailscale serveListens on this PC only and lets Tailscale put it on the tailnet, with a real certificate. For reaching the MIS from outside the building.
This PC's Tailscale addressPlain HTTP, bound to the tailnet address and nothing else.
Note — shop floor access will not start until the shop has an owner account. A listener that nothing can sign in to is not a feature; it is a support call. The screen says so rather than starting quietly and failing later.

Everything the MIS itself already promised still holds. The shop data is still written by this one PC and nothing else, which is what keeps it intact — a terminal asks this PC to do something, it never touches the file. Accounts live in their own file beside the MIS data rather than inside it, so no password, number or key can travel out in a backup. And nothing here can be changed while Cost centers & setup is locked, because deciding who can get into the shop is the same size of decision as changing the rates.

When the floor cannot reach the MIS

The terminal has a coloured dot next to the operator's name, and it is the first thing to look at.

On the terminalWhat it means
Green dotTalking to the shop PC, nothing waiting.
Amber dot, "3 waiting"Work has been reported and has not been sent yet. It keeps trying. The operator can carry on — the screen already moved when they tapped.
Red dotNo answer from the shop PC at all. Everything the operator does is held and sent when it comes back.
Back at the setup screenThat terminal's key was rotated, switched off or removed. Add it again, or issue a new key.
"Too many tries, wait…"Wrong numbers have been tapped in at that screen. It clears itself; the right number works once the wait is up.
  • Nothing is lost when the wifi drops. Each start and finish is queued with a ticket of its own before it is sent, and that ticket is reused on every retry — so however many times the request eventually gets through, and however many times a frustrated operator taps the button, the job is started once and finished once.
  • A refusal is not retried. If the shop PC answers and says no — the job moved, the step is already closed — the terminal stops and tells the operator, rather than quietly trying forever and leaving them thinking it worked.
  • Check what the shop PC thinks under Signed in now: every terminal and office screen currently signed in, who is standing at each one, and when it was last heard from. Sign every terminal out is the button for a tablet that has gone missing — the office stays signed in.

CRM & sales — the pipeline

The CRM is part of the MIS, not a second program with its own address book. Every account in it is an MIS customer: a prospect a rep adds on the road is a customer record marked Prospect, and the day it buys it becomes a Customer without anyone re-typing it. Open it from MIS → CRM & sales.

TabWhat it is for
PipelineEvery open deal as a card in its stage — Lead, Qualified, Quoted, Negotiating — with the open value, the weighted forecast (each deal's value × its chance of closing) and this month's wins. The By rep table shows each salesperson's accounts, pipeline, wins, visits in the last 30 days and overdue follow-ups; click a rep to see only theirs. Change a card's stage with the list at its foot.
AccountsCustomers and prospects with their rep, last contact and next follow-up. Gone quiet marks a customer nobody has contacted for 30 days (changeable under Phones & settings). Tick accounts and use Assign selected to… to hand them to a rep — their open deals and follow-ups move with them; the history stays with whoever did the work.
Follow-upsEvery open follow-up, overdue first. The red number on the CRM menu item is how many are overdue.
ActivityCalls, visits, emails and notes as they are logged — from the office or from a phone. A dot means the rep checked in with their phone's location.
Phones & settingsHow reps' phones reach the CRM, reminders, and each rep's phone link. See below.
  • Quotes win deals by themselves. A quote drafted from the CRM is attached to its deal. When that quote is marked Accepted in Quotes & estimates, the deal moves to Won and the prospect becomes a customer.
  • Who owns an account is the Sales rep on it. Set it in the account window or with Assign selected. A rep only ever sees the accounts assigned to them.
  • Events for Rep drafted a quote, Deal won, New prospect added and Follow-up coming due are in Settings → Notifications under CRM — sales team.

CRM on a salesperson's phone

Reps use a phone app built for the road. It has five buttons along the bottom:

ButtonWhat it does
TodayTheir pipeline and forecast, follow-ups that are overdue or due today, the week ahead, and customers who have gone quiet.
AccountsSearch their accounts. Each one has Call, Email, Directions and Check in, plus Log, Follow-up, Deal and Quote, and tabs for activity, deals, quotes & jobs, and contacts.
+ LogThe quick button: check in at a visit, log a call or note, add a follow-up, a deal, a quote or a new prospect.
PipelineTheir deals by stage; tap one to move it.
NearbyTheir accounts sorted by distance from where they are standing, and Prospect here, which starts a new prospect with the address of the building they are in.
  • Check in logs a visit with the phone's location. The first check-in at an account also pins where that account is, which is what makes Nearby and directions work from then on.
  • No signal is fine. Everything a rep logs is kept on the phone and sent when it has signal again — the chip at the top right says how many changes are waiting. Each change carries its own ticket, so one sent twice is only saved once.
  • When a rep taps Call and comes back to the app, it offers to log the call.
  • A rep sees sell prices only — never cost or margin — and never another rep's accounts. That is enforced on the shop PC, not just hidden on the phone.

Pricing a job from the phone

Quote on the phone asks for what a rep can answer in a lobby: the kind of job (one of your routings), the paper, the finished size, the quantity, sides and pages, and optional extra quantities. Price it runs the MIS's own estimator and shows the price, the price each and per thousand, and the price at each extra quantity. Shop default paper picks the stock that gets the most pieces on a sheet.

Send to office creates a draft quote in Quotes & estimates, marked as drafted in the CRM, with the rep's notes, and opens a deal for it at the Quoted stage. Nothing with a price on it goes to the customer until the office checks it and sends it.

Setting reps' phones up

  1. Give each rep an MIS account with the role Sales rep — Cost centers & setup → Access. Owners and estimators can use the CRM too, and see every rep.
  2. Assign their accounts in CRM & sales → Accounts.
  3. For reminders, add each rep to Settings → Notifications → People with the same name as their MIS account and a Telegram, ntfy or email address. They are told before a follow-up is due, and each morning get a list of anything overdue.
  4. Choose how phones connect in CRM & sales → Phones & settings:
ChoiceHow it worksGood to know
TailscaleThe phone talks straight to this PC through the MIS API. Turn the API on (Access, mode serve or Tailscale), install Tailscale on the phone, run tailscale serve --bg 8792 on this PC, then open https://<this-pc>.<tailnet>.ts.net/crm on the phone and sign in with the rep's MIS login. Live, and nothing leaves the shop. The PC has to be on. Phones only allow location and Add to Home Screen over the https address.
Online (Netlify)Publish the CRM phone site from Phones & settings (it uses the Storefront's Netlify token), then press Make phone link beside each rep and scan the QR with their phone. Opening the link signs that phone in. No app to install and it works anywhere. This PC syncs every 3 minutes while it is on; a rep's own accounts (sell prices only) and the pricing catalog sit on the site between syncs. A link is shown once — Switch off stops a lost phone at the next sync.
BothEach rep uses whichever suits them.

On either, open the page on the phone and use Share → Add to Home Screen so it opens like an app.

Connecting HubSpot, Salesforce & other CRMs

If the shop already runs its sales in a CRM, connect it in Cost centers & setup → CRM connections and the two stay in step, both ways. One CRM at a time — two CRMs syncing into the same customers would overwrite each other.

In the MISIn the CRMWhich way
Customers & prospectsCompanies / accounts / organizationsBoth ways
Contacts on a customerContacts / peopleBoth ways
Deals in CRM & salesDeals / opportunities, with their stageBoth ways
Quotes sent, accepted or declined; jobs opened and shipped; invoices paid; reps' calls and visits A note (or completed task) on the company's timelineMIS → CRM, once each
CRMWhat you need (the How to connect link on the card walks through it)
HubSpotA private app's access token, with read and write on companies, contacts and deals, and read on deal schemas.
SalesforceA connected app with the Client Credentials flow and a Run As user: your My Domain address, consumer key and consumer secret.
Zoho CRMA Self Client's ID and secret, and a one-time grant code, which is swapped for a lasting key on the first test. Pick your Zoho region.
PipedriveYour company domain and personal API token.
Microsoft Dynamics 365An Entra app registration (tenant ID, client ID, client secret) added as an application user in your environment, and the environment address.
  1. Pick the CRM, paste the keys, press Save & test connection. A green line names the CRM account it reached.
  2. Look at Deal stages…: how each CRM stage reads in the MIS and the other way. The first guesses come from the stage names.
  3. Tick Sync automatically, choose how often, and Save sync settings — or press Sync now.
  • The first sync matches before it creates. Companies are matched by name ("Acme Printing, Inc." is "Acme Printing"), contacts by email, so connecting a CRM the shop has used for years does not double anything. Blank MIS fields are filled from the CRM.
  • After that only changes move. A record changed on one side goes to the other. Changed on both since the last sync: When the same record was changed in both, keep decides — the newest edit (the default), always the CRM, or always the MIS.
  • Nothing is deleted on either side, ever. Companies that come in from the CRM arrive as prospects.
  • Work from before you connected is not posted as notes — only what happens from then on.
  • The keys are stored encrypted on this PC and never shown again; the card only says saved. Disconnect removes them. Re-match records forgets the links, and the next sync matches by name and email again.
  • If the sync stops — usually a key that expired or was revoked in the CRM — the card shows why, and the Outside CRM sync failed notification (Settings → Notifications, CRM — sales team) says so once.
  • It runs while ImposeIQ is open on this PC.

Webhook — any other CRM or app

For Monday, Keap, Copper, Freshsales, Close or anything else, the webhook on the same card sends MIS changes as JSON to an address you give it — a Zapier "Catch Hook", a Make custom webhook, an n8n webhook node, or the app's own. It works on its own or beside a connected CRM. Tick which changes to send: customers added or changed, deals added, changed, won or lost, quotes sent, accepted or declined, jobs opened or shipped, invoices paid.

  • Each POST carries event, occurredAt and the record in data, and an X-ImposeIQ-Signature header (an HMAC-SHA256 of the body with the signing secret, shown once when you save).
  • Send a test posts a ping event so you can map fields in Zapier or Make.
  • Also accept changes sent in lets the other system create or update companies and deals here, by POSTing to the MIS API at /api/v1/integrations/crm-webhook with the inbound key as a Bearer token. The MIS API answers only on your network or tailnet, so whatever sends in has to be there too.

Stock on a job

A job takes its stock from the estimate it is made from: the Stock picked in the Estimator becomes the job's first material line, with the planned sheets and the cost per sheet. You can change it on the job: open it, go to Costs, and use the Materials card.

  • Add stock adds another paper, or a supply such as varnish or foil. The cost comes from the catalog, and you can change it.
  • Change swaps a line's stock or re-plans its quantity. Once sheets have been booked against a line, its stock cannot change, because those sheets already came off the shelf. Add the new stock as another line instead.
  • Use for press picks which line the press operator's sheets used count is booked against. That is the first line.
  • Remove takes off a line that has not been used yet.

Changing the stock changes the job's planned material cost, which Estimate against actual uses. It does not change the job's price, because that was already quoted or paid.

Web orders. A storefront order says the paper in the customer's words, such as "16pt matte card stock". The MIS turns that into a catalog stock when the order comes in. First it uses the stock somebody chose the last time an order asked for that same paper. If there isn't one, it looks for a catalog stock whose weight or caliper and finish agree, and flags that match on the job so you can check it. "Matte card stock" with no weight is never guessed. When the size is known, the planned sheets are worked out from it. If nothing matches, the job shows a note on its Materials card. Pick the stock once, leave Use this stock for future web orders ticked, and every later order for that paper arrives with it. Any open web jobs already waiting for that paper get it at the same time.

Web sites and other systems that create jobs through the MIS API can do the same with POST /jobs/:id/materials and DELETE /jobs/:id/materials/:materialId.

Artwork on a job

Drop the customer's files straight onto the job's Artwork card, or click it to pick them. Either way the MIS takes its own copy into a folder named for the job (25-0413 Spring menu), so the customer can empty their Downloads folder and the job still has its art. Where the file came from is kept alongside it, for the day somebody asks which file was really used.

Attaching a file marks the job as having received artwork — it deliberately does not mark the proof as approved, because a file arriving is not a customer signing anything off. Open opens the file in whatever the machine uses for it, Show reveals it in its folder, and Remove takes it off the job and deletes the job's copy only — the customer's original is never touched. A file that has gone missing from this machine is marked rather than left as a button that does nothing.

Why this matters — Send to workflow hands the run these files. A job with artwork attached goes to a preflight-and-impose workflow complete; a job without one goes with its numbers only, and now says which it is before you press the button.

Is the artwork big enough?

Check resolution on the job's Artwork card measures every attached image against the job's own trim size and target dpi — a business card and a poster need a very different pixel count from the same JPG, so the job's own placed size is what it is judged against rather than a flat "300 dpi or bust" rule. Each file comes back with its effective dpi, its pixel dimensions and one of Image Rescue's own five verdicts — see Image Rescue → The five answers.

A file that only needs re-tagging or resampling gets a button right there — Re-tag or Enlarge — that runs Image Rescue on it without leaving the job. The rescued file is attached to the job beside the original rather than over it, so a bad enlargement or a better file arriving later never costs you the file the customer actually sent.

Note — An image that only fills part of the piece is judged more harshly than it deserves here, since the check assumes it covers the whole trim. Open it in Image Rescue directly to check it against the size it is really placed at.

A file too far gone to save is flagged rather than offered a button — the right move there is asking the customer for the original, not enlarging a JPG past the point it can help.

Machines reporting for themselves

This is the part worth having. JDF is the job; JMF is the conversation about it — and the JDF Bridge already speaks it. With Accept JMF status messages switched on, a finisher that reports the barcode it read off the sheet moves the matching job's operation without anybody scanning anything:

The machine saysThe MIS does
SetupStarts the operation and books the time as makeready, not run time.
Running / InProgressStarts the operation; the job reads as in production.
Stopped / SuspendedPauses it and books the time run so far.
CompletedCloses it with the amount and waste the machine reported.
Counts with no state changeBooks the good and waste against the operation and notes it.

Every entry booked this way is marked Machine on the job's time list, so a supervisor can always tell what a machine said from what a person typed. A prepress automation workflow reports the same way and closes the prepress operation when it finishes.

Estimate against actual

The single most valuable number in an MIS, and the one most shops cannot produce: what the job was quoted at against what it really cost. Actual labor is the minutes the floor booked, priced at the cost center's own rate; actual material is the sheets somebody counted. Each job shows the variance per line and the realized margin against the quoted one, and the Reports view ranks every finished job by how far out its estimate was — which is how a shop finds out its 20-minute makeready is really 45.

Inventory, vendors & buying

The number the Inventory screen leads with is free, not on hand. A rack with 6,000 sheets and 5,500 already promised to a job in production has 500 sheets, and an estimator who reads 6,000 sells the same pallet twice. On hand, claimed, free, on order and the reorder point sit side by side so that never happens.

Nothing ever writes a stock level directly. Every change is a movement with a reason attached — received against a purchase order, used on a job, counted, returned — and the level is what the movements add up to. History on any stock line shows every one of them. A shop that cannot explain why the system says 4,200 when the rack holds 3,800 stops believing the system, and then stops using it.

What happensWhat the shelf does
The floor closes a press operation reporting sheets usedComes off, against that job. The operator closing the operation is the only person who ever knows the real number.
A purchase order is receivedGoes on, and the line's real unit cost updates the stock's cost per sheet — a paper increase the estimate never sees is margin lost invisibly.
Somebody counts a rackSet to what was counted, dated, with the reason kept.
Free drops to the reorder pointThe nav badges it and the alert fires once. Coming back up re-arms it, so a stock that has been low for a fortnight says so once, not every half hour.

Purchase orders cover both halves of what a shop buys: paper, which comes back as sheets on a rack, and outside work — foiling, die cutting, perfect binding — which comes back as a cost on a job and moves no stock at all. An order can be received in parts, because half a pallet turning up is normal, and what is still outstanding stays visible until it lands. Once an order has been sent to the vendor its lines are fixed: the vendor is working from the copy that was sent, and quietly editing this one would make the receiving figures meaningless.

The buying list — everything at or below its reorder point, grouped by who it is bought from, with the quantity the shop said it reorders in. One button per vendor turns it into real orders. Set a reorder point only on the stock you actually watch; leave it at zero and that stock never appears.

Dies — steel-rule and flexible

The Dies screen under Materials keeps the cutting dies the shop owns: steel-rule dies for the DSM-1000 and flexible magnetic dies for the UD-320. A die is a tool, not stock — it is not used up, but it wears with every impression, it lives on a numbered shelf, and it goes missing the day the customer reorders.

On each dieWhat it holds
What it isDie number (D-0001 onward, or your own), type, machine, description, customer, finished size, number up, sheet size and the cut, crease and perf rule lengths.
Where it isThe shelf or rack, and — when it is checked out — who has it and for which job.
Cost and sourceDie maker (from the vendor list), cost, purchase date and PO number.
WearImpressions run against the expected life. New dies start at 250,000 for steel-rule and 100,000 for flexible — put your die maker's figure in. The bar turns amber at 80% and red at 100%, and the nav badges dies at 80% or more.
Jobs and fileThe jobs it has run, and the dieline or cut file kept with it (Attach… and Open).

Check out records who took the die and for which job; Check in adds the impressions it ran and the shelf it went back to, or sends it for repair. Record a run adds impressions without a check-out. Runs tied to a job also appear in that job's history. Every step — added, edited, out, in, run, repair, retired — is kept in the die's own history. Retire a die that is worn out or no longer needed rather than deleting it, so its history stays.

Gangs — several jobs on one press sheet

Short runs of the same stock and finishing cost more in setups than in paper. A gang prints several of them together on one sheet, the sheet goes through the cutter once, and the pieces are sorted back into their own jobs afterwards. Open Gangs under Work.

On the screenWhat it means
Proposed gangsEvery job that could still share a sheet, grouped by the planner. Each proposal shows the sheet drawn to scale, how many of each job fit, what each job will make against what was ordered, how full the sheet is, what it saves, and the Duplo finisher check.
Drag to change itDrag a job from one gang onto another, onto Start a new gang, or down to Running on their own. The layout is worked out again for just those jobs, and a combination that cannot work says why instead of drawing something that will not cut.
Create gangMakes the gang a record with its own number (G-…). The layout is worked out again at that moment, and refused if any finisher blocks it. Each job keeps its own record, shows the gang on its ticket and carries its share of the press cost.
Release → Start printing → Printed → CutMoves the gang along. Release needs approved artwork on every job in it; the jobs become Ready, then In production. Cut credits each job with what it made. Dissolve is available until printing starts and puts the jobs and their material back as they were.
Export filesAsks for a folder and writes the imposed press sheet (job marks and a Data Matrix for each job), a split sheet showing who is where, and the cutter program with a sort map.

What can share a sheet

  • The same stock and weight, sides, coating and finishing, and the same machines on the routing.
  • A grid. A Duplo DC slits the whole sheet and cuts across it, so every gutter must line up. Jobs of different sizes gang only when they share a width or a height; the planner leaves out layouts that waste more than the setups save.
  • Jobs that are creased, perforated or folded also need the same trim size, because a crease runs edge to edge.
  • One run length for the whole sheet, so each job's overrun stays small — within 10% or 25 pieces of what was ordered. A 5,000 piece job and a 50 piece job do not gang.
Check these before you rely on it. The saving shown comes from placeholder setup and sheet costs until they are set for your shop. Finishing is read from the routing's operation names (crease, perforate, fold, laminate, spot UV, foil and so on), so name operations the way the shop says them. Press sheets are front side only for now; a two-sided gang is flagged. DC and OMR marks are not drawn on gang sheets yet.
In a workflow. The Gang planner step (ImposeIQ apps) can run on a schedule. Plan only writes the report; Create the gangs and Create and release do the same as the buttons here. A gang that cannot be released is left planned and the log says why.

Spot UV and foil usage

The estimate now counts the varnish and foil a job will really use, instead of a flat consumables guess. On the estimator, the Spot UV & foil card takes the percent of each side that is coated; the varnish and foil show up as material lines, priced from your supplies, and a card on the right shows the amounts, the cost per sheet and the cost for the whole job.

PartHow it is worked out
VarnishExact. Area coated × average build in microns — one micron over one square metre is one millilitre. A 30% coverage at 40 µm on a 13 × 19 sheet is about 2.1 mL. A waste allowance (10%, listed as an assumption) is added for purge and what stays on the rollers.
Foil on the DFL-700The whole sheet length, whatever is foiled — the DFL runs foil at sheet speed. Roll width 320 mm.
Foil on the DDC-8000 in-line foilerOnly the band from the first foiled row to the last — it stops over bare areas. Rolls can be as wide as a B2 sheet. "Foil reaches" on the estimator sets how far down the sheet the foil goes; leave it at 100 if unknown.
PricesFrom the Inventory supplies called varnish and foil (varnish per gallon or litre, foil per roll). A new MIS starts foil at $128 a 394 ft roll, the Duplo toner foil list price. The DDC-8000 roll length and price are not known yet and start from the same figure.

When a job is made from the quote, the varnish and foil are added to the job's materials in the units the shelf counts them in, so running the job draws the stock down.

From the real plates

In the Automation workflow, the Spot UV / foil plates step now measures the plates it makes — the actual thickness map for varnish, and the rows and columns that carry foil — and writes coating-usage.json and the variables [var.varnishMlPerSheet], [var.foilFeetPerSheet] and [var.coatingCostPerSheet]. Give it the number of press sheets and it adds the job totals ([var.varnishMl], [var.foilFeet], [var.foilRolls], [var.coatingCost]). Run it on the imposed sheet so each plate page is one side of one sheet. Foil wider than the roll is flagged.

If an MIS job link step comes first and Put the measured usage on the MIS job is ticked (it is by default), the measured figures go onto that job: its varnish and foil lines and its history, and ROI reads them. The job is not re-priced — the quote has gone to the customer, and the history line shows what the estimate said against what the plates say.

In ROI

In Shop mode, ROI takes consumables per sheet for the DDC-8000, DDC-810 and DFL-700 from the varnish and foil your jobs actually use, weighted by sheets. Varnish goes to the coater the job ran on, foil to the foiler the estimate named. Until a job has coverage entered, ROI keeps its sample figure.

Check these. The varnish waste and the foil gap between sheets are allowances, not measurements. Entering a coverage guess is only as good as the guess — the plates give the true number once the artwork exists. Two-sided jobs count each coated side as its own pass.

Dispatch

Most print orders do not go out in one piece, to the billing address, with the printer's name on the box. So a delivery here is its own record: a quantity, its own copy of the address it went to, a carton list, and a bin code. Splitting an order is not a special mode — it is two deliveries with a quantity each, and the job knows what is still on the floor.

FeatureWhy it is there
Its own address copyA customer who moves next year must not silently rewrite where last year's boxes went.
Blind shippingThe shop's name appears nowhere — not on the packing slip, not on the carton label. Trade work is most of what a shop like this ships, and getting it wrong once loses the account.
Bin codeOne short code on every carton and job bag of a delivery, so nothing goes out three-quarters complete because two of the four boxes were still on the bench.
CartonsReal boxes with quantities, weights and their own tracking numbers — what a packing slip needs and what a person on a dock counts.
Packing slip & carton labelsTwo PDFs per delivery. Labels are 4 × 6, the stock every thermal printer in a print shop already has loaded, numbered “1 of 3”.
Tell the customerRaises the shipped alert with the tracking number and a link, and stamps the delivery — which is what stops the same customer being told twice by two people.

Carriers, tracking links and the address check all work with the line down: the tracking URL is built from the carrier's own public address, and the address check is a format check — a blank street, a four-digit ZIP, a state typed as “Tex”. It deliberately does not claim the address exists, because calling a format check “verified” is how a box goes confidently to a house that was demolished in 1998.

The Dispatch screen is the shipping desk's own list: every job finished and still waiting, and everything that has gone out with its tracking and carton count. One person doing the shipping should not have to open jobs one at a time to find the work.

Shipping and invoicing

Record a shipment with the carrier and tracking; shipping the whole quantity marks the job shipped. One invoice covers any number of that customer's finished jobs — a shop that ran four jobs for the same customer this week bills them once — priced at what each job was quoted at, which is what the customer agreed to. Paying an invoice in full closes its jobs.

Note — Orders placed on an ImposeIQ Storefront arrive here as real jobs on their own, with the customer created if they are new and the price the customer already agreed carried across rather than re-estimated.

Invoices, quotes & estimates on paper

Reports are for the shop. These three are for the customer, and they are written from the live record rather than from what is on the screen, so the PDF and the MIS can never disagree about what was quoted:

DocumentWhat it is, and where the button is
EstimateBudgetary. Carries the specification and the quantity ladder — the same job priced at every break on the quote, which answers “what if I take 5,000?” on the same sheet. On each row in Quotes & estimates and in the estimator once the quote is saved.
QuotationOne firm price with the validity date and a signature block for acceptance and the customer's PO number. Same two places.
InvoiceBalance due in a box at the top, the work described in the line items, payments already received listed underneath, and OVERDUE or PAID IN FULL stamped where it cannot be missed. On each row in Invoices.
Purchase orderAddressed to the vendor, with the account number and where to deliver. Marked DRAFT — NOT SENT until it is. On each row in Purchase orders.
Packing slip & carton labelsPer delivery, on the job's Shipping tab and on the Dispatch screen. Blind deliveries carry the customer's name instead of the shop's.

The letterhead, the wording and an optional logo are set in Cost centers & setup under Invoices, quotes & estimates. The logo is copied into the MIS folder rather than pointed at where you picked it, so it keeps printing after you tidy your desktop; with no logo the company name is set in type instead.

Getting it to the customer

Every one of these documents saves as a PDF wherever you choose and is offered to open. Three of them can also be emailed straight from the MIS with the PDF attached — a quote, from the row in Quotes & estimates or from the estimator once it is saved, and an invoice, from its row in Invoices. Estimates, purchase orders and packing slips are save-and-send-yourself.

What the Email button doesDetail
Where it sendsThe contact email on the customer record, filled in for you. No address on file and it says so and asks you to type one — it does not send to nobody.
What it writesThe whole message, ready: the contact’s first name, “Quote 1042 from <your shop> is attached as a PDF”, the acceptance instruction, and a signature built from your phone, email and website.
Before it goesThe draft opens with To, Subject and Message all editable, and the footer names the file it will attach. Nothing is sent until you press Send — an email leaves the building and cannot be recalled.
RepliesReply-To is set to the company email on your letterhead, so the customer’s answer comes back to the shop rather than to whatever account the server sends from.
The serverThe same outgoing mail account the suite’s job alerts use, set in Settings → Notifications → Email. With none configured the button explains that and offers a way straight to the setting instead of failing quietly.
LimitsAttachments are capped at 25 MB. On an unlicensed copy the attached file is renamed with “Demo” like any other output.
Nothing sends itself There is no automatic email on acceptance, on invoicing or on any other event. Every message is a button somebody pressed, and the log records that it went and to whom.

How a quote gets accepted

A printed quote carries a way to accept it. If your shop runs a customer-facing portal, put its address in the document settings and the quote prints an Accept this quote online link that opens the portal with the quote number already in the URL. With no portal — which is most shops — it falls back to Accept by email: a mailto link that opens the customer’s own mail app with your address filled in, the quote number in the subject, and the body already written with blank lines for their PO number and who authorized it. Nothing to install and nothing exposed to the internet. If there is nowhere for an acceptance to go, no link is printed at all rather than one that leads nowhere.

Why the PDF travels outward, not back A mailto link cannot carry an attachment — the standard defines no header for one and mail clients drop invented ones — so an acceptance link can open a pre-filled reply but can never bring the quote PDF back with it. That is the reason the shop sends the quote from the Email button in the first place: the customer’s acceptance is then a reply on a thread that already holds the document being accepted. In an email the customer can simply reply to, a mailto accept link would be the longer road to the same place, so the emailed version asks for the reply instead and only prints a link when it is a real https portal.

Reports and exporting to PDF

Eight reports, each with an Export PDF button beside it, plus Print job ticket on any job:

ReportWhat it answers
Estimate accuracyWhich quotes were wrong, and in which direction.
Sales by customerValue, cost and margin per customer.
Work in progressEvery open job, where it is and when it is due.
Department loadOpen operations and hours still to run.
InventoryWhat is on the rack, what is claimed, and what it is worth.
Purchase ordersWhat has been bought and what is still outstanding.
InvoicesBilled, received and outstanding.
Job ticketOne job: specification, routing, time booked and cost against estimate.

The PDF is built from the stored data rather than from what happens to be on screen, so the two can never disagree — and the same code would work with no window open, which is what a scheduled "email me the WIP report" needs. Pages turn to landscape on their own when the columns need the width, headings repeat on every page, and the footer carries a page count so a report handed over with a page missing is obvious.

Note — Estimate accuracy counts finished jobs only. A job halfway down its routing has booked part of its time against all of its estimate, so including it would report a saving on every job in production and make the average meaningless.

Alerts and notifications

The MIS raises nine events, and they go through the Suite's own notifier — the same one workflow and delivery alerts use. They appear in Settings → Notifications in a group of their own, so each is routed to desktop, email or text, and silenced, exactly like everything else. There is no second notification setup inside the MIS; the button on its setup screen just opens that tab.

EventRaised when
Quote acceptedA quote is accepted and becomes a job.
Order taken into the MISA storefront order arrives as a job.
Proof approvedThe customer signs off, so the floor can run it.
Job finished on the floorEvery operation on a job is closed.
Job is lateAn open job passed its due date.
Job shippedThe whole quantity went out.
Job put on holdSomebody stopped a job on purpose.
Invoice overdueAn unpaid invoice passed its terms.
Invoice paidAn invoice was settled in full.

Late jobs and overdue invoices are the two that go wrong by the clock rather than because somebody did something, so they are swept periodically rather than raised by an action. Each one announces itself once — a job that is a week late does not send the same alert every half hour until the whole category gets muted. Moving a job's due date is a new promise, so it is allowed to warn again against the new date. Check for late work now on the setup screen runs the sweep on demand.

Tip — A notification that fails can never fail the thing that raised it. A dead mail server does not stop a floor scan being recorded.

Appearance & themes

The theme selector sits in the header of every MIS screen, and again on Cost centers & setup. It is a per-machine preference, so the office terminal and the floor station can each be set the way that room needs.

ThemeWhen to use it
AutoFollows whatever this computer is set to, light or dark. The default.
DarkPinned dark, matching the rest of the Suite. Best in an office.
Light — PaperPlain neutral white. The safe choice for a bright room.
Light — LinenWarm off-white — easier over a long shift than pure white.
Light — SlateCool gray, lower contrast, for an office under fluorescent light where white glares.
Light — High contrastBlack on white with heavier borders. For the station next to a window or a roller door.

Each theme also carries a color per department — prepress, press, cutting, finishing, embellishment, bindery, mailing, shipping and outside work each get their own hue, mixed against that theme's own paper so the same board reads correctly on white, linen and near-black. The color is doing a job: on a board of thirty cards, "which of these are sitting in bindery" is a question you want to answer by glancing, not by reading every card.

Sample data on an install you have already been using — the MIS seeds its demo shop only on its very first launch. Once a data file exists it is never re-seeded, so a later build that ships a fuller sample shop is invisible on a machine that opened the app before it. Cost centers & setup shows which sample version this machine holds and offers Load the newer sample data when it is behind. Reloading is safe in both directions: records are matched by id so it never duplicates, anything you have booked real time, a shipment or an invoice against is kept, rates you have edited are never overwritten, and the job-number counter only moves forward.
Tip — A dark screen in daylight is genuinely hard to read, which is exactly where the shop-floor station usually lives. That is why the theme is not covered by the setup password below: whoever is standing at a screen can always make it readable, without the password that guards what the shop charges.

Locking Cost centers & setup

The rates every estimate is built from live on one screen, and on a terminal the floor shares that is usually a screen you would rather nobody wandered into. Password-protect this screen on Cost centers & setup puts a password on it.

What the lock covers: cost centers, stock, routings, the shop defaults, and clearing the sample data. What it does not: quoting, jobs, the board, the shop floor, shipping and invoicing all carry on untouched — and so does the theme.

  • It is enforced in the application's main process, not just hidden in the window, so the screens are not the only thing standing in the way of an edit.
  • It re-locks when the MIS window closes. There is also a Lock now button.
  • Changing or removing the password needs the current one.
  • Only a salted hash of the password is stored — the password itself is never written to the data file, and two installs using the same password do not produce the same hash.
Be clear about what this is — a gate, not disk encryption. It stops somebody wandering into the rates on a shared terminal. It does not protect the data from anyone who can reach the computer and open the file, and it is not a substitute for a Windows login on a machine that needs one.

The job code — one number for the whole suite

Every job in the MIS has a number, J-260001 style, and that number is now the one the rest of the suite works to. Before this you could easily have three names for one job: a template name in the imposer, a barcode number on the sheet, and the MIS job number in the office. Reconciling those after a reprint went wrong was somebody's afternoon.

In ImposeIQ, ImposeIQ Book and ImposeIQ VDP there is a Job… button in the header. Click it, pick the job — or scan the sheet, the search box takes a barcode wedge and Enter — and four things happen:

  • The job's own DC barcode number goes into the Number (1–250) field, and Auto-assign is switched off, because the number now comes from the MIS rather than from the next free slot.
  • The job code goes into the QR, alongside the user code, barcode, sheet number and filename. It is a new tick-box in DC Marks → QR content, on by default. One scan at the cutter or the folder now gets you the MIS ticket, not just the sheet's own number.
  • The job code leads the slug line on the sheet, ahead of the filename and the sheet size — it is the one thing on that line that identifies the work rather than describing it, so an operator holding a stray sheet reads the ticket number first.
  • When the sheet is exported, a line is written back onto the job's own history in the MIS — "ImposeIQ imposed — 8-up on 13 x 19 (job.pdf)" — so the job's timeline is the whole story and not just the part that happened after it reached the press.

In the Storefront there is nothing to pick: an order that the MIS has taken in shows its Job # in the order lists and in the order itself, so the person on the phone about an order and the person looking at the board are quoting the same number.

The 1–250 limit is the DC's, not ours. The barcode field on a DC-618/648/746 reads a number from 1 to 250, so J-260001 cannot go in it — the job's DC pool number can, and that is what gets printed. If a job has no pool number, or its number is outside 1–250, the app says so and leaves the field alone rather than truncating it into what would be a different job's number. The job code still goes in the QR and the slug line either way. To give new jobs a pool number, point MIS job numbers at the shared DC pool in Cost centers & setup.

Nothing here can change a price, a routing or a status from outside the MIS — an app can find its job and add a line to its history, and that is all. The button hides itself in a build with no MIS, so you never see a control that cannot work.

Application

Image Rescue

What it is for

A customer sends a picture and somebody has to decide, before the job goes on press, whether it will print. Image Rescue answers that in a sentence, and then does whatever is worth doing about it.

It is deliberately not a magic button. Of the files that arrive labelled “low resolution”, a large share are perfectly good and only tagged wrong, and a smaller share cannot be saved by any amount of processing. Telling those two apart is worth more than the enlarging is.

The only number that matters

Effective dpi: the pixels in the file divided by the inches it occupies on the finished piece. Nothing else is a resolution.

The file saysWhat is actually true
3000 × 2000 pixels, tagged 96 dpi, placed 10″ wide 300 dpi. Perfect. Only the tag is wrong — re-tagging fixes it and does not touch a pixel. This is the commonest case there is.
1200 × 800 pixels, tagged 300 dpi, placed 8″ wide 150 dpi. The tag says 300 and the tag is irrelevant: placed at twice its natural size it is half the resolution.
960 × 640 pixels, tagged 96 dpi, no placed size given 96 dpi at 10″ wide — because with nothing else stated, the tag is what decides the size it lands at.
Why the tag matters at all — a designer placing a 96 dpi file at 100% gets it three times too big and soft, scales it down to fit, and reports back that your artwork is low resolution. Half the resolution complaints a print shop takes are this and nothing else.

The five answers

VerdictWhat it means and what to do
Already press readyEnough pixels at the size it is placed. Nothing to do.
Only the dpi tag is wrongThe pixels are right; the tag is not. Re-tagging is byte-for-byte lossless — the image data is not touched at all.
Can be enlargedWithin what this kind of content carries. Go ahead.
Will be softPast the comfortable ceiling. It will print, and it will look soft next to the rest of the job. Offered as an override, not as the obvious next click.
Too small to saveNothing recovers detail that was never captured. The screen gives you the exact pixel size to ask the customer for.
Ask for vector artworkIt is a logo held as pixels. It will enlarge better than a photograph would, but the right answer is the AI, EPS or PDF from whoever drew it — that prints perfectly at any size and ends the conversation permanently.

The ceiling depends on the content, because content behaves differently. Hard-edged line art reconstructs well and carries about 4×. A photograph carries about 2×; past that, sharpening only outlines the blur. Those numbers are what stop this utility making promises it cannot keep.

What it does to the pixels

Three things, in this order, because the order is most of the quality:

StepWhy
CleanOnly when the measurements say there is something to clean. JPEG compression works in 8-pixel tiles, and enlarging first turns each one into a visible block; cleaning first removes them while they are still one pixel wide. The filter compares neighbours by how similar they look, so a real edge survives and mottle in a flat sky does not.
EnlargeLanczos, in linear light. sRGB values are not proportional to light, and averaging them directly is what makes a naive enlargement look muddy. Line art uses a filter that does not ring instead, because a dark fringe beside a logo is what customers ring up about; a screenshot enlarged by a whole number uses nearest neighbour, because every soft filter turns crisp UI text to mush.
SharpenWith a threshold, so flat areas are left alone. Sharpening grain and sky is what makes an enlargement look worse than the file it came from. The amount comes down as the enlargement goes up, because past about 2.5× there is no fine detail left to sharpen.

Everything it writes is tagged with the dpi it was made for, so it places at the right size in InDesign, Illustrator or a RIP without anyone scaling it by hand.

Say this to a customer with confidence — none of this invents detail. A 96 dpi photograph enlarged to 300 dpi has exactly the detail it always had, spread over nine times as many pixels. The edges it does have are reconstructed properly and what was in the way is cleaned off. That is the whole of the honest claim, and it is worth making.

What the AI actually does

The Suite AI (Settings → AI) is a text model. It never sees the image and never touches a pixel — it cannot; that is not what a text model does.

What it is given is the measurements: pixel size, effective dpi at the placed size, how blocky the JPEG is, how much of the frame is flat, how many colors there are, how much grain sits in the smooth areas. What it is asked for is the judgement an experienced prepress operator would make from the same numbers — which treatment, how hard, and what to say to the customer. It can also draft the “please send us the original” email, with the exact pixel size in it.

Three things keep that honest. There is always a measured answer first, and it is a good one; if the AI is off, unreachable or answers with nonsense, that answer stands and the screen says which you are looking at. Every number the model returns is clamped before it can reach the resampler. And the model cannot overrule the verdict — it may not turn “too small to save” into “enlarge it”, because that ceiling is arithmetic, not opinion.

PDFs

A PDF is the best thing you can hand this utility, for one reason: the file already knows how big every picture in it is being printed. A loose JPEG has to be asked what size it is placed at. A PDF states it, in the placement matrix, for every image on every page. So the resolution figures for a PDF are exact rather than assumed.

Drop one in and you get a row per image, worst first: where it is, how many pixels it holds, how many inches it covers, and therefore its real resolution. An image used more than once — a logo repeated across a sheet — is judged at its largest use, because that is the one somebody will notice.

The important part — an improved image is written back into the same PDF object. The page description is not rewritten; the test suite checks it comes out byte-identical. Same position, same size, same stacking order, same text, same vectors, same spot colors, same trim boxes. The only thing that changed is how many pixels are inside the picture. The alternative — rebuilding pages around new images — is how a “PDF enhancer” hands back a file the customer no longer recognizes, and it is not done here.

There is no “re-tag” verdict for a PDF, because there is no dpi tag to be wrong about. Inside a PDF the placement is the resolution.

What it will not touch, and why

Left aloneWhy
CMYK imagesThe one refusal worth arguing about, and it stands. Reading CMYK out and writing RGB back re-separates the customer’s artwork: a black built from four inks comes back as a muddy four-color black, neutral grays go color-cast, and nobody spots it until it is on press. Enlarge it outside the PDF and have it re-placed by whoever built the file.
JPEG 2000, JBIG2, CCITT faxCompressions this suite carries no decoder for. CCITT in particular is 1-bit scanned line work, which upsampling cannot improve anyway.
Indexed, Separation and DeviceNThese carry palette or ink meaning that a straight RGB rewrite would throw away.
Stencil masks and images with a Decode arrayA 1-bit mask is drawn at the resolution of the press, not of the file. A Decode array deliberately remaps the samples, and a rewrite would lose that.
Inline imagesThese live inside the page content stream itself rather than as their own objects, so replacing one means rewriting the page — exactly what this refuses to do. They are counted and reported so you know they are there.

Every one of those is reported with its resolution anyway. Knowing that a CMYK photograph is 90 dpi at full bleed is worth having — especially when the answer is a phone call to the designer rather than a button here.

Transparency is carried through: an image with a soft mask is enlarged along with its mask, so a knocked-out picture keeps its edge. Photographs that arrived as JPEG go back as JPEG, since the compression artefacts are already baked in and a lossless rewrite would multiply the file size for nothing; flat artwork and type go back lossless, because JPEG rings around every hard edge. A rescued PDF is bigger than the one it came from — more pixels is a bigger file, and that is the trade.

Using your own upscaler

A trained super-resolution model genuinely can invent plausible detail, which on a photograph past 2× is the difference between soft and acceptable. Rather than bundle several hundred megabytes of weights, Image Rescue runs whatever this shop already owns. Point Settings → AI → External upscaler at Topaz, Real-ESRGAN, Upscayl or anything else with a command line, and test it there on a small pattern.

When one is configured, the model does the enlarging and the built-in filter finishes to the exact pixel count the press target asks for — a tool that only does whole-number scales leaves you at 4× when 3.1× was wanted. If it is missing, misconfigured or fails, the built-in filter does the whole job and the report says so rather than failing the file. Having one also raises the honest ceiling, which is why a file the shop would otherwise refuse may be offered when the model is available.

Application

JDF Bridge

Translates between JDF — the CIP4 job ticket that MIS and prepress systems speak — and the DC job XML the Duplo PC Controller reads. Drop a file in and the direction is taken from it: a JDF becomes a DC job, a DC job becomes JDF 1.5.

What it is for

Plenty of production software can write a JDF and nothing else — Prinect, Apogee, Avanti, EFI Pace, a web-to-print front end. None of them know what a Duplo DC wants. Rather than have someone read the JDF and retype the job into the controller, the bridge converts it. The other direction matters too: a DC job you have already built can be handed back to a JDF workflow so the MIS can track it.

How the two formats line up

Closer than you would expect. Duplo’s schema is plainly derived from JDF — the attribute names are the same ones CIP4 uses.

Duplo DC job XMLJDF 1.5
DuploDCJobTemplateJDF, a Combined node with Types="Cutting Creasing Perforating"
@MediaSizeMedia/@Dimension
CutBlock/@BlockName, @BlockSize CuttingParams/CutBlock — same attribute names
CutBlock/@BlockPositionCutBlock/@BlockTrf, as 1 0 0 1 x y
Crease/@PositionY, @Depth CreasingParams/Crease with StartPosition, WorkingPath and Depth
Perforation/@StartPosition, @WorkingPath PerforatingParams/Perforate — same attribute names again
@ToolID, Regmark, Skewmark, Shrinkagemark, Barcode a private duplo: namespace — see below

Coordinates and repetition

Two things are not a straight rename, and they are where a careless converter would quietly cut the wrong job.

Perforations live in a different coordinate space. A DC Perforation is addressed relative to the piece it crosses, with y measured down from that piece’s trim top. JDF puts everything in sheet coordinates with y up. Every perforation is moved between the two spaces. Creases already agree — both are sheet-absolute and y-up — so those pass through untouched.
The DC repeats, JDF does not. The controller applies one Perforation to every matching block, so a 4-up sheet with the same perf on each piece carries one entry. JDF has no such rule and wants it written out per block. Going out to JDF expands — two entries become eight on a 4-up — and coming back in collapses them again. The panel tells you when this happens.

Hot folders

Fiery server setup. The job is submitted straight to the print server’s own queue over its API rather than dropped in a hot folder, so a rejected job comes back as a real error instead of a file sitting unnoticed in a directory.
Fiery server setup. The job is submitted straight to the print server’s own queue over its API rather than dropped in a hot folder, so a rejected job comes back as a real error instead of a file sitting unnoticed in a directory.

The One file tab is for one-offs. The Hot folders tab is the one that earns its keep: two watched folders, one in each direction, running in the background.

DirectionWhat it does
JDF in → DC job XML outPoint the watch folder at wherever the MIS drops its JDF and the output folder at the PC Controller's Import XML folder. Jobs cross on their own.
DC job XML in → JDF outThe other way, so a finished DC job is handed back for the MIS to track.

Each direction takes a watch folder and an output folder, and optionally a folder to file the original into and one for anything that fails. The output name can use {name}, {job} and {date}. Check now sweeps both folders immediately rather than waiting.

They keep running with the window closed. The conversion happens in the suite's background process, not in the app, so the folders work whenever ImposeIQ is running — including sitting in the system tray — and start again by themselves when the PC is switched on. You do not need to leave the JDF Bridge open.

Three details that matter in a real shop:

SituationWhat happens
A file is still copying inIt is left until it stops growing. Reading a JDF half-written across the network gives a confusing error for a file that is perfectly good a second later.
The output folder is being watched tooOutput is written under a temporary name and renamed into place, so the DC Controller never sees a partly written job and rejects it.
A DC job lands in the JDF folderLeft alone with a note rather than moved to the error folder — a file is not broken just because it came in the wrong door.

Watching a mapped drive or a UNC share is normal in a print shop, and that is exactly where file-change events go missing without raising an error, so the folders are also re-checked on a timer. Under Settings → Notifications you can route JDF hot folder failed a job to a popup, email or text; a hot folder that has quietly stopped converting otherwise looks just like a quiet day.

Workflow Automation also has a Convert JDF ↔ DC job XML step under Output, for when the translation is one stage of a longer workflow rather than a folder on its own.

The Die Line Reader also has a Save as JDF… button beside its XML export, so a die-line PDF can go straight out as JDF. The JDF is produced from the DC XML rather than built separately, so the two exports can never describe different jobs.

JMF messaging

JDF is the job; JMF — Job Messaging Format — is the conversation about it. Handing a workflow application a file and never speaking again leaves every job it sent sitting open on its list for ever. The JMF messaging tab is the bridge's half of that conversation with whatever application is driving the finisher.

Workflow application MIS, Switch, whatever drives the floor ImposeIQ JDF Bridge and the Duplo finisher behind it Command · SubmitQueueEntry "here is a job, and here is the JDF" Response · ReturnCode 0 "it arrived, it is queued" — silence here reads as a failed submission Signal · Status — Running / InProgress unprompted, as the job moves Signal · Status — Completed, Amount + Waste the sheet counts an MIS bills from Command · ReturnQueueEntry "here is the job back, and where the finished JDF is" Signal · Notification — Class Error instead of the above, when it goes wrong — with the reason attached
The conversation JMF carries. Gold is what the application sends; blue is what the bridge sends back.

Three settings at the top describe the shop rather than the job, so they are remembered: the application's JMF listener address, the Sender ID this bridge calls itself, and the Device ID of the finisher the messages are about. Below them go the job's details — their Job ID and queue entry ID, echoed back exactly as they sent them, since those are their handles for the job and swapping them is how an MIS loses track of something it is holding open.

SayWhat goes out
It arrivedA Response to their SubmitQueueEntry with ReturnCode 0 and the queue entry marked Waiting. A submission that gets no response is, to the sender, a failed one.
It startedA Status signal — device Running, job InProgress.
It finishedA Status signal — job Completed, 100%, with the good and wasted sheet counts attached. Those amounts are what an MIS bills from.
Hand the job backA ReturnQueueEntry command pointing at the finished JDF, which is how a device gives the job back rather than just reporting on it.
It went wrongA Notification signal, Class Error, carrying the explanation you typed. An error with no comment is a return code and nothing else.
What I can be askedThe answer to their KnownMessages query — the list of messages this bridge services.

Send posts the message to the listener; Save and Copy are for a workflow that collects messages from a folder instead. If their answer comes back with a ReturnCode other than zero, that is a refusal and the bridge reports it — including their comment — rather than claiming the message was accepted.

Traffic goes the other way too. Drop a JMF they sent on Something arrived and the bridge reads it, shows what it learned — their message ID, the JDF's location, where to reply — and builds the response it owes them, ready to send back. Anything it cannot honestly service comes back as ReturnCode 5 naming the message type, because a sender that gets silence retries for ever.

The posting happens in the background process. A window loaded from the local disk has no origin a JMF listener will accept and cannot set the CIP4 content type, so the message is posted by the suite itself — which also means a refused connection comes back as something you can act on rather than a blank failure.

What does not survive, and what does

JDF has no home for a Duplo tool id or for the registration, skew, shrinkage and barcode marks. Rather than drop them, they travel in a private namespace — duplo:ToolID and a duplo:DCMarks block. A JDF consumer ignores anything in a namespace it does not know, so the file stays valid JDF, and a round-trip back to DC XML returns every one of them exactly.

Coming the other way, some things a JDF can describe are beyond the machine, and those are reported rather than guessed at:

In the JDFWhat happens
A BlockTrf that rotates or scales a blockOnly the position is used, and it says so — a DC can only place a block square to the sheet.
A perforation outside every blockLeft out and reported. The DC addresses perforations relative to a piece, so one that belongs to no piece cannot be expressed.
A crease running down the sheetBecomes a Score perforation — the DC Crease element carries a Y position and nothing else.
No Media dimensionFalls back to the output Component, and failing that to the extent of the blocks, with a warning to check the sheet size before cutting.
Check the first one. Convert a job you already know, send it to the controller, and compare it against the same job built by hand. Once one has gone through cleanly the rest will follow — but a job ticket format is exactly the sort of thing where a shop’s particular MIS does something slightly its own way.

JDF job tickets from an outside MIS

The Bridge above translates the cutting part of a JDF. The MIS also takes in the whole job ticket — who the customer is, how many, when it is due, the finished size, the stock, how many up, which files and which finishing — from any system that writes JDF or XJDF: EFI Pace, PrintSmith Vision, Avanti, Prinect, or a web-to-print front end. Open MIS → Jobs → JDF tickets.

Way inHow it works
Hot folderThe sender drops a .jdf (and usually its PDF) in a folder. The ticket is taken in and filed in Handled tickets go to; one that cannot be read goes to Failed tickets go to. A PDF that was sitting beside it is filed with it once it has been copied into the job.
JMFTurn on Listen for JMF and give the sender the address shown as its JMF device URL. It sends a SubmitQueueEntry whose URL points at the JDF (a file, a share, or http). The reply carries the MIS job number as the queue entry, so the sender can track it. If the sender gave a return address it is told when the job is released or rejected. Device status sent to the same port goes to the floor tracking, as JMF from a finisher always has.
By handTake in a JDF file… — for trying a new sender’s tickets before pointing it at the folder, or one that came by e-mail.

Every ticket becomes a job on hold, waiting for review. The MIS fills in what it can:

From the ticketWhat the MIS does with it
CustomerMatched on the sender’s customer id against your customer code, then e-mail, then name. A customer you do not have is created, and the review says so in case it is a duplicate.
Press sheetMatched to a catalog stock of that size, preferring one whose name shares words with the paper the ticket names. If nothing is that size, the review says to pick one.
Finishing processesRouted to your cost centers — cut, crease and perf to one DC pass (the DC the ticket names, if you have it), spot UV to a DDC, foil to the DFL, folding, stitching, binding. A process no cost center does is listed so it can be added by hand.
Their impositionKept on the job. A workflow uses it instead of the estimate’s layout.
Cut blocksTurned into a DC job by the Bridge and filed in the job folder.
ArtworkCopied into the job folder. A file that has not arrived yet is looked for again every 30 seconds, up to the Wait for artwork time.

The job’s JDF job ticket card shows what came in and everything worth a second look. Correct anything on the job, then Release to production — or Reject it with a reason. Release is refused while the job has no quantity, no trim size, or artwork the ticket named is still missing. A held job cannot be moved off hold with the Status dropdown; it has to be released, so there is always a record of who let it go.

Imposing on release. Set When a job is released, send it to to a workflow that imposes: an Impose N-up step with Use the layout from the MIS job ticked, then DC or OMR marks, then the DC job. The step then uses the sender’s columns, rows, sheet and gutters. A ticket sent again before release updates the held job; one sent again after release changes nothing and the job’s history says so.

Not supported yet: JDF sent inside a MIME package (the sender is told to send a file or http link instead).

Finishing check — Duplo finisher limits

Every MIS job has a Finishing check card on its ticket. It checks the job against each Duplo finisher on its routing, using the limits from the Duplo brochures and product guides, so a job that a finisher cannot run is caught before the sheets are printed.

FinisherWhat is checked
DC-618, DC-648, DC-746Sheet fits the feeder (DC-618 330.5 mm wide, DC-648 and DC-746 370 mm; DC-746 B2 sheets through the DSF-20K / DC-20000). Stock weight. Pieces at least 48 × 50 mm. Gutters: under 3 mm cannot be cut; a slit gutter must be 0 or 5–15 mm, and one over 15 mm lands on the exit tray. Edge margins 3.2–55 mm for the slitter. Lead margin at least 3 mm, trail at least 5 mm; on the DC-618 a trail of 60 mm or more is not chopped into the bin. Slit count (6, or 8 on a DC-648 and 10 on a DC-746 with the extra modules), 30 cuts, 20 creases. Micro-perf stock range on the DC-618.
HC-550i, HC-680iSheet fits the cutter. Narrowest strip against the minimum cut, with and without the false clamp.
DDC-810 PRO, DDC-8000Sheet and stock. The 10 mm uncoated border when the job has spot UV, coating or foil. Coating width (DDC-810 322.5 mm) and thickness (DDC-810 from 15 µm, DDC-8000 from 10 µm).
DFL-500, DFL-700Sheet and stock.
UD-320, UD-M300, DSM-1000Sheet and stock; the waste separator needs 200 gsm or more; the DSM-1000 needs a 28 mm reference-edge margin.
DBM-150, DBM-350, DBM-700i, iSaddleThe open spread fits the feeder. Inside and cover stock. Sheets per book (pages ÷ 4): DBM-150 25 (20 on coated), DBM-350 25, DBM-700i 30 — up to 50 with the DBM-700S square spine and 24 gauge wire, 10 on stock under 64 gsm — iSaddle 30.
DPB-500, DB-300Book size and spine (pages ÷ 2 × the stock’s caliper): DPB-500 1–51 mm, DB-300 up to 50.8 mm.
CF375, CP375, TF375, DF-1300LSheet and stock; perforating range on the CP375; creases.

Cannot run means the machine cannot take the job. Check means it may need an option, a setting or a test sheet.

Horizon, Standard, GBC, MBM and other makers

From operator manuals. Where a maker’s own operator manual is on file (Duplo Docs → Competators), its figures replace the web page’s — a manual gives the gutters, edge trims and cut limits a web page leaves out. That covers the Horizon SmartSlitter (3 across with a gutter, 5 butted; gutters 5–15 mm; edge trim 3–60 mm), SmartStacker, AFC-566F, CRF-362, CRA-36 and RD-3346; the Uchida AeroCut X, Prime, Velocity, nano and nanoMax (2 mm gutter minimum, lead/trail trim, 20 cuts, creases and perforations per sheet in all); the Morgana DigiBook 200/300/450 perfect binders, AutoCreaser 33, 50 and Pro 385 and DigiFold Pro; the Challenge 305 TC cutter; the Graphic Whizard PT-330 S/SA and PT-335 SCC; and PDI Rhin-O-Tuff punches. Setup → Finishers shows “manual:” and the file name under Limits from.

POLAR (Heidelberg). POLAR cutters, formerly Polar-Mohr, are now sold by Heidelberg. Their limits come from Heidelberg’s product pages and sheets: the N 78, N 92, N 115, N 137, N 155 and N 176 high-speed cutters; the D 66 PLUS and D 80 PLUS hydraulic cutters; the TwinClamp 115/137; and the Autotrim M 137 label cutter. The check compares the sheet with the cut width and table depth. It compares the narrowest strip with the smallest cut, with and without the false clamp plate. For the Autotrim it also checks the label size (20 × 40 up to 230 × 1,010 mm). Heidelberg publishes no cut width for the TwinClamp, so the TwinClamp gives warnings only. Loading height is in the notes but is not checked. To match a cost center, put the model in its name, for example “Polar N 115”.

Cutter programs (POLAR and Horizon)

The Imposer’s Cutter Program… button saves the layout on screen as cutting data. The Cutter program (POLAR / Horizon) workflow step does the same after an Impose step, writing straight into a hot folder. Three files can be made:

  • PPF (CIP3 cut data) for POLAR Compucut. Point the step at Compucut’s hot folder, and Compucut builds the cutting program and sends it to a POLAR N or D PLUS cutter.
  • JDF (a Cutting ticket with cut blocks) for Horizon iCE LiNK’s JDF hot folder. Compucut 5.0.6 and later reads JDF too.
  • Backgauge program (.txt): every cut as a backgauge dimension in inches and mm, in order, with what drops off at each cut. The operator can key it into any guillotine: POLAR, Horizon, Challenge or a Duplo HC.

Pick the cutter so the program knows its smallest cut. When a trim is narrower than that, the program turns the pile round and finishes from the other side. Tick False clamp plate fitted to use the larger false-clamp minimum. The shop’s own guillotines from Setup → Finishers are in the list too. In the step, [var.machines] uses the first guillotine on the MIS job’s routing.

Lead edge in the PPF / JDF sets which way up the sheet is written; the default puts the lead (gripper) edge at the bottom. Before the first live job, send one test file to Compucut or iCE LiNK and check that the sheet appears the right way round. If it doesn’t, switch the setting. The files follow the published CIP3 PPF 3.0 and JDF specifications, but they have not yet been tried on a live Compucut or iCE LiNK. Demo copies are marked DEMO inside the file and in its name.

Setup → Finishers also lists GBC — Catena, Ultima and Pinnacle roll laminators, Spire III, Foton 30, StreamPunch Ultra and VFX, eWire VFX, MagnaPunch Elite and the Ci500E coil inserter — and MBM, with the machines MBM sells: Uchida AeroCut X, X Pro, nanoMax, AeroDieCut and Precision Card Pro; Triumph 4350, 4815, 4850, 4855, 5255, 5260, 5560, 6655, 6660, 7260 and Speedcut 56/68 cutters; MBM 208J, 408A, 508A and 1800S folders; SF2, Sprint 3000, iBooklet and StitchMaster; GoCrease 3000, 4000 and SEMI; and the FoilGlazer II. As with Horizon, every limit comes from the maker’s own page or PDF. Roll laminators are checked on document width and board thickness (they publish no sheet length); inline punches on the page size, which must be one they punch; wire and coil binders on book thickness (from the caliper) or sheet count. Where MBM’s web page and its PDF disagree (the 1800S top weight), the lower figure is the limit and the rest is a Check — test first.

Shops that also run Horizon equipment — sold in the US by Standard Finishing Systems as Standard Horizon — are covered too. MIS → Setup → Finishers lists the Horizon models with published specs: SmartSlitter, RD-N4055, CRF-362, CRA-36, CRS-36, AFV-566/564 folders, PF-P3110, StitchLiner Mark V, Mark IV and 6000, SPF-200A/L, SPF-2000, BQ-160, BQ-280PUR, BQ-300, BQ-500, CABS6000, HT-30C, HT-300, HT-110, HT-80, APC-610 and PC-640. Each limit was taken from Horizon’s own product pages or Standard’s brochures, and only what Horizon publishes is checked — for example the SmartSlitter’s sheet size, weights, 48 × 50 mm minimum piece, 3-up and perforating range, but not a gutter or lead margin, because Horizon does not publish one. Models marked confirm came from a hard-to-read PDF and only warn.

On each cost center, pick the machine under Machine for the finishing check; a cost center named with the model (“Standard Horizon StitchLiner Mark V”) is matched on its own. For anything else — a Standard-sold Plockmatic or Hunkeler, an older Horizon, another maker — press Add a finisher, choose what kind of machine it is, and enter the limits from its spec sheet in millimetres and gsm. Only the limits you enter are checked. Stitchers are checked by stitch thickness when the stock has a caliper, or scaled from the maker’s “about N sheets of X gsm” when it does not (as a warning).

Paper weight. The card shows which weight it used and where it came from, in this order: the JDF ticket’s weight; the Weight (gsm) entered on the stock; the stock’s Basis weight (“100# cover” is 271 gsm, converted exactly); a basis weight in the stock’s name (“100# Silk Text”); or, last, the caliper — about 21 gsm per point, which is only an estimate, so a limit it breaks is shown as Check, not Cannot run. Setup → Stock shows every paper’s weight and flags the ones that are estimated or missing; a missing or estimated weight can also be typed straight into the job’s Finishing check card and saved to the stock.

Margins. When the Imposer generates a job it is linked to — or an Impose workflow step runs for an MIS job — it records the layout it really built: sheet, grid, gutters between columns and between rows, and the distance from each sheet edge to the nearest trim line. From then on the card says As imposed and checks those exact numbers. Before that the card says Forecast: the margins are worked out from the estimate (or the JDF ticket), centred between the lead grip and the other margins the way the Imposer places the block — not assumed equal on every side. Column gutters are checked as slit gutters and row gutters as cut gutters.

A JDF job with a Cannot run result will not release on its own. Fix the job, or tick Release anyway and give a reason: who overrode it, why, and every problem they overrode go in the job’s history.

In a workflow. Add a Finishing check step after the MIS job link (or at the top of a release workflow). By default it stops the workflow when a finisher cannot run the job; set it to carry on and use [var.finishBlocks] in a Route step to send those jobs to an approval instead. It also sets [var.finishWarns] and [var.finishSummary]. Put it after the Impose step and it checks the sheet as imposed (the Impose step sets [var.marginLead], [var.marginTrail], [var.marginLeft], [var.marginRight] and the [var.imposed…] grid); before it, the forecast.
Utility

SecureBridge

SecureBridge moves finished work from one computer to another — an imposition workstation to a Duplo PC Controller, a MIS PC to a RIP — without a Windows file share. It uses SFTP, the file-transfer part of SSH: every transfer is encrypted, nothing is shared on the network, and the sending computer proves who it is with a key rather than a password. Drop a file in its Outbox and it is delivered.

SecureBridge is built into the suite — open it from the SecureBridge tile under Utilities, or from the tray menu. There is nothing else to install on this computer. Delivery runs inside the suite, so it keeps going with the SecureBridge window closed while the suite sits in the tray, and picks up again whenever the suite starts if it was watching when the suite closed. The same instructions are in its window — click Setup Guide, where every command is filled in with your own host, username, folder and key — and For IT opens the Secure Delivery white paper.

Coming from the standalone SecureBridge program? When SecureBridge opens and finds the standalone program's settings on this computer, it offers to Import them — folders, remote computer and the key. Because the key comes across too, the remote computer keeps working with no change. It also warns you if the standalone program is still running: quit it (and uninstall it) so the same Outbox is not sent twice. The standalone program is still the right choice on a computer that does not run the suite — for example a PC Controller that sends files back.

How it works — two computers, two roles

ComputerWhat it doesWhat it needs
This computer
the sender
Runs SecureBridge, watches its Outbox folder and sends each finished file. SecureBridge; the Windows OpenSSH Client (built into Windows 10 1809+ and 11) to make its key.
Remote computer
the receiver
Accepts the connection and writes the file into its remote folder — for a PC Controller, usually the folder it imports job XML from. The Windows OpenSSH Server, port 22 open to the local network, and the sender's public key. It does not need SecureBridge just to receive.
Local and remote swap depending on where you are standing, so these instructions always say this computer for the one sending and remote computer for the one receiving. Do them in this order: this computer's details and key first, then the remote computer, then back to this computer to test.

Step 1 — this computer: details and key

Open SecureBridge. Home screen → Utilities → SecureBridge, or the suite's tray menu. If it offers to import settings from the standalone SecureBridge program, do that and skip to Step 3.
Choose the Outbox. Under Folders, Browse to (or create) a folder such as C:\SecureBridge\Outbox. Anything placed in it is sent.
Fill in Remote Computer. Host or IP — the remote computer's name or address (the setup script prints both if you do not know it yet; you can come back). Port — 22. Username — the Windows account on the remote computer, exactly as it appears there. Remote folder — the folder on the remote computer, written with forward slashes: C:/Duplo/Import.
Generate Key Pair. Under This Computer's Key. The private key stays on this computer; the public key appears in the box. Do this once — generating again replaces the key, and the remote computer then needs the new one. If it fails with ssh-keygen not found, add OpenSSH Client in Settings → Optional features.
Save the remote setup script. Click Setup Guide → 1 · Remote computer → Save SecureBridge-Remote-Setup.ps1…. The script already contains this computer's public key, the username and the folder. Copy it to a USB stick, or e-mail it to yourself.

Step 2 — the remote computer

Do this once, at the remote computer (or over remote desktop), signed in with an administrator account.

Option A — the setup script (recommended)

Copy the script to the remote computer — the Desktop is easiest.
Open PowerShell as Administrator. Start → type PowerShell → right-click Windows PowerShell → Run as administrator.
Run it:
cd $env:USERPROFILE\Desktop
Set-ExecutionPolicy -Scope Process Bypass -Force
.\SecureBridge-Remote-Setup.ps1
It is safe to run more than once.
Note what it prints. The last lines give the host or IP, port, username and remote folder to type into SecureBridge on this computer.

What the script does, in order: installs and starts OpenSSH Server and sets it to start automatically; adds a firewall rule SecureBridge-SSH that opens port 22 to the local network only; checks the account exists and whether it is an administrator; creates the remote folder and gives the account modify rights on it; installs the public key in the right file with the permissions OpenSSH insists on; restarts the SSH service.

Option B — by hand

The same steps in an Administrator PowerShell on the remote computer. Replace duplo, the folder and the key with your own — or use SecureBridge's Setup Guide, which shows these commands already filled in with copy buttons.

StepCommand or setting
1. Find the account$env:USERNAME gives the name to use as Username (for a Microsoft account, the short name — not the e-mail address). net localgroup administrators shows whether it is an administrator; that decides step 5.
2. OpenSSH ServerSettings → System (or Apps) → Optional features → Add a feature → OpenSSH Server. Or:
Add-WindowsCapability -Online -Name (Get-WindowsCapability -Online | Where-Object Name -like 'OpenSSH.Server*').Name
Set-Service -Name sshd -StartupType Automatic
Start-Service sshd
3. FirewallNew-NetFirewallRule -Name 'SecureBridge-SSH' -DisplayName 'SecureBridge (OpenSSH Server)' -Direction Inbound -Protocol TCP -LocalPort 22 -RemoteAddress LocalSubnet -Action Allow
4. Remote folderNew-Item -ItemType Directory -Path 'C:\Duplo\Import' -Force
icacls 'C:\Duplo\Import' /grant "duplo:(OI)(CI)M"
5a. Key — administrator accountWindows OpenSSH ignores an administrator's own .ssh folder and reads one machine-wide file:
Add-Content -Path 'C:\ProgramData\ssh\administrators_authorized_keys' -Value 'ssh-ed25519 AAAA… securebridge' -Encoding ascii
icacls 'C:\ProgramData\ssh\administrators_authorized_keys' /inheritance:r /grant '*S-1-5-32-544:F' /grant '*S-1-5-18:F'
5b. Key — standard accountNew-Item -ItemType Directory -Path 'C:\Users\duplo\.ssh' -Force
Add-Content -Path 'C:\Users\duplo\.ssh\authorized_keys' -Value 'ssh-ed25519 AAAA… securebridge' -Encoding ascii
icacls 'C:\Users\duplo\.ssh\authorized_keys' /inheritance:r /grant 'duplo:F' /grant '*S-1-5-32-544:F' /grant '*S-1-5-18:F'
6. Restart SSHRestart-Service sshd
7. The addresshostname and ipconfig (IPv4 Address). An IP is more dependable on shop networks — ask for a DHCP reservation so it does not change.
The key must stay on one line, in a file saved as plain ASCII or UTF-8. A key pasted into Notepad and saved as UTF-16, or wrapped onto two lines, is ignored without any message — use the Add-Content … -Encoding ascii commands above rather than editing the file by hand.
PC Controller with no internet? Add-WindowsCapability needs Windows Update. Install OpenSSH Server from the Windows Features on Demand media for that Windows build, or copy Microsoft's Win32-OpenSSH MSI across on a USB stick. Everything from step 3 on is the same, and the script still works once the service exists.

Step 3 — back on this computer: test and run

Complete Remote Computer with what the script printed, if you had not already.
Check the network path (optional). In PowerShell on this computer: Test-NetConnection -ComputerName 192.168.1.40 -Port 22 — TcpTestSucceeded : True means the remote SSH server can be reached.
Test Connection. SecureBridge signs in with the key and lists the remote folder. If it fails, the line underneath says what to check — see Troubleshooting.
Start Watching. Drop a small test file into the Outbox. Within a few seconds Activity shows SENT and the file is in the remote folder. A file is only sent once it has stopped growing, so a large PDF still being written is not sent half-finished; a failed send is retried automatically.
Leave it running. Close the window — delivery carries on while the suite is in the tray, and resumes by itself when the suite next starts. To have it running from power-on, set the suite to start with Windows in Settings. Stop Watching stops it and keeps it stopped.
Sending from ImposeIQ — point the Imposer's PDF output folder, or an Automation Workflow's delivery step, at SecureBridge's Outbox and finished jobs travel on their own. Files are copied, not moved: a delivered file stays in the Outbox, and is sent again only if it changes, so clear the Outbox now and then.
The Imposer's own Remote Delivery (SFTP) in Settings uses exactly the same remote setup, but it has its own key. Give the remote computer both public keys: run the setup script a second time with the Imposer's key pasted into $PubKey, or use step 5 of Option B. Each key is a separate line in the same file.

Sending in both directions

One link carries files one way. For two-way delivery — jobs out to the PC Controller, results or XML back — set up a second link the other way round: SecureBridge in the suite on one end, and on a computer without the suite, the standalone SecureBridge program, which works the same way. Open Inbox Folder beside it opens the folder arriving files land in, so you can check what has come through without hunting for the path.

Computer A (e.g. ImposeIQ workstation)Computer B (e.g. PC Controller)
InstallsImposeIQ Suite (SecureBridge is built in); OpenSSH Server too, if B sends backOpenSSH Server; the standalone SecureBridge program too, if it sends back
OutboxJobs going to BFiles going back to A
Remote ComputerB — its import folderA — a return folder on A
KeyA's public key goes onto BB's public key goes onto A
InboxThe return folder B writes into on AThe import folder A writes into on B

The Inbox is for visibility only: SecureBridge does not fetch anything, it lists what the other computer delivered into that folder.

Keep Outbox and Inbox separate folders on each computer. If a computer's Outbox were the folder the other side delivers into, every file would bounce straight back.

Troubleshooting

SecureBridge saysWhat to check
The remote machine refused this key.Most often the account is an administrator and the key was put in C:\Users\name\.ssh\authorized_keys; administrators must use C:\ProgramData\ssh\administrators_authorized_keys. Otherwise: the key is split over two lines or saved as UTF-16, the username is not the exact Windows account name, or the file's permissions allow other users. Re-running the setup script fixes all of these. Restart sshd after any change.
Nothing is listening for SSH.OpenSSH Server is not installed or the service is stopped: Get-Service sshd, Start-Service sshd, Set-Service sshd -StartupType Automatic.
No answer from …The remote computer is off, on another network or VLAN, or the firewall is closed. Run Test-NetConnection from this computer; on the remote computer check Get-NetFirewallRule -Name 'SecureBridge-SSH' and that Get-NetConnectionProfile shows the network as Private.
Could not find a machine called …Use the IP address instead of the name.
Connected, but the remote folder could not be used.The folder does not exist, was typed with backslashes, or the account cannot write to it. Type it as C:/Duplo/Import; on the remote computer Test-Path and icacls the folder.
Generate Key Pair failsAdd OpenSSH Client on this computer: Settings → Optional features.
Test works but nothing is sentWatching is stopped, the Outbox path is wrong, or the file is still being written. Any failed send is listed in Activity as ERROR with the reason.

The remote computer logs every refused sign-in, with the reason, in Get-WinEvent -LogName 'OpenSSH/Operational' -MaxEvents 20 | Format-List TimeCreated, Message.

Security notes

For IT — the Secure Delivery white paper (8 pages: why SMB was rejected, how the SFTP link is secured, the threat model including what it does not cover, deployment requirements and recommended hardening) is built into SecureBridge. Click For IT at the top of its window to read it, open it in a PDF reader, or save a copy to send to an IT department.
  • Only computers holding a private key whose public key you installed can connect. Nothing is shared with the rest of the network, unlike an SMB share.
  • The firewall rule allows port 22 from the local subnet only. Do not forward port 22 from the internet to a PC Controller.
  • Once the link works you can stop the remote computer accepting SSH passwords entirely: set PasswordAuthentication no in C:\ProgramData\ssh\sshd_config and restart sshd.
  • Retiring a computer or a key: remove its line from the remote computer's authorized_keys file.
  • Use a dedicated standard (non-administrator) account on the remote computer where the shop allows it — it can write to the remote folder and nothing else.
Reference

Text & push alerts

Every event in the suite — a job finishing on the floor, a proof approved, a hot folder rejecting a ticket, a backup failing overnight — can be routed to a phone. Settings → Notifications decides which events go out; Settings → Text messaging decides how. There are four ways to send, and two of them are free with no volume limit.

Which one to use

MethodCostNeedsBest when
TelegramFree, unlimitedThe free Telegram app on each phone A shop crew who will all install one app. Put the bot in a group and everybody gets every alert with no per-person setup.
ntfyFree, unlimitedThe free ntfy app on each phone No accounts at all, and you can run the server yourself if you would rather nothing left the building.
TwilioAbout a cent a message, plus a monthly numberA Twilio account The alert has to reach somebody who will not install an app — a customer, or a driver.
ZapierYour Zapier planA Zap with a Catch Hook The alert needs to end up somewhere else entirely: Slack, Teams, a spreadsheet, a paging system.

Telegram and ntfy arrive as a push notification rather than a carrier text. On a phone that is the same experience — it makes a noise, it shows on the lock screen — but it costs nothing and there is nothing to top up. At fifty alerts a day that is roughly $15 a month against nothing, which is the whole reason they are here.

You are not locked in. All four can be configured at once. Default method is what an alert uses unless it says otherwise, and switching it is one dropdown — nothing else changes.

Telegram, step by step

The Telegram and ntfy panels in Settings. Both are free and neither charges per message; each has a test button so you find out here rather than when a job needs you.
The Telegram and ntfy panels in Settings. Both are free and neither charges per message; each has a test button so you find out here rather than when a job needs you.

About three minutes, once.

1Install Telegram on your phone and sign in.
2In Telegram, search for @BotFather — the official one, with a blue tick — and send it /newbot. It asks for a name and a username; anything will do, and the username has to end in bot. It replies with a token that looks like 123456789:AAE….
3Paste that token into Bot token on the Text messaging screen and press Save.
4Decide who gets alerts. Just you: open your new bot in Telegram and send it hello. The whole shop: make a Telegram group, add everyone, add the bot as a member, and post any message in the group.
5Back in ImposeIQ, press Find my chat. Your chat appears in the list; press Use this, then Save, then Send test via Telegram.

Step 4 is not optional and it is the step people skip. A Telegram bot cannot message anybody who has not spoken to it first — that is Telegram's anti-spam rule, not ours — and it is also the only way ImposeIQ can learn the chat's ID. If Find my chat comes back empty, the message in step 4 did not happen, or it happened long enough ago that Telegram has already dropped it. Send a fresh one and press the button again.

A group beats a broadcast list. One group with the bot in it means adding a new hire is adding them to the group — no new number, no change in ImposeIQ, and they can see the alerts that came in before they arrived.

ntfy, step by step

About two minutes, and there is no account anywhere.

1Install ntfy from the App Store or Play Store on every phone that wants alerts.
2On the Text messaging screen press Make me one. That fills in a random topic name such as imposeiq-k4m2xq9tz. Press Save.
3In the ntfy app tap + and subscribe to that exact topic name.
4Press Send test via ntfy. It should land on the phone in a second or two.

ntfy has no logins. The topic name is the only thing protecting your alerts — anyone who knows it can read them, and can post to it. That is why the button generates a random one rather than letting you type duplo. Treat it like a password: it is fine to send it to your own crew, and not fine to put it on a whiteboard.

Priority controls how the phone treats the alert. Default behaves like any other notification; Urgent pushes through silent mode, which is right for a press-down alert at 3am and wrong for everything else. If you run your own ntfy server, put its address in Server and its access token in Access token; the public ntfy.sh needs neither.

Twilio & Zapier

Twilio sends a real carrier text to any phone with no app involved, which is what makes it worth paying for when the recipient is a customer. It needs the Account SID and Auth token from your Twilio console and a number you have bought there, in +1XXXXXXXXXX form. Send texts to is the destination list, comma-separated; it is the only method that uses that box. Turning on MMS lets an alert carry a proof image where one exists, at a higher per-message cost.

Zapier does not send anything itself — it hands the alert to a Zap and lets that decide. Create a Zap with the Webhooks by Zapier → Catch Hook trigger, paste its URL in, and press Send test to Zapier so the Zap has a payload to map fields from. Because the Zap picks the recipient, Send texts to is ignored.

People, teams and who gets what

Everything above sets up how a message is sent. Settings → People & teams decides who it goes to, so the floor lead hears about a failed hot folder and the bookkeeper hears about a paid invoice, and neither hears about the other.

1Teams. The tab starts with Office, Production floor and Managers. Rename, remove or add your own — a team is only a name people tick, such as Second shift.
2People. Add a person and fill in whatever you have for them: email, mobile, Telegram chat id, ntfy topic. Under Reach by tick Email, Text / push or both, and pick the text method. Shop default uses the default method from the Text messaging tab, or the first method they have an address for. A 10-digit US mobile is stored as +1 and the number, which is what Twilio needs.
3Off-hours. Tick Don't send from and set the window (it can run past midnight), and Weekends off if they don't work weekends. Nothing routine reaches them in that window.
4Send a test under the person saves first, then sends a sample on every channel they have ticked and lists what happened to each one — sent, failed with the reason, or skipped because an address is missing.

Then on Settings → Notifications each event has five columns. Desktop is a popup on this PC. Shop email and Shop text go to the single address on the Email server and Text messaging tabs, exactly as before — an install set up before People existed keeps sending without any change. Send to people opens a list of teams and people; tick whoever should get it. Ignore off-hours sends even inside a person's off-hours window. Failures (workflow failed, backup failed, disk low, license invalid and the like) come with it ticked; finished jobs and paid invoices do not. Send a test under an event sends it now to everyone it is routed to, off-hours or not.

Nobody gets the same event twice. A person on two routed teams, a person also named directly, or a person whose Telegram chat is the shop group all get it once.

One bot, everybody's phone. One Telegram bot, one ntfy server or one Twilio number reaches every person; each person only needs their own address. For Telegram, have the person send the bot a message, press Find my chat on the Text messaging tab and copy their chat id into their card. For ntfy, have each person subscribe to their own topic in the app.

Who gets what at the bottom of the tab lists every person and the events that reach them. Recent deliveries shows the last messages sent since ImposeIQ started. A red line there is a channel that is not working, with the reason from the server.

Workflows can use the same list. The Notify the shop step has a Send to teams / people box: type team or person names separated by commas (Production floor, Maria), or Everyone. Each person gets it on their own channels, and a name that matches nobody is written to the run log.

Where the credentials live

The email server settings. Gmail and Microsoft 365 need an app password, not the normal sign-in password — the note under the field says so, and <em>Send test email</em> proves it before you rely on it.
The email server settings. Gmail and Microsoft 365 need an app password, not the normal sign-in password — the note under the field says so, and Send test email proves it before you rely on it.

The bot token, the ntfy access token, the Twilio auth token and the Zapier hook URL are encrypted by Windows against this machine and this user account. They are never shown back to you — the boxes only ever show dots — and leaving a box blank means keep what is saved, never clear it. To remove one, put a space in the box and save.

None of them go into a backup. A .iqbak carries the settings around them — which method is default, the Telegram chat ID, the ntfy server, topic and priority, the Twilio SID and number — so a restored machine is one paste away from working, and a backup file that ends up on a USB stick in a drawer cannot send anything on your behalf. See What goes in the file.

After a restore — open Text messaging and re-enter the token for whichever method you use, then press the test button. Everything else is already there.

When nothing arrives

What you seeWhat it usually is
“Text messaging is turned off” Enable text notifications is unticked. Tick it, Save, test again.
The test works but real events never arrive The events are not routed to text. Settings → Notifications, tick the Text column for the events you want — and check quiet hours.
Find my chat lists nothing Nobody has messaged the bot, or the message is old enough that Telegram has dropped it. Send the bot a fresh message and press the button again.
Telegram: “chat not found” The chat ID is wrong, or the bot was removed from the group. Run Find my chat again.
Telegram: “Unauthorized” The bot token is wrong or was revoked in BotFather. Paste a fresh one.
ntfy test succeeds, phone stays quiet The phone is subscribed to a different topic — they have to match exactly, character for character. Failing that, the phone's battery optimization has frozen the ntfy app; exempt it.
ntfy returns 403 A self-hosted server with access control on, and no token saved.
Twilio returns 21608 A trial account can only text numbers you have verified in the Twilio console.
A failed alert never fails the job. If Telegram is down or the shop's internet is out, the notification is logged and dropped — the scan is still recorded, the file is still delivered, the backup still runs.

Nothing arrives, but the test works

These are two different switches, and this is the one people miss. Settings → Text messaging decides how a message is sent — that is what the test button exercises. Settings → Notifications decides which events get sent at all, and every event starts unticked. A working test with nothing else arriving means the grid is empty: tick the Text column against the events you actually want, and press Save.

Three things a workflow does now raise events you can route here: a run finishing, a run failing (a rejected job counts), and a run stopping for an approval. Tick Text against those and a finished job reaches your phone with no workflow edits at all.

Every row in the grid is raised by something, so every tick can fire. Job output rows (imposed PDF, VDP merge, cutter XML) come from workflow steps; the SecureBridge rows come from its Outbox and Inbox, and a failed send is said once per file rather than on every retry; the license rows are checked at start-up and twice a day, at most once a day each. If a person is ticked but nothing reaches them, look at Recent deliveries on the People & teams tab — it gives the reason, or shows the message was held for their off-hours.

Workflow approvals are separate again. Wait for approval has its own channel tickboxes on the step itself, not in the notifications grid. One of them reaches a phone: Send a notification to your phone, with Send it via underneath choosing the method. Pick Telegram there — it is the only one that draws a button you can actually tap, and it is free. Pushover, Twilio and Zapier are in the same list; none of them can draw a button, so they get the approve and reject links written into the message instead. See Approvals, notifications & the customer.

Telegram needs nothing installed and no address of any kind. Its Approve and Reject buttons carry no web link at all — the tap is held by Telegram and collected by the shop PC, which then releases or rejects the job. That matters because Telegram checks a button's web address on its own servers and refuses anything that is not public, so a link button could never work for a shop whose approval server is on the LAN. Nothing is exposed to the internet; the PC asks, it is never asked.

The PC only asks while something is actually waiting — no job on hold, no traffic — and only the machine that owns the approvals asks, so a desktop window and the Workflows service never compete. Whoever pressed the button is recorded against the decision, and only the chat you configured can decide, even if the bot has been added to another group.

The extra Open job button, and the Slack and Teams buttons, are ordinary links back to a small server ImposeIQ runs on the shop PC — set that up under Workflows → Settings → Approval links. Telegram only shows Open job when that server has a public address; Approve and Reject are there either way.

Webhooks: Zapier, Make, n8n, Slack, Teams

Settings → Webhooks fires suite events into other tools with no code: a job released to the floor, an order placed, a machine down, a workflow failed, an invoice paid — every event on the Notifications tab. Each webhook is an address another tool gives you; ImposeIQ POSTs each event you tick to it the moment it happens.

Get an address. Zapier: a Zap with Webhooks by Zapier → Catch Hook. Make: Webhooks → Custom webhook. n8n: a Webhook node (POST). Power Automate: When an HTTP request is received. Slack: an Incoming Webhook. Teams: a Workflows flow, Post to a channel when a webhook request is received. Discord: a channel webhook.
Add a webhook, paste the address, pick Send it as (JSON for Zapier, Make, n8n and Power Automate; Slack, Teams or Discord for those), and tick the events — or All events.
Save changes, pick an event beside Send a test and press it. The window shows what the receiver answered. In Zapier, press Test trigger and the sample appears with every field to map.
FieldWhat it holds
event, event_labelThe event id (mis.job.released, mis.order.received, maint.machine.down…) and its name. Filter on event when one hook carries several.
messageThe same one-line message the email and text alerts send.
dataThe details: job, title, customer, status, dueDate, quantity on job events; machine on maintenance events; file on workflow events.
urgent, group, occurred_atWhether the event is one that ignores off-hours, its group on the Notifications tab, and when it happened (UTC).
testtrue on anything sent by a Test button — filter it out in the Zap if a test should not create a real record.
delivery_id, sourceA unique id per send (also in the X-ImposeIQ-Delivery header) and the PC and version that sent it.
  • Two new events come with webhooks: Job released to the floor (the job became Ready — by hand, by a proof approval or with its gang) and Job started on the floor (the first operation started). Both can also go to email and text.
  • Internet tools only, by default. A webhook must be an https:// address on the internet. For n8n, Node-RED or Home Assistant on a shop server, tick On this network, which also allows http:// and private addresses.
  • Signing secret. Optional. With one, each request carries X-ImposeIQ-Timestamp and X-ImposeIQ-Signature: sha256= an HMAC-SHA256 of timestamp.body, so your receiver can prove it came from this shop.
  • When a send fails — a dropped connection, no answer in 10 seconds, 429 or a 5xx — it is tried three times, then shows as a red line in Recent deliveries on the People & teams tab. A 4xx is the receiver refusing and is not repeated.
  • Webhooks ignore quiet hours and do not need anything ticked on the Notifications tab. Addresses and secrets are encrypted like the other credentials and are not put in Settings backups — after a restore on a new PC, paste them in again.
  • The MIS CRM webhook is a different thing: it sends customer, deal, quote and invoice records for a CRM. Settings → Webhooks sends events from the whole suite.
Reference

Backup & Restore

Everything this suite remembers can be written to a single file on a schedule — the workflows, the rates and customers in the MIS, the storefronts, the presets in every design app, and the shop-wide settings. It is the difference between a failed disk costing you an afternoon and costing you a fortnight of rebuilding from memory. Open it from Settings → Backup.

What goes in the file

A backup is one .iqbak file, and every app is ticked by default. The list on the Backup screen is served by the backup itself rather than typed out separately, so an app that is covered always appears there — a screen that fell out of step would be the same as not backing something up.

AppWhat is carried
Suite settingsShop details, which machines are on the floor, tile visibility, alert routing, where mail and texts go, the job number pools and the paths to external tools. Losing the pools is worse than losing a setting — the counter restarts and the shop hands out a number that is already on a sheet on the floor.
Automation WorkflowsEvery workflow with its trigger and steps, the customer list, the media library, your shop details, the numbering sequences, jobs on hold, the installed VDP and imposer templates, and every named connection — SMTP, Pushover, Zapier, Slack/Teams, cloud accounts, Fiery servers, database connections and OCR.
ImposeIQ MISThe whole shop: cost centers and their rates, stock, routings, customers, quotes, jobs with their history, invoices and payments, vendors, purchase orders and the stock ledger — plus the letterhead logo. This is the single most expensive thing in the suite to rebuild by hand.
ImposeIQ StorefrontEvery storefront with its products and pricing, and the orders taken through them.
Embellishment StudioYour saved presets — the foil, spot UV, surface pattern and substrate combinations — and the section layout of the panel.
ImposeIQ VDPLayout presets, sheet and rotation defaults, the tracking sheet, the DC slug and the PDF/VT output condition.
OMR GeneratorThe mark configuration, plus the watch, output and completed folders.
Die Line ReaderYour saved color and dash set-ups for reading die-line PDFs.
MaskworkAppearance and working preferences.
JDF BridgeThe configured hot folders and what each one does with a file that lands in it. A JDF whose file name has J and three digits, such as Flyer_J045.jdf, becomes that DC job number if it is 001 to 250, whatever job ID the ticket holds. Otherwise a ticket whose job ID is not a number, such as A7, gets the next DC job number from the JDF Bridge range in Settings, Job numbers (100 to 200 unless changed, then it starts over); the activity list shows which one, and the sheet's QR still holds the job ID.
Image RescuePress target and the external upscaler command. These live in the shop settings, so they travel with Suite settings — the screen says so rather than showing an empty entry that looks like a failure.
No credentials, and it is enforced rather than promised — settings go into the file through a list that names what to include, so the SMTP password, the Twilio and Telegram tokens, the ntfy access token, the AI key and the Setup password hash cannot appear even if somebody adds a new one and forgets. On top of that, every JSON file collected is swept for credential-shaped fields before it is stored, because a connection can hold a key typed in plain text and it would otherwise travel base64-encoded where nobody would notice it. Hosts, ports, user names, folders and paths all stay — those are the configuration you are backing up. The stores holding GitHub, Netlify and Stripe tokens, the SFTP key and the licence are not collected at all. If anything is swept out, the backup says how many fields and from which file.
Customer work is left out on purpose — job artwork attached to MIS jobs and files uploaded through a storefront are not in the backup. They are files you already have, they run to gigabytes, and carrying them would turn a nightly config file into something nobody schedules. The MIS keeps its artwork in a folder of its own beside the app data; back that up with your ordinary file backup.

Restoring an .iqbak written by an older build still works — every app in one is still an app here. A file from a newer build is refused outright rather than half applied, and if it holds an app this version has never heard of, the restore screen says so instead of quietly dropping it.

Run data is deliberately left out: the blob store holding the PDFs of runs still in progress, the temporary working folder, the job logs, and the Workflow app's own backup folder. All of it is either regenerated by the next run or grows without bound, and would add hundreds of megabytes to every nightly file without helping you rebuild a machine. Any single file over 25 MB is skipped on the same grounds — when that happens the count is reported after the backup, so nothing is dropped silently.

Setting the schedule

Tick Back up automatically. It runs in the background whether or not an app window is open — including when ImposeIQ is sitting in the system tray.
Choose every day or once a week, and a time. Pick an hour the press is quiet. Weekly also asks for a weekday.
Pick the folder. Leave it empty and backups sit beside the app's own data. That is better than nothing, but a backup on the same disk as the original is lost with it — point this at a server share, a NAS, or a OneDrive/Dropbox folder and it costs you nothing more.
Set how many to keep. Fourteen daily files is a fortnight of history. Older ones are removed automatically so the folder never runs away with itself.
Press Back up now once. Proving it writes where you expect takes ten seconds and is the only way to know the schedule will work.
A missed backup is caught up, not skipped — a shop PC gets switched off at night. Rather than waiting for the next scheduled moment to come round, the app works from when the last backup actually ran: a machine that was off at 7pm on Friday backs up as soon as it is switched on Monday.

Under Settings → Notifications you can route Scheduled backup failed to a desktop popup, email or text. A backup that quietly stops working is worse than no backup at all, because nobody finds out until the morning they need the file.

Restoring

The Backup panel lists what is in the folder. Show opens it in Explorer; Restore… reads it and tells you what it contains — when it was taken, which machine from, and how many files and settings each app has — before anything is changed. Restore from a file… does the same for a backup you have brought over from another PC.

Restoring replaces, it does not merge. For the apps in the file, what is on this machine is overwritten. A copy of the current state is always written first as before-restore-… in the same folder, so a restore of the wrong file is recoverable.

Close and reopen any app window that was already open when you restored — presets are read when a window opens, so one left open on screen is still showing the old ones. Automation rescans its watch folders on its own, so restored hot folders start working without a restart.

Suite

Updates

ImposeIQ updates itself. A copy installed with the setup program checks imposeiq.com a minute and a half after it starts and every six hours after that, downloads a new version in the background and checks it against its SHA-512 fingerprint. Then the Home screen says ImposeIQ x.y.z is ready to install.

Restart and update on the Home screen (or the tray menu) closes ImposeIQ, installs the new version and opens it again — about a minute.
Later hides the message. The update then goes in the next time ImposeIQ is closed, so nobody is interrupted mid-job.
  • Settings → General → Updates has Check now, and two switches: check automatically, and download in the background. With downloading off you are told about a new version and press Download when it suits.
  • What is kept: the license key, settings, workflows, MIS data and everything else in your profile and in C:\ProgramData\ImposeIQ. If the ImposeIQ Workflows service is running it is stopped while the files are replaced and started again afterwards.
  • The portable copy cannot replace itself while it runs. It still checks, and when a new version is out it says so and opens the Downloads page.
  • The ImposeIQ update available event (Settings → Notifications, System and license) tells the shop once per version, by email, text or webhook.
  • No internet, or a firewall that blocks imposeiq.com and github.com: nothing breaks — the check just fails quietly and tries again later.
Publishing an update (for the developer). Raise the version in package.json, then npm run release: it builds the installer and writes public-site/updates/latest.yml. With a GitHub token in GITHUB_TOKEN it also creates the GitHub release and uploads the installer; otherwise it says what to upload. Then upload the public-site folder.
Reference

Tips & Troubleshooting

Symptom / questionWhat to do
"Source page doesn't match the bleed size" warningThe PDF's page size differs from trim + 2×bleed, so art would scale to fit and may distort. Fix the trim/bleed numbers, or tick Lock scale to place the file at native size, then fine-tune with Zoom (%).
Footer says more slits/columns than the DC allowsThe DC-618/648 have hard slit & cut limits. Reduce columns, widen gutters to butt-cut (no chip), or rotate the piece — the footer recalculates live.
Backs don't line up on the printed sheetCheck Back flips on (VDP) / the flip edge (ImposeIQ) matches how your press duplexes — long-edge flip mirrors left/right, short-edge mirrors top/bottom. Verify with Show Back.
Barcode or QR won't scan on dark stockEnable Bold (2 mm bars) in DC Marks, and keep the mark zones clear of artwork.
Everything is in the wrong unitThe inches/mm switch in the header (shared by the suite) converts every dimension field live. DC Marks stay in mm by design — that's how the finishers are specified.
Customer file has no bleed and the job needs itRun it through Preflight PRO with Add missing bleed ticked — it mirrors artwork outward only on pages that do not already have enough, and leaves the rest alone. If the file must not grow, leave that repair off and nothing is ever added.
RIP is complaining about RGB in the fileConvert RGB/Gray to CMYK in Preflight PRO does a real ICC conversion against a target profile — GRACoL for coated sheet-fed, FOGRA39 for European coated, and so on. Spot colours and anything already CMYK are left alone. Expect the file to get bigger: JPEGs come back out uncompressed, on purpose.
Imposed job comes out sideways when the file looks right on screenRotation carried in the page dictionary rather than in the artwork. Clear page rotation in Preflight PRO sets /Rotate to 0 on every page.
Spot UV looks right on screen but prints flatCheck the coating height. The channel is a build ramp, not an on/off stencil — any inked pixel gets the 10 µm floor and 100% black gets whatever the slider says, so a mask built mostly in mid-greys lands much thinner than the number at the top suggests. The usage read-out quotes the mean tone for exactly this reason.
Foil is lifting off the varnishDFL needs at least 25 µm of varnish under it to key into. Anything under the foil channel is lifted to that minimum on the exported plate, but if you are building the plates elsewhere, check the floor yourself.
Start every job the same wayUse Settings → Defaults (ImposeIQ) or Save current as default (VDP §4/§5), plus Templates / .viq projects for whole jobs.
Need the DC settings at the finisherTurn on the DC Marks slug line in Settings — Shrink Top, Marks Top/Right and the barcode number print right on the sheet.
Reprint a range of a VDP jobOpen the job's .viq, set From / To in Merge & Export to the records you need, and export. The sheet slug shows absolute record numbers to find the range.

ImposeIQ Suite · This guide was generated from the running applications — screenshots show the current build. Open this file any time from app/help/index.html.

Legal

About

ImposeIQ Suite

Version 3.2.4 · Imposition, VDP, OMR Generator, Embellishment Studio and Workflow Automation in one application.

License

ImposeIQ is commercial software supplied under license. See LICENSING.txt beside the application, or the tray icon → License…, for the terms covering this copy.

License keys and Demo

A license key can cover the whole suite or only some of its applications, hot folders and utilities. Open License… from the Home screen badge or the tray to see which tools your key covers.

  • Tools not on the key still open and work, but run as Demo: the Home tile and the window say DEMO, and everything the tool produces is marked.
  • How output is marked — PDFs get a diagonal DEMO watermark on every page, images (PNG, JPEG, TIFF, GIF, video) get DEMO drawn in, cutter XML and JDF get DEMO in front of the job name, DXF gets a DEMO comment, and every file name gets “Demo”. Printed reports show DEMO on each page.
  • Hot folders — a workflow's output is marked if Automation, or any suite tool the workflow ran (ImposeIQ, VDP, Preflight PRO, JDF Bridge, a tagger, Storefront), is not on the key.
  • Preflight PRO saves a repaired PDF, so it is marked like any other output — the DEMO watermark on every page and “Demo” in the file name — and the window says so above the list of what changed.
  • Programs with no output of their own (the DC Series XML Converter) and SecureBridge have nothing to mark; they start with a Demo notice instead.
  • Demo Mode (no key) marks every tool. An expired key will not start the suite; if the date passes while the suite is open, every tool turns to Demo until a new key is entered.
  • Keys issued before per-app licensing cover the whole suite.

ImposeIQ Suite is an independent product. It is designed to prepare work for, and to talk to, equipment and services made by the companies named below, but it is not made, endorsed, sponsored or certified by any of them.

Trademarks

All product names, logos, brands and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. They are used in this application and in this guide purely to identify the equipment, substrates and services the software works with — nominative use — and no affiliation or endorsement is implied.

MarkOwner
Unifoil®, Unilustre®, Holo Unilustre®, Ultralustre®, Holo Ultralustre®, Custom Finishes® Registered trademarks of Unifoil Corporation, Fairfield, New Jersey, USA — unifoil.com
Duplo®, DuSense®, and the DC, DPC, DBM, DPB, DFL, DF and HC product names Trademarks of Duplo Corporation and Duplo USA Corporation.
Fiery®, JobFlow, ImposeTrademarks of Fiery, LLC.
HP®, HP IndigoTrademarks of HP Inc.
Canon, Ricoh, Konica Minolta, Xerox, Sharp, Fujifilm Trademarks of Canon Inc., Ricoh Company Ltd., Konica Minolta Inc., Xerox Corporation, Sharp Corporation and FUJIFILM Corporation respectively.
Microsoft®, Windows, PowerPoint, Outlook, SharePoint, OneDrive, Microsoft Teams Trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Google, Google Drive, Google Cloud VisionTrademarks of Google LLC.
Adobe®, PDF, PDF/VTTrademarks of Adobe Inc.
Slack®Trademark of Slack Technologies, LLC.
Box®Trademark of Box, Inc.
Zapier®Trademark of Zapier, Inc.
Pushover®Trademark of Superblock, LLC.
About the Unifoil substrates — The metallized stock options in the Embellishment Studio are a visual simulation of the Unifoil range, provided so a printer can show a customer what the effect looks like on their own artwork. They are a preview, not a color proof and not a specification: always confirm the product, color, caliper, sheet size and press compatibility with Unifoil or your paper merchant before quoting or ordering.

Open-source acknowledgements

ImposeIQ is built on the work of others, and this release ships the following open-source components. Each remains under its own license and the copyright of its authors — our thanks to all of them.

ComponentVersionLicenseWhat it does here
Electron31.xMITThe desktop application framework the suite runs in.
pdf-lib1.17.1MITBuilds and edits the PDFs the suite produces.
PDF.js (pdfjs-dist)6.1.200Apache-2.0Renders and inspects PDF pages — previews, page geometry, spot-ink and layer detection. © Mozilla Foundation.
bwip-js4.11.2MITGenerates the barcodes and QR codes on DC marks and sheets.
chokidar3.6.0MITWatches hot folders for the workflow triggers.
basic-ftp5.3.1MITFTP/FTPS intake and delivery.
ssh2-sftp-client12.1.1Apache-2.0SFTP intake and delivery.
nodemailer7.0.13MIT-0Sends approval requests and customer notifications over SMTP.
UTIF.js3.1.0MITReads TIFF artwork.
Note — Full license texts for every component ship inside the application under node_modules/<package>/LICENSE. The MIT text below is reproduced in full because it covers most of the list; Apache-2.0 components are marked above and their notices travel with them.

The MIT License

The following applies to the MIT-licensed components listed above. Copyright is held by each component's own authors — see the LICENSE file shipped with that package for its copyright line. This license covers those third-party components, not ImposeIQ itself, which is supplied commercially under the terms in LICENSING.txt.

MIT License

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

Links in this section open in your own web browser rather than in the Help window.

↑